Acs 600 руководство по эксплуатации

• Contents

• Table of Contents

• Bookmarks

Summary of Contents for ABB ACS 600

• Interlogix TVE-DEC11

  © 2015 United Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. P/N 1072900A-EN • REV 1.0 • ISS 27JAN15 Interlogix is part of UTC Building & Industrial Systems, a unit of United Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. TVE-DEC11 IP Video Decoder Quick Start Guide Description Figure 1: Front panel Item LED indicator Description 1. Power The power LED 2. Link Network connection LE …

  TVE-DEC11 Media Converter, 2

• Rosendahl mif 4

  mif4 Instruction ManualRosendahl mif4 is a professional midi timecode interface with LED display, sync input and USB portwww.rosendahl-studiotechnik.comUnpacking and mounting into a 19″ rackmif4 comes with the following accessories:1 x USB power adapter1 x USB cable A-B2 x 1U rackmount brackets with screwsThe unit is shipped with four rubber feet mountedunderside with Phillips screws.If you …

  mif 4 Timer, 4

• Transition Networks CRS4Fxxxx-10x

  USER’S GUIDECRS4Fxxxx-10xSlide-in-Module MediaConverterRS485/422 Copper to Fiber Transition Networks CRS4Fxxxx-10x series media converters aredesigned to be installed in thePointSystem™ chassis and connectRS485/422 copper cable to fiber-optic cable at asynchronous datarates up to 1.25 Mb/s. The CRS4F31xx-10x media converters use a male DB-9 port for the copper link: The CRS4F32xx-10x media con …

  CRS4Fxxxx-10x Media Converter, 9

• V.TOP AVC05

  USBVideoGrabberAVC05ENUSBVideoGrabber ForWindowsOSforMacOS*Leproduitréelpeutêtredifférentdeceluidesphotos …

  AVC05 PCI Card, 9

Standard Application Program 6.xfor ACS 600 Frequency Converters

ACS 600 Firmware Manual

This manual includes information on:• Control Panel• Application macros (including the I/O

channel wiring diagrams)• Parameters• Fault tracing• Fieldbus control

� 20

Standard Application Program 6.xfor ACS 600 Frequency Converters

Firmware Manual

00 ABB Industry Oy. All Rights Reserved.

3AFY 61201441 R0725 ENEFFECTIVE: 16.10.2000

SUPERSEDES: 06.09.1999

Safety Instructions

Overview This chapter states the safety instructions which must be followed when installing, operating and servicing the ACS 600. If neglected, physical injury and death may follow, or damage may occur to the frequency converter, the motor and driven equipment. The material in this chapter must be studied before attempting any work on, or with, the unit.

Warnings and Notes This manual distinguishes two sorts of safety instructions. Warnings are used to inform of conditions which can, if proper steps are not taken, lead to a serious fault condition, physical injury and death. Notes are used when the reader is required to pay special attention or when there is additional information available on the subject. Notes are less crucial than Warnings, but should not be disregarded.

Warnings Readers are informed of situations that can result in serious physical injury and/or serious damage to equipment with the following symbols:

Notes Readers are notified of the need for special attention or additional information available on the subject with the following symbols:

Dangerous Voltage Warning: warns of situations in which a high voltage can cause physical injury and/or damage equipment. The text next to this symbol describes ways to avoid the danger.

General Warning: warns of situations which can cause physical injury and/or damage equipment by means other than electrical. The text next to this symbol describes ways to avoid the danger.

Electrostatic Discharge Warning: warns of situations in which an electrostatic discharge can damage equipment. The text next to this symbol describes ways to avoid the danger.

CAUTION! Caution aims to draw special attention to a particular issue.

Note: Note gives additional information or points out more information available on the subject.

Firmware Manual iii

Safety Instructions

General SafetyInstructions

These safety instructions are intended for all work on the ACS 600. In addition to the instructions given below, there are more safety instructions on the first pages of the appropriate hardware manual.

WARNING! All electrical installation and maintenance work on the ACS 600 should be carried out by qualified electricians.

The ACS 600 and adjoining equipment must be properly earthed.

Do not attempt any work on a powered ACS 600. After switching off the mains, always allow the intermediate circuit capacitors 5 minutes to discharge before working on the frequency converter, the motor or the motor cable. It is good practice to check (with a voltage indicating instrument) that the frequency converter is in fact discharged before beginning work.

The ACS 600 motor cable terminals are at a dangerously high voltage when mains power is applied, regardless of motor operation.

There can be dangerous voltages inside the ACS 600 from external control circuits when the ACS 600 mains power is shut off. Exercise appropriate care when working with the unit. Neglecting these instructions can cause physical injury and death.

WARNING! The ACS 600 introduces electric motors, drive train mechanisms and driven machines to an extended operating range. It should be determined from the outset that all equipment is up to these conditions.

Operation is not allowed if the motor nominal voltage is less than one half of the ACS 600 nominal input voltage, or the motor nominal current is less than 1/6 of the ACS 600 nominal output current. Proper attention should be given to the motor insulation properties. The ACS 600 output comprises of short, high voltage pulses (approximately 1.35 … 1.41 · mains voltage) regardless of output frequency. This voltage can be almost doubled by unfavourable motor cable properties. Contact an ABB office for additional information if multimotor operation is required. Neglecting these instructions can result in permanent damage to the motor.

All insulation tests must be carried out with the ACS 600 disconnected from the cabling. Operation outside the rated capacities should not be attempted. Neglecting these instructions can result in permanent damage to the ACS 600.

There are several automatic reset functions in the ACS 600. If selected, they reset the unit and resume operation after a fault. These functions should not be selected if other equipment is not compatible with this kind of operation, or dangerous situations can be caused by such action.

iv Firmware Manual

Table of Contents

Safety Instructions

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 – Introduction to This Manual

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Before You Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1What This Manual Contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Related Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Chapter 2 – Overview of ACS 600 Programming and the CDP 312 Control Panel

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1ACS 600 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Application Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1Parameter Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1

Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Panel Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Keypad Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Identification Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Actual Signal Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Parameter Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8Function Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9Drive Selection Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Operational Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Reading and Entering Packed Boolean Values on the CDP 312 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Chapter 3 – Start-up Data

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Start-up Data Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

ID Run Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5

Chapter 4 – Control Operation

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Actual Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Group 1 Actual Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1Group 2 Actual Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3Group 3 Actual Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4

Fault History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Local Control vs. External Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Firmware Manual v

Table of Contents

Local Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5External Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Chapter 5 – Standard Application Macro Programs

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1Application Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1User Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Application Macros Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Application Macro 1 – Factory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Operation Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Input and Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4External Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Control Signal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Application Macro 2 – Hand/Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Operation Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Input and Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7External Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Control Signal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Application Macro 3 – PID Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Operation Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Input and Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10External Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Control Signal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Application Macro 4 – Torque Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Operation Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Input and Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13External Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Control Signal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Application Macro 5 – Sequential Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16Operation Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16Input and Output Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17External Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18Control Signal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Parameter Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Group 10 Start/Stop/Dir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Group 11 Reference Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Group 12 Constant Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11Group 13 Analogue Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14Group 14 Relay Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18Group 15 Analogue Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24Group 16 System Ctr Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28Group 20 Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31Group 21 Start/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34Group 22 Accel/Decel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38Group 23 Speed Ctrl. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41

vi Firmware Manual

Table of Contents

Group 24 Torque Ctrl. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-46Group 25 Critical Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-47Group 26 Motor Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-49Group 30 Fault Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-52Group 31 Automatic Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-62Group 32 Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-64Group 33 Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-66Group 34 Process Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-67Group 35 Mot Temp Meas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-69Group 40 PID Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-75Group 42 Brake Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-87Group 45 Function Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-93Group 50 Encoder Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-95Group 51 Communication Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-97Group 52 Standard Modbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-97Group 60 MASTER/FOLLOWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-98Group 70 DDCS Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-105Group 90 D SET REC ADDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-106Group 92 D SET TR ADDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-106Group 96 EXTERNAL AO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-107Group 98 Option Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-109

Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing

Fault Tracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Fault Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1Fault History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2Fault and Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2

Appendix A – Complete Parameter Settings

Appendix B – Default Settings of Application Macros

Appendix C – Fieldbus Control

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1Control via NDCO Board Channel CH0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2

Fieldbus Adapter Communication Set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2AF 100 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3

Control through the Standard Modbus Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5Communication Set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5

Drive Control Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6The Fieldbus Control Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9

The Control Word and the Status Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9How Direction of Rotation Is Determined in Fieldbus Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-12Actual Values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14Modbus Addressing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14

Communication Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-17

Firmware Manual vii

Table of Contents

Appendix D – Analogue Extension Module NAIO

Speed Control Through NAIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1Basic Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-1NAIO Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-1ACS 600 Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-1Bipolar Input in Basic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-2Bipolar Input in Joystick Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .D-3

Index

viii Firmware Manual

Chapter 1 – Introduction to This Manual

Overview This chapter describes the purpose, contents and the intended audience of this manual. It also lists related publications.

This Manual is compatible with the ACS 600 Standard Application Program version 6.0 or later.

Before You Start The purpose of this manual is to provide you with the information necessary to control and program your ACS 600 drive.

The audience for this manual is expected to have:

• Knowledge of standard electrical wiring practices, electronic components, and electrical schematic symbols.

• Minimal knowledge of ABB product names and terminology.

• No experience or training in installing, operating, or servicing the ACS 600.

What This Manual Contains

Safety Instructions can be found on pages iii — iv of this manual. The Safety Instructions describe the formats for various warnings and notations used in this manual. This chapter also states the general safety instructions which must be followed.

Chapter 1 – Introduction, the chapter you are reading now, introduces you to the ACS 600 Firmware Manual.

Chapter 2 – Overview of ACS 600 Programming and the Control Panel provides an overview of programming your ACS 600. This chapter describes the operation of the Control Panel used for controlling and programming.

Chapter 3 – Start-up Data lists and explains the Start-up Data parameters.

Chapter 4 – Control Operation describes actual signals and keypad and external controls.

Chapter 5 – Standard Application Macro Programs describes the operation and suitable applications of five standard Application Macros and the User Macro.

Chapter 6 – Parameters lists the ACS 600 parameters and explains the functions of each parameter.

Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing lists the ACS 600 fault and warning messages, possible causes and remedies.

Firmware Manual 1-1

Chapter 1 – Introduction to This Manual

Appendix A – Complete Parameter Settings lists, in tabular form, all parameter settings for the ACS 600.

Appendix B – Default Settings of Application Macros lists default settings of ACS 600 Application Macros in tabular form.

Appendix C – Fieldbus Control contains the information needed to control the ACS 600 through a fieldbus adapter module. There are several fieldbus adapter modules for the ACS 600 available as optional equipment.

Appendix D – Analogue Extension Module NAIO contains the information needed to control the ACS 600 through an Analogue Extension Module NAIO (optional).

Index helps you locate the page numbers of topics contained in this manual.

Related Publications In addition to this manual the ACS 600 user documentation includes the following manuals:

• Start-up Guide for ACS 600 equipped with Standard Application Program (English code: 3BFE 64049224)

• Hardware manuals for various ACS 600 family members

• Several Installation and Start-up Guides for the optional devices for the ACS 600

1-2 Firmware Manual

Chapter 2 – Overview of ACS 600 Programming andthe CDP 312 Control Panel

Overview This chapter describes how to use the panel with ACS 600 to modify parameters, monitor actual values and control the drive.

Note: The CDP 312 Panel does not communicate with ACS 600 Standard Application Program versions 3.x or earlier. The CDP 311 Panel does not communicate with program version 5.x or later.

ACS 600 Programming The user can change the configuration of the ACS 600 to meet the needs of the application by programming. The ACS 600 is programmable through a set of parameters.

Application Macros Parameters can be set one by one or a preprogrammed set of parameters can be selected. Preprogrammed parameter sets are called Application Macros. See Chapter 5 – Standard Application Macro Programs for further information on the Application Macros.

Parameter Groups In order to simplify programming, parameters in the ACS 600 are organised in Groups. Parameters of the Start-Up Data Group are described in Chapter 3 – Start-up Data and other parameters in Chapter 6 – Parameters.

Start-up Data Parameters The Start-up Data Group contains the basic settings needed to match the ACS 600 with your motor and to set the Control Panel display language. This group also contains a list of preprogrammed Application Macros. The Start-up Data Group includes parameters that are set at start-up, and should not need to be changed later on. See Chapter 3 – Start-up Data for description of each parameter.

Control Panel The Control Panel is the device used for controlling and programming the ACS 600. The Panel can be attached directly to the door of the cabinet or it can be mounted, for example, in a control desk.

Firmware Manual 2-1

Chapter 2 – Overview of ACS 600 Programming and the CDP 312 Control Panel

Figure 2-1 The Control Panel.

Display The LCD type display has 4 lines of 20 characters.

The language is selected at start-up by Parameter 99.01 LANGUAGE.

Keys The keys on the Control Panel are flat, labelled push-buttons. Their functions are explained on the next page.

1 L » 1242.0 rpm IFREQ 45.00 HzCURRENT 80.00 APOWER 75.00 %

ACT PAR FUNC DRIVE

ENTER

LOC RESET REF

REM

I 0

2-2 Firmware Manual

Chapter 2 – Overview of ACS 600 Programming and the CDP 312 Control Panel

Figure 2-2 Control Panel Display indications and function of the Control Panel keys.

Figure 2-3 Operational commands of the Control Panel keys.

Parameter Mode

Function Mode

Drive Selection Mode

Act. Signal/Fault History

Enter selection modeAccept new signal

Group selection

Parameter selection

Enter change modeAccept new value

Fast value change

Slow value change

Row selection

Function start

Drive selection

Enter change modeAccept new value

Actual Signal Display Mode

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

selection

ID number change

ID Number of the Selected Drive

Panel StatusL = Local

The Value ofthe Reference

Run Status

O = Stop I = Run

Rotation Direction» = Forward# = Reverse

Group Number

Parameter Number Parameter Valueand Name

and Name

Device Type

ID Number

Status Row

Status Row

ACT

PAR

FUNC

DRIVE

Actual Signals

= Run disabled

Names andValues

1 L » 1242.0 rpm IFREQ 45.00 HzCURRENT 80.00 APOWER 75.00 %

1 L » 1242.0 rpm I10 START/STOP01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR DI1,2

1 L » 1242.0 rpm IUPLOAD <=<=DOWNLOAD =>=>CONTRAST 7

ACS 601 75 kW

ASAA5000 xxxxxxID NUMBER 1

Status Row

SelectableFunctions

Application SW Name and Version Date

Act. Signal/Fault Message scrolling

R = External

LOC

RESET

REF

REM Keypad / External Control

Fault Reset

Reference Setting Function

Forward

Reverse

Start

Stop

I

0

Firmware Manual 2-3

Chapter 2 – Overview of ACS 600 Programming and the CDP 312 Control Panel

Panel Operation The following is a description of the operation of the Control Panel. The Control Panel Keys and Displays are explained in Figure 2-1, Figure 2-2, and Figure 2-3.

Keypad Modes The Control Panel has four different keypad modes: Actual Signal Display Mode, Parameter Mode, Function Mode, and Drive Selection Mode. In addition to these, there is a special Identification Display, which is displayed after connecting the panel to the link. The Identification Display and the keypad modes are described briefly below.

Identification Display When the panel is connected for the first time, or the power is applied to the drive, the Identification Display appears.

Note: The panel can be connected to the drive while power is applied to the drive.

After two seconds, the display will clear, and the Actual Signals of the drive will appear.

Actual Signal DisplayMode

This mode includes two displays, the Actual Signal Display and the Fault History Display. The Actual Signal Display is displayed first when the Actual Signal Display mode is entered. If the drive is in a fault condition, the Fault Display will be shown first.

The panel will automatically return to the Actual Signal Display Mode from other modes if no keys are pressed within one minute (exceptions: Status Display in Drive Selection Mode and Fault Display Mode).

In the Actual Signal Display Mode you can monitor three Actual Signals at a time. For more information of actual signals see Chapter 4 – Control Operation. How to select the three Actual Signals to the display is explained in Table 2-2.

The Fault History includes information on 64 faults and warnings that occurred in your ACS 600. 16 remain in the memory over a power switch-off. The procedure for clearing the Fault History is described in Table 2-3.

The table below shows the events that are stored in the Fault History. For each event it is described what information is included.

ACS 600 75 kW

ID NUMBER 1

2-4 Firmware Manual

Chapter 2 – Overview of ACS 600 Programming and the CDP 312 Control Panel

When a fault or warning occurs in the drive, the message will be displayed immediately, except in the Drive Selection Mode. Table 2-4 shows how to reset a fault. From the fault display, it is possible to change to other displays without resetting the fault. If no keys are pressed the fault or warning text is displayed as long as the fault exists.

See Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing for information on fault tracing.

Table 2-1 How to display the full name of the three Actual Signals.

Step Function Press key Display

1. To display the full name of the three actual signals.

Hold

2. To return to the Actual Signal Display Mode.

Release

1 L » 1242.0 rpm I2 LAST FAULT+OVERVOLTAGE 1121 H 1 MIN 23 S

Event Information

A fault is detected by ACS 600. Sequential number of the event.Name of the fault and a “+” sign in front of the name.Total power on time.

A fault is reset by user. Sequential number of the event.-RESET FAULT text.Total power on time.

A warning is activated by ACS 600.

Sequential number of the event.Name of the warning and a “+” sign in front of the name.Total power on time.

A warning is deactivated by ACS 600.

Sequential number of the event.Name of the warning and a “-” sign in front of the name.Total power on time.

Sequential number (1 is the most recent event)

Sign

Power-on time

Name

A Fault History View

ACT

1 L » 1242.0 rpm IFREQUENCYCURRENTPOWER

ACT

1 L » 1242.0 rpm IFREQ 45.00 HzCURRENT 80.00 APOWER 75.00 %

Firmware Manual 2-5

Chapter 2 – Overview of ACS 600 Programming and the CDP 312 Control Panel

Table 2-2 How to select Actual Signals to the display.

Step Function Press key Display

1. To enter the Actual Signal Display Mode.

2. To select a row (a blinking cursor indicates the selected row).

3. To enter the Actual Signal Selection Function.

4. To select an actual signal.

To change the actual signal group.

5.a To accept the selection and to return to the Actual Signal Display Mode.

5.b To cancel the selection and keep the original selection, press any of the Mode keys

The selected Keypad Mode is entered.

ACT 1 L » 1242.0 rpm IFREQ 45.00 HzCURRENT 80.00 APOWER 75.00 %

1 L » 1242.0 rpm IFREQ 45.00 HzCURRENT 80.00 APOWER 75.00 %

ENTER 1 L » 1242.0 rpm I1 ACTUAL SIGNALS04 CURRENT 80.00 A

1 L » 1242.0 rpm I1 ACTUAL SIGNALS05 TORQUE 70.00 %

ENTER 1 L » 1242.0 rpm IFREQ 45.00 HzTORQUE 80.00 APOWER 75.00 %

ACT

FUNC DRIVE

PAR 1 L » 1242.0 rpm IFREQ 45.00 HzCURRENT 80.00 APOWER 75.00 %

2-6 Firmware Manual

Chapter 2 – Overview of ACS 600 Programming and the CDP 312 Control Panel

Table 2-3 How to display a fault and reset the Fault History. The fault history cannot be reset if there is a fault or warning active.

Table 2-4 How to display and reset an active fault.

Step Function Press key Display

1. To enter the Actual Signal Display Mode.

2. To enter the Fault History Display.

3. To select the previous (UP) or the next fault/warning (DOWN).

To clear the Fault History.

The Fault History is empty.

4. To return to the Actual Signal Display Mode.

Step Function Press Key Display

1. To display an active fault.

2. To reset the fault.

ACT 1 L » 1242.0 rpm IFREQ 45.00 HzCURRENT 80.00 APOWER 75.00 %

1 L » 1242.0 rpm I1 LAST FAULT+OVERCURRENT 6451 H 21 MIN 23 S

1 L » 1242.0 rpm I2 LAST FAULT+OVERVOLTAGE 1121 H 1 MIN 23 S

RESET 1 L » 1242.0 rpm I2 LAST FAULT

H MIN S

1 L » 1242.0 rpm IFREQ 45.00 HzCURRENT 80.00 APOWER 75.00 %

ACT 1 L » 1242.0 rpm ACS 601 75 kW** FAULT **ACS 600 TEMP

RESET 1 L » 1242.0 rpm OFREQ 45.00 HzCURRENT 80.00 APOWER 75.00 %

Firmware Manual 2-7

Chapter 2 – Overview of ACS 600 Programming and the CDP 312 Control Panel

Parameter Mode The Parameter Mode is used for changing the ACS 600 parameters. When this mode is entered for the first time after power up, the display will show the first parameter of the first group. The next time the Parameter Mode is entered, the previously selected parameter is shown.

Table 2-5 How to select a parameter and change the value.

Step Function Press key Display

1. To enter the Parameter Mode.

2. To select a different group.

3. To select a parameter.

4. To enter the Parameter Setting function.

5. To change the parameter value. (slow change for numbers and text)

(fast change for numbers only)

6a. To save the new value.

6b. To cancel the new setting and keep the original value, press any of the Mode keys.The selected Keypad Mode is entered.

PAR 1 L » 1242.0 rpm O10 START/STOP/DIR01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR DI1,2

1 L » 1242.0 rpm O11 REFERENCE SELECT01 KEYPAD REF SEL REF1 (rpm)

1 L » 1242.0 rpm O11 REFERENCE SELECT03 EXT REF1 SELECT AI1

ENTER 1 L » 1242.0 rpm O11 REFERENCE SELECT03 EXT REF1 SELECT[AI1]

1 L » 1242.0 rpm O11 REFERENCE SELECT03 EXT REF1 SELECT[AI2]

ENTER 1 L » 1242.0 rpm O11 REFERENCE SELECT03 EXT REF1 SELECT AI2

ACT

FUNC DRIVE

PAR 1 L » 1242.0 rpm O11 REFERENCE SELECT03 EXT REF1 SELECT AI1

2-8 Firmware Manual

Chapter 2 – Overview of ACS 600 Programming and the CDP 312 Control Panel

Function Mode The Function Mode is used to select special functions. These functions include Parameter Upload, Parameter Download and setting the contrast of the Control Panel display.

Parameter Upload will copy all parameters and the results of motor identification from the drive to the panel. The upload function can be performed while the drive is running. Only the STOP command can be given during the uploading process.

Table 2-6 and subsection Copying Parameters from One Unit to Other Units below describe how to select and perform Parameter Upload and Parameter Download functions.

Note:

• By default, Parameter Download will copy parameter Groups 10 to 97 stored in the panel to the drive. Groups 98 and 99 concerning options, language, macro and motor data are not downloaded.

• Uploading has to be done before downloading.

• The parameters can be uploaded and downloaded only if the drive firmware versions (see Parameters 33.01 SOFTWARE VERSION and 33.02 APPL SW VERSION) of the destination drive are the same as the versions of the source drive.

• The drive must be stopped during the downloading process.

Table 2-6 How to select and perform a function.

Step Function Press Key Display

1. To enter the Function Mode.

2. To select a function (a flashing cursor indicates the selected function).

3. To start the selected function.

ACS 600

UPLOAD

DOWNLOAD

FUNC 1 L » 1242.0 rpm OUPLOAD <=<=DOWNLOAD =>=>CONTRAST 4

1 L » 1242.0 rpm OUPLOAD <=<=DOWNLOAD =>=>CONTRAST 4

ENTER 1 L » 1242.0 rpm O

=>=>=>=>=>=>=>DOWNLOAD

Firmware Manual 2-9

Chapter 2 – Overview of ACS 600 Programming and the CDP 312 Control Panel

Table 2-7 How to set the contrast of the panel display.

Step Function Press Key Display

1. To enter the Function Mode.

2. To select a function (a flashing cursor indicates the selected function).

3. To enter the contrast setting function.

4. To adjust the contrast.

5.a To accept the selected value.

5.b To cancel the new setting and retain the original value, press any of the Mode keys.

The selected Keypad Mode is entered.

FUNC 1 L » 1242.0 rpm OUPLOAD <=<=DOWNLOAD =>=>CONTRAST 4

1 L » 1242.0 rpm OUPLOAD <=<=DOWNLOAD =>=>CONTRAST 4

ENTER 1 L » 1242.0 rpm OCONTRAST [4]

1 L » 1242.0 rpm OCONTRAST [6]

ENTER 1 L » 1242.0 rpm OUPLOAD <=<=DOWNLOAD =>=>CONTRAST 6

ACT

FUNC DRIVE

PAR 1 L » 1242.0 rpm OUPLOAD <=<=DOWNLOAD =>=>CONTRAST 4

2-10 Firmware Manual

Chapter 2 – Overview of ACS 600 Programming and the CDP 312 Control Panel

Copying Parameters fromOne Unit to Other Units

You can copy parameters from one drive to another by using the Parameter Upload and Parameter Download functions in the Function Mode. Follow the procedure below:

1. Select the correct options (Group 98), language and macro (Group 99) for each drive.

2. Set the rating plate values for the motors (Group 99), and perform the identification for each motor (the Identification Magnetisation at zero speed by pressing start, or an ID Run. For the ID Run procedure see Chapter 3 – Start-up Data).

3. Set the parameters in Groups 10 to 97 as preferred in one ACS 600 drive.

4. Upload the parameters from the ACS 600 to the panel (see Table 2-6).

5. Press the key to change to external control (no L visible on the first row of the display).

6. Disconnect the panel and reconnect it to the next ACS 600 unit.

7. Ensure the target ACS 600 is in Local control (L shown on the first row of the display). If necessary, change by pressing .

8. Download the parameters from the panel to the ACS 600 unit (see Table 2-6).

9. Repeat steps 7. and 8. for the rest of the units.

Note: Parameters in Groups 98 and 99 concerning options, language, macro and motor data are not downloaded.1)

LOC

REM

LOC

REM

1) The restriction prevents downloading of incorrect motor data (Group 99). In special cases it is also possible to download Groups 98 and 99 and the results of the motor identification. For more informa-tion, please contact your local ABB representative.

Firmware Manual 2-11

Chapter 2 – Overview of ACS 600 Programming and the CDP 312 Control Panel

Drive Selection Mode In normal use the features available in the Drive Selection Mode are not needed; these features are reserved for applications where several drives are connected to one Panel Link. (For more information, see the Installation and Start-up Guide for the Panel Bus Connection Interface Module, NBCI, Code: 3AFY 58919748).

Panel Link is the communication link connecting the Control Panel and the ACS 600. Each on-line station must have an individual identification number (ID). By default, the ID number of the ACS 600 is 1.

CAUTION! The default ID number setting of the ACS 600 should not be changed unless it is to be connected to the Panel Link with other drives on-line.

Table 2-8 How to select a drive and change its ID number.

Step Function Press key Display

1. To enter the Drive Selection Mode.

2. To select the next drive/view.

The ID number of the station is changed by first pressing ENTER (the brackets round the ID number appear) and then adjusting the value with buttons. The new value is accepted with ENTER. The power of the ACS 600 must be switched off to validate its new ID number setting (the new value is not displayed until the power is switched off and on).

The Status Display of all devices connected to the Panel Link is shown after the last individual station. If all stations do not fit on the display at once, press to view the rest of them.

Status Display Symbols:á = Drive stopped, direction forwardÑ = Drive running, direction reverseF = Drive has tripped on a fault

3. To connect to the last displayed drive and to enter another mode, press one of the Mode keys.

The selected Keypad Mode is entered.

DRIVEACS 600 75 kW

ASAAA5000 xxxxxxID NUMBER 1

ACS 600 75 kW

ASAA5000 xxxxxxID NUMBER 1

1á

PAR

FUNC

ACT 1 L » 1242.0 rpm IFREQ 45.00 HzCURRENT 80.00 APOWER 75.00 %

2-12 Firmware Manual

Chapter 2 – Overview of ACS 600 Programming and the CDP 312 Control Panel

Operational Commands Operational commands control the operation of the ACS 600. They include starting and stopping the drive, changing the direction of rotation and adjusting the reference. The reference value is used for controlling motor speed or torque.

Changing ControlLocation

Operational commands can be given from the Control Panel always when the status row is displayed and the control location is the panel. This is indicated by L (Local Control) on the display. R (Remote Control) indicates that External control is active and the Panel is the signal source for the external reference or the Start/Stop/Direction signals the ACS 600 is following.

If there is neither an L nor an R on the first row of the display, the drive is controlled by another device. Operational commands cannot be given from this panel. Only monitoring actual signals, setting parameters, uploading and changing ID numbers is possible.

The control is changed between Local and External control locations by pressing the LOC REM key. See Chapter 4 – Control Operation for the explanation of Local and External control.

Start, Stop, Direction andReference

Start, Stop and Direction commands are given from the panel by pressing , , or . Table 2-9 explains how to set the Reference from the panel.

1 L » 1242.0 rpm I 1 R » 1242.0 rpm I

Local Control External Control by Panel

1 » 1242.0 rpm I

External Control through the I/O interface or communication module

I 0

Firmware Manual 2-13

Chapter 2 – Overview of ACS 600 Programming and the CDP 312 Control Panel

Table 2-9 How to set the reference.

Reading and EnteringPacked Boolean Values

on the CDP 312

Some actual values and parameters are Packed Boolean, i.e. each individual bit has a defined meaning (explained at the corresponding signal or parameter). On the CDP 312 Control Panel, Packed Boolean values are read and entered in hexadecimal format.

In this example, Bits 1, 3 and 4 of the Packed Boolean value are ON:

Step Function Press Key Display

1. To enter a Keypad Mode displaying the status row, press a Mode key.

2. To enter the Reference Setting function. A blinking cursor indicates that the Reference Setting function has been selected.

3. To change the reference.(slow change)

(fast change)

4.a To save the reference, press Enter.The value is stored in the permanent memory; it is restored automatically after power switch-off.

4.b To escape the Reference Setting Mode without saving, press any of the Mode keys.

The selected Keypad Mode is entered.

ACT PAR

FUNC

1 L » 1242.0 rpm IFREQ 45.00 HzCURRENT 80.00 APOWER 75.00 %

REF 1 L «[ 1242.0 rpm]IFREQ 45.00 HzCURRENT 80.00 APOWER 75.00 %

1 L «[ 1325.0 rpm]IFREQ 48.00 HzCURRENT 85.00 APOWER 80.00 %

ENTER 1 L » 1325.0 rpm IFREQ 48.00 HzCURRENT 85.00 APOWER 80.00 %

ACT PAR

FUNC DRIVE

1 L » 1325.0 rpm IFREQ 48.00 HzCURRENT 85.00 APOWER 80.00 %

Boolean 0000 0000 0001 1010Hex 0 0 1 A

Bit 15 Bit 0

2-14 Firmware Manual

Chapter 3 – Start-up Data

Overview This chapter lists and explains the Start-up Data Parameters. The Start-up Data Parameters are a special set of parameters that allow you to set up the ACS 600 and motor information. Start-up Data Parameters should only need to be set during start-up and should not need to be changed afterwards.

Start-up Data Parameters

When changing the value of the Start-up Data Parameters, follow the procedure described in Chapter 2 – Overview of ACS 600 Programming…, Table 2-5. Table 3-1, lists the Start-up Data Parameters. The Range/Unit column in Table 3-1 shows the parameter values, which are explained in detail below the table.

WARNING! Running the motor and the driven equipment with incorrect start-up data can result in improper operation, reduction in control accuracy and damage to equipment.

Table 3-1 Group 99, Start-up Data Parameters.

Parameter Range/Unit Description

01 LANGUAGE Languages Display language selection.

02 APPLICATION MACRO

Application Macros Application Macro selection.

03 APPLIC RESTORE

NO; YES Restores parameters to factory setting values.

04 MOTOR CTRL MODE

DTC; SCALAR Motor control mode selection.

05 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE

1/2 · UN of ACS 600 … 2 · UN of ACS 600

Nominal voltage from the motor rating plate.

06 MOTOR NOM CURRENT

1/6 · I2hd of ACS 600 … 2 · I2hd of ACS 600

Matches the ACS 600 to the rated motor current.

07 MOTOR NOM FREQ

8 … 300 Hz Nominal frequency from the motor rating plate.

08 MOTOR NOM SPEED

1 … 18000 rpm Nominal speed from the motor rating plate.

09 MOTOR NOM POWER

0 … 9000 kW Nominal power from the motor rating plate.

10 MOTOR ID RUN NO; STANDARD; REDUCED

Selects the type of the motor identification run.

Firmware Manual 3-1

Chapter 3 – Start-up Data

Parameters 99.04 … 99.09 are always to be set at start-up.

If several motors are connected to the ACS 600, some additional instructions must be considered when setting the Start-up Data Parameters. Please contact your local ABB representative for more information.

99.01 LANGUAGE The ACS 600 displays all information in the language you select. The alternatives are:

• English, English (Am), French, Spanish, Portuguese, German, Italian, Dutch, Danish, Swedish, Finnish, Czech, Polish

If English (Am) is selected, the unit of power used is HP instead of kW.

99.02 APPLICATIONMACRO

This parameter is used to select the Application Macro which will configure the ACS 600 for a particular application. Refer to Chapter 5 – Standard Application Macro Programs for a list and description of available Application Macros. There is also a selection for saving the current settings as a User Macro (USER 1 SAVE or USER 2 SAVE), and recalling these settings (USER 1 LOAD or USER 2 LOAD).

There are parameters that are not included in Macros. See section 99.03 APPLIC RESTORE.

Note: User Macro load restores also the motor settings of the Start-up Data group and the results of the Motor Identification. Check that the settings correspond to the motor used.

99.03 APPLIC RESTORE Selection YES restores the original settings of an application macro as follows:

• If a standard macro (Factory, … , Sequential Control) is in use, the parameter values are restored to the default settings (factory settings). Exception: Parameter settings in Group 99 remain unchanged. Results of the motor identification remain unchanged.

• If User Macro 1 or 2 is in use, the parameter values are restored to the last saved values. In addition, the last saved results of the motor identification are restored (see Chapter 5 – Standard Application Macro Programs). Exceptions: Settings of Parameters 16.05 USER MACRO IO CHG and 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO remain unchanged.

Note: The parameter settings and the results of motor identification are restored according to the same principles when a macro is changed to another.

3-2 Firmware Manual

Chapter 3 – Start-up Data

99.04 MOTOR CTRLMODE

This parameter sets the motor control mode.

DTCThe DTC (Direct Torque Control) mode is suitable for most applications. The ACS 600 performs precise speed and torque control of standard squirrel cage motors without pulse encoder feedback.

If several motors are connected to the ACS 600, there are certain restrictions on the usage of DTC. Please contact your local ABB representative for more information.

SCALARThe scalar control should be selected in those special cases in which the DTC cannot be applied. The SCALAR control mode is recommended for multimotor drives when number of motors connected to the ACS 600 is variable. The SCALAR control is also recommended when the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the nominal current of the inverter or the inverter is used for test purposes with no motor connected.

The outstanding motor control accuracy of DTC cannot be achieved in the scalar control mode. The differences between the SCALAR and DTC control modes are discussed further in this manual in relevant parameter lists.

There are some standard features that are disabled in the SCALAR control mode: Motor Identification Run (Group 99), Speed Limits (Group 20), Torque Limit (Group 20), DC Hold (Group 21), DC Magnetizing (Group 21), Speed Controller Tuning (Group 23), Torque Control (Group 24), Flux Optimization (Group 26), Flux Braking (Group 26), Underload Function (Group 30), Motor Phase Loss Protection (Group 30), Motor Stall Protection (Group 30).

99.05 MOTOR NOMVOLTAGE

This parameter matches the ACS 600 with the nominal voltage of the motor as indicated on the motor rating plate.

Note: It is not allowed to connect a motor with nominal voltage less than 1/2 · UN or more than 2 · UN of the ACS 600.

99.06 MOTOR NOMCURRENT

This parameter matches the ACS 600 to the rated motor current. The allowed range 1/6 · I2hd … 2 · I2hd of ACS 600 is valid for DTC motor control mode. In SCALAR mode the allowed range is 0 · I2hd … 2 · I2hd of ACS 600.

Correct motor run requires that the magnetizing current of the motor does not exceed 90 per cent of the nominal current of the inverter.

99.07 MOTOR NOMFREQUENCY

This parameter matches the ACS 600 to the rated motor frequency, adjustable from 8 Hz to 300 Hz.

Firmware Manual 3-3

Chapter 3 – Start-up Data

99.08 MOTOR NOMSPEED

This parameter matches the ACS 600 to the nominal speed as indicated on the motor rating plate.

Note: It is very important to set this parameter exactly to the value given on the motor rating plate to guarantee proper operation of the drive. The motor synchronous speed or another approximate value must not be given instead!

Note: The speed limits in Group 20 Limits are linked to the setting of 99.08 MOTOR NOM SPEED. If value of Parameter 99.08 MOTOR NOM SPEED is changed, the speed limit settings change automatically as well.

99.09 MOTOR NOMPOWER

This parameter matches the ACS 600 to the rated power of the motor, adjustable between 0 kW and 9000 kW.

99.10 MOTOR ID RUN This parameter is used to initiate the Motor Identification Run. During the run, the ACS 600 will identify the characteristics of the motor for optimum motor control. The ID Run takes about one minute.

The ID run cannot be performed if the scalar control mode is selected (Parameter 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is set to SCALAR).

NO The Motor ID Run is not performed. This can be selected in most applications. The motor model is calculated at first start by magnetising the motor for 20 to 60 s at zero speed.

Note: The ID Run (Standard or Reduced) should be selected if:

• operation point is near zero speed

• operation at torque range above the motor nominal torque within wide speed range and without any pulse encoder (i.e. without any measured speed feedback) is required.

STANDARD Performing the Standard Motor ID Run guarantees that the best possible control accuracy is achieved. The motor must be de-coupled from the driven equipment before performing the Standard Motor ID Run.

REDUCEDThe Reduced Motor ID Run should be selected instead of the Standard ID Run:

• if mechanical losses are higher than 20 % (i.e. the motor cannot be de-coupled from the driven equipment)

• if flux reduction is not allowed while the motor is running (i.e. in case of a braking motor in which the brake switches on if the flux is reduced below a certain level).

3-4 Firmware Manual

Chapter 3 – Start-up Data

Note: Check the rotation direction of the motor before starting the Motor ID Run. During the run the motor will rotate in the forward direction.

WARNING! The motor will run at up to approximately 50 % … 80 % of the nominal speed during the Motor ID Run. BE SURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE MOTOR ID RUN!

ID Run Procedure To perform the Motor ID Run:

Note: If parameter values (Group 10 to 98) are changed before the ID Run, check that the new settings meet the following conditions:

• 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED < 0.

• 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED > 80 % of motor rated speed.

• 20.03 MAXIMUM CURRENT > 100*Ihd.

• 20.04 MAXIMUM TORQUE > 50 %.

1. Ensure that the Panel is in the local control mode (L displayed on the status row). Press the key to switch modes.

2. Change the selection to STANDARD or REDUCED:

3. Press ENTER to verify selection. The following message will be displayed:

LOC

REM

1 L ->1242.0 rpm O99 START-UP DATA10 MOTOR ID RUN[STANDARD]

1 L ->1242.0 rpm OACS 600 55 kW**WARNING**ID RUN SEL

Firmware Manual 3-5

Chapter 3 – Start-up Data

4. To start the ID Run, press the key. The run enable signal must be active (see Parameter 16.01 RUN ENABLE).

In general it is recommended not to press any control panel keys during the ID run. However:

• The Motor ID Run can be stopped at any time by pressing the Control Panel key or removing the Run enable signal.

• After the ID Run is started with the key, it is possible to monitor the actual values by first pressing the ACT key and then the key.

Warning when the ID Run is started

Warning during the ID Run Warning after a successfully completed ID Run

1 L -> 1242.0 rpm IACS 600 55 kW**WARNING**MOTOR STARTS

1 L -> 1242.0 rpm IACS 600 55 kW**WARNING**ID RUN

1 L -> 1242.0 rpm IACS 600 55 kW**WARNING**ID DONE

3-6 Firmware Manual

Chapter 4 – Control Operation

Overview This chapter describes the Actual Signals, the Fault History, and the Local and External control modes.

Actual Signals Actual Signals monitor ACS 600 functions. They do not affect the performance of the ACS 600. Actual Signal values are measured or calculated by the drive and they cannot be set by the user.

To select the actual values to be displayed follow the procedure described in Chapter 2 – Overview…, Table 2-2.

Group 1 Actual Signals

Table 4-1 Group 1 Actual Signals. The signals marked with * are updated only when the PID Control Macro is selected.

Actual Signal Short Name Range/Unit Description

01 PROCESS VARIABLE PROC VAR 0 … 100000/user units

Process variable based on settings in Parameter Group 34.

02 SPEED SPEED rpm Calculated speed, in motor rpm. Filter time setting by 34.04 MOTOR SP FILTER TIM.

03 FREQUENCY FREQ Hz Calculated motor frequency.

04 CURRENT CURRENT A Measured motor current.

05 TORQUE TORQUE % Calculated motor torque. 100 is the motor nominal torque rating. Filter time setting by 34.05 TORQ ACT FILT TIM.

06 POWER POWER % Motor power. 100 is the nominal power rating.

07 DC BUS VOLTAGE V DC BUS V V Measured Intermediate circuit voltage.

08 MAINS VOLTAGE MAINS V V Calculated supply voltage.

09 OUTPUT VOLTAGE OUT VOLT V Calculated motor voltage.

10 ACS 600 TEMP ACS TEMP C Temperature of the heatsink.

11 EXTERNAL REF 1 EXT REF1 rpm, Hz External reference 1. The unit is Hz with scalar motor control mode only. See the section Local Control vs. External Control in this chapter

12 EXTERNAL REF 2 EXT REF2 % External reference 2. See the section Local Control vs. External Control in this chapter.

13 CTRL LOCATION CTRL LOC LOCAL; EXT1; EXT2

Active control location. See the section Local Control vs. External Control in this chapter.

14 OP HOUR COUNTER OP HOURS h Elapsed time meter. The timer is running when the NAMC board is powered.

15 KILOWATT HOURS KW HOURS kWh kWh meter.

16 APPL BLOCK OUTPUT APPL OUT % Application block output signal. See Figure 4-3.

17 DI6-1 STATUS DI6-1 Status of digital inputs. 0 V = “0”+24 VDC = “1”

Firmware Manual 4-1

Chapter 4 – Control Operation

18 AI1 (V) AI1 (V) V Value of analogue input 1.

19 AI2 (mA) AI2 (mA) mA Value of analogue input 2.

20 AI3 (mA) AI3 (mA) mA Value of analogue input 3.

21 RO3-1 STATUS RO3-1 Status of relay outputs. 1 = relay is energised,0 = relay is de-energised

22 AO1 (mA) AO1 (mA) mA Value of analogue output 1.

23 AO2 (mA) AO2 (mA) mA Value of analogue output 2.

24 ACTUAL VALUE 1 * ACT VAL1 % Feedback signal for the PID Controller.

25 ACTUAL VALUE 2 * ACT VAL2 % Feedback signal for the PID Controller.

26 CONTROL DEVIATION* CONT DEV % Deviation of the PID Controller (difference between the reference value and the actual value of the PID process controller).

27 APPLICATION MACRO MACRO FACTORY; HAND/AUTO; PID-CTRL; T-CTRL; SEQ CTRL;USER 1 LOAD;USER 2 LOAD

Active application macro (value of Parameter 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO)

28 EXT AO1 [mA] EXT AO1 mA Value of output 1 of the NAIO Analogue I/O Extension Module (optional).

29 EXT AO2 [mA] EXT AO2 mA Value of output 2 of the NAIO Analogue I/O Extension Module (optional).

30 PP 1 TEMP PP 1 TEM °C IGBT maximum temperature inside inverter 1 (used only in the high power units with parallel inverters)

31 PP 2 TEMP PP 2 TEM °C IGBT maximum temperature inside inverter 2 (used only in the high power units with parallel inverters)

32 PP 3 TEMP PP 3 TEM °C IGBT maximum temperature inside inverter 3 (used only in the high power units with parallel inverters)

32 PP 4 TEMP PP 4 TEM °C IGBT maximum temperature inside inverter 4 (used only in the high power units with parallel inverters)

34 ACTUAL VALUE ACT VAL % PID controller actual value (see Parameter 40.06 ACTUAL VALUE SEL)

35 MOTOR 1 TEMP M1 TEMP °C/ohm Measured temperature of motor 1. See Parameter 35.01 MOT1 TEMP AI1 SEL.

36 MOTOR 2 TEMP M2 TEMP °C/ohm Measured temperature of motor 2. See Parameter 35.04 MOT2 TEMP AI2 SEL.

37 MOTOR TEMP EST MOTOR TE °C Estimated motor temperature.

38 AI5 mA AI5 mA mA Value of analogue input AI5 read from AI1 of the Analogue I/O Extension Module (NAIO). See Group 98 Option Modules.1)

39 AI6 mA AI6 mA mA Value of analogue input AI6 read from AI1 of the Analogue I/O Extension Module (NAIO). See Group 98 Option Modules.1)

40 DI7..12 STATUS DI7..12 Status of digital inputs DI7 to DI12 read from the Digital I/O Extension Modules (NDIO). See Group 98 Option Modules.

41 EXT RO STATUS EXT RO Status of external relay outputs on the Digital I/O Extension Module no. 1 (NDIO).1 = relay is energised, 0 = relay is de-energised

Actual Signal Short Name Range/Unit Description

0000001

DI7 is on

0000001RO1/NDIO 1is on

4-2 Firmware Manual

Chapter 4 – Control Operation

1) A voltage signal connected to an analogue input on the NAIO Analogue I/O Extension Module is also displayed in mA (instead of V).

Group 2 Actual Signals By the Group 2 Actual Signals it is possible to monitor the processing of speed and torque references in the drive. For the signal measuring points see Figure 4-3, or the Control Signal Connections figures of the Application Macros (Chapter 5 – Standard Application Macro Programs).

Table 4-2 The Table below lists the Group 2 Actual Signals.

1) Max. speed is the value of Parameter 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED, or 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED if the absolute value of the minimum limit is greater than the maximum limit.

42 PROCESS SPEED REL P SPEED % Motor actual speed in percent of maximum speed i.e. of Parameter 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED (or 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED if it has a greater absolute value). If Parameter 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is SCALAR, this value is the relative actual output frequency of ACS 600.

43 MOTOR RUN TIME MOTOR RUN TIME

h Motor run time counter. The counter runs when the inverter modulates. Can be reset by 34.06 RESET RUN TIME.

Actual SignalShort Name

Range/Unit

Description

01 SPEED REF 2 S REF 2 rpm Limited speed reference. 100 % = max. speed.1)

02 SPEED REF 3 S REF 3 rpm Ramped and shaped speed reference. 100 % = max. speed.1)

03 … 08 Reserved

09 TORQ REF 2 T REF 2 % Speed controller output. 100 % = motor nominal torque.

10 TORQ REF 3 T REF 3 % Torque reference. 100 % = motor nominal torque.

11 … 12 Reserved

13 TORQ REF USED

T USED R % Torque reference after frequency, voltage and torque limiters. 100 % = motor nominal torque.

14 … 16 Reserved

17 SPEED ESTIMATED

SPEED ES rpm Estimated motor speed.

18 SPEED MEASURED

SPEED ME

rpm Measured motor actual speed (zero when no encoder is in use).

Actual Signal Short Name Range/Unit Description

Firmware Manual 4-3

Chapter 4 – Control Operation

Group 3 Actual Signals Group 3 contains actual signals mainly for fieldbus use (a master station controls the ACS 600 via a serial communication link). All signals in Group 3 are 16 bit data words, each bit corresponding one piece of binary (0,1) information from the drive to the master station.

The signal values (data words) can be viewed also with the Control Panel in hexadecimal format.

For more information on Group 3 Actual Signals, see Appendix A – Complete Parameter Settings and Appendix C – Fieldbus Control.

Fault History The Fault History includes information on the 16 most recent faults and warnings that occurred in the ACS 600 (or 64, if the power is not switched off meanwhile). The description of the fault and the total power-on time are available. The power-on time is calculated always when the NAMC board of the ACS 600 is powered.

Chapter 2 – Overview…, Table 2-4, describes how to display and clear the Fault History from the Control Panel.

Local Control vs. External Control

The ACS 600 can be controlled, i.e. reference, and Start/Stop and Direction commands can be given, from an External control location or from the Local control location.

The selection between Local control and External control can be done with the LOC REM key on the Control Panel keypad.

Figure 4-1 Local and external control.

Fieldbus Adapter

Control Panel

Digital and AnalogueI/O Terminals

DriveWindow

External ControlLocal Control

CH0(DDCS)

Panel Link

CH3(DDCS) Standard Modbus Link

(Modbus RTU)

FIELDBUSCONTROL

RS-485

ACS 600

RS-485

4-4 Firmware Manual

Chapter 4 – Control Operation

Local Control The control commands are given from the Control Panel keypad or from the DriveWindow PC tool when ACS 600 is in Local control. This is indicated by L on the Control Panel display.

External Control When the ACS 600 is in External control, the commands are given through the control terminal block on the NIOC board (digital and analogue inputs), optional I/O extension modules and/or either of the two fieldbus interfaces, CH0 Fieldbus Adapter or the Standard Modbus Link. In addition it is also possible to set the Control Panel as the source for the external control.

External control is indicated by a blank character on the Control Panel display or with an R in those special cases when the Panel is defined as a source for the external control.

Signal Source Selection In the application program the user can define signal sources for two external control locations EXT1 and EXT2, one of which can be active at a time. Parameter 11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT (O) selects between EXT1 and EXT2.

For EXT1, the source of the Start/Stop/Direction commands is defined by Parameter 10.01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR, and the reference source is defined by Parameter 11.03 EXT REF1 SELECT (O). External reference 1 is always a speed reference.

1 L ->1242 rpm I

External Control through the Input/Output terminals, or through the fieldbus interfaces

1 R ->1242 rpm I 1 ->1242 rpm I

External Control by Control Panel(Start/Stop/Direction commands and/or reference given by an “external” Panel)

Firmware Manual 4-5

Chapter 4 – Control Operation

The figure below illustrates the signal source selection for EXT1.

Figure 4-2 Block diagram of the EXT1 signal source selection.

For EXT2, the source of the Start/Stop/Direction commands is defined by Parameter 10.02 EXT2 STRT/STP/DIR, and the reference source is defined by Parameter 11.06 EXT REF2 SELECT (O). External reference 2 can be a speed reference, a torque reference, or a process reference, depending on the Application Macro selected. For the type of external reference 2 refer to the description of the selected Application Macro.

If the ACS 600 is in External control, constant speed operation can also be selected by setting Parameter 12.01 CONST SPEED SEL. One of 15 constant speeds can be selected with digital inputs. Constant speed selection overrides external speed reference signal unless EXT2 is selected as the active control location in PID Control Macro or Torque Control Macro.

DI1 / NIOC board

10.01

Fieldbus SelectionSee Appendix C –Fieldbus Control

CH0 / NAMC board

KEYPAD

EXT1

EXT1

DI6 / NIOC board

DI1 / NDIO 1DI2 / NDIO 1

DI1 / NDIO 2DI2 / NDIO 2

St.Modbus Link / NIOC board

I/O ExtensionsSee Group 98 Option Modules

Select

DI7 to DI9

COMM. MODULE

DI1

DI6

Control panel

AI1 / NIOC board

AI1 / NAIOAI2 / NAIO

11.03

Select

DI1 / NDIO 3DI2 / NDIO 3

CH0 / NAMC board

KEYPAD

St.Modbus Link / NIOC boardCOMM. MODULE

Control panel

I/O ExtensionsSee Group 98 Option Modules

AI2 / NIOC boardAI3 / NIOC boardDI3 / NIOC boardDI4 / NIOC board

AI1, AI2, AI3, DI3, DI4

Fieldbus SelectionSee Appendix C –Fieldbus Control

AI5, AI6DI11, DI12

Start/Stop/Direction

EXT 1 Start/Stop/Direction

EXT1 Reference

Reference (rpm)

4-6 Firmware Manual

Chapter 4 – Control Operation

Figure 4-3 Selecting control location and control source.

NAIO

DI1-12,COMM.MOD.

12EXTERNALREF 2

Start/Stop/Direction source selection

10.01 EXT1STRT/STP/DIR

Group 25CRITICAL SPEEDS

20.01 MINIMUM SPEED20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED

Group 22ACCEL/DECEL

Group 23SPEED CTRL

Speed Controller

2.02SPEED REF 3

2.01SPEED REF 2

ACS 600I/O Termi-nals on NIOC

I/O Extension Modules

CH0 Fieldbus Adapter

Reference source selection

Reference selection

11.06 EXTREF2 SELECT

Group 12CONSTANT

SPEEDS

11.03 EXTREF1 SELECT

12.01 CONSTSPEED SEL

11.01 KEYPADREF SELECT

11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT

EXT1

11EXTERNALREF 1

EXT1

KEYPAD

EXT2

CONTROLPANEL

REF

LOC

REM

EXT1

NOT SEL

EXTERNAL

NOT SEL

KEYPAD

KEYPAD

KEYPAD

KEYPAD

KEYPAD

KEYPAD

DI1-12, COMM.MOD.

AI1-6,DI1-12, COMM.MOD.

EXTERNALSpeed

REF2(%)

REF1(rpm)

NOT SEL

REQUEST

FORWARD

REVERSE

10.02 EXT2STRT/STP/DIR

10.03DIRECTION

16.01RUN ENABLE

AI1-6, DI1-12, COMM.MOD.

DI1-6

APPLICATIONS

16 APPL BLOCK OUTPUT

12EXTERNALREF 2

EXT2

Torque

REF2(%)

REF1(rpm)

EXTERNAL

KEYPAD

EXT2

EXTERNAL

YES, DI1-12, COMM.MOD.

20.04 MAXIMUM TORQUE

Group 24TORQUE CTRL

Torque Controller

2.13TORQ REF USED

2.10TORQ REF 3

2.09TORQ REF 2

Start/Stop

Direction

Start/Stop, Direction

Standard Modbus

Link

FieldbusSelectionApp. C

NDIO

I/O Ext. SettingsGroup 98

Firmware Manual 4-7

Chapter 4 – Control Operation

4-8 Firmware Manual

Chapter 5 – Standard Application Macro Programs

Overview This chapter describes the operation of, and suitable applications for, the five standard Application Macros and the two User Macros.

The chapter begins with a general description of Application Macros. Table 5-1, lists the macros along with suitable applications, controls and how to access each macro for parameter modification.

The remainder of this chapter contains the following information for each macro:

• Operation

• Input and Output Signals

• External Connections

The default parameter settings are given in Appendix B – Default Settings of Application Macros.

Application Macros Application Macros are preprogrammed parameter sets. Using the Application Macros enables a quick and easy start-up of the ACS 600.

Application Macros minimise the number of different parameters to be set during start-up. All parameters have factory-set default values. The Factory Macro is the factory-set default macro.

While starting up the ACS 600, you can select one of the standard macros as the default for your ACS 600 (see Parameter 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO):

• Factory

• Hand/Auto Ctrl

• PID Control

• Sequential Control

• Torque Control

The Application Macro default values are chosen to represent the average values in a typical application. Check that the default settings match your requirements and customise the settings when appropriate. All inputs and outputs are programmable.

Note: When you change the parameter values of a standard macro, the new settings become active immediately and stay active even if the power of the ACS 600 is switched off and on. However, the default parameter settings (factory settings) of each standard macro are still available. The default settings are restored when Parameter 99.03 APPLIC RESTORE is changed to YES, or if the macro is changed.

Firmware Manual 5-1

Chapter 5 – Standard Application Macro Programs

Note: There are certain parameters that remain the same even though the macro were changed to another, or the default settings of the macro were restored. For more information, see Chapter 3 – Start-up Data, section 99.03 APPLIC RESTORE.

User Macros In addition to the standard Application Macros, it is possible to create two User Macros. The User Macro allows the user to save the Parameter settings including Group 99, and the results of the motor identification into the permanent memory1), and recall the data at a later time.

To create User Macro 1:

1. Adjust the Parameters. Perform the motor identification if not yet performed.

2. Save the parameter settings and the results of the motor identification by changing Parameter 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO to USER 1 SAVE (press ENTER). The storing takes from 20 s to one minute.

To recall the User Macro:

1. Change Parameter 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO to USER 1 LOAD.

2. Press ENTER to load.

The User Macro can also be switched via digital inputs (see Parameter 16.05 USER MACRO IO CHG).

Note: User Macro load restores also the motor settings of the Start-up Data group and the results of the motor identification. Check that the settings correspond to the motor used.

Example: User Macros make it possible to switch the ACS 600 between two motors without having to adjust the motor parameters and to repeat the motor identification every time the motor is changed. The user can simply adjust the settings and perform the motor identification once for both motors, and then save the data as two User Macros. When the motor is changed, only the corresponding User Macro needs to be loaded and the drive is ready to operate.

1) Also the panel reference and the control location setting (Local or Remote) are saved.

5-2 Firmware Manual

Chapter 5 – Standard Application Macro Programs

Application Macros Overview

Table 5-1 Application Macros.

Macro Suitable Applications Controls Select

Factory Conveyors and other industrial constant torque applications.

Applications to be run for long periods with constant speed different from the nominal speed of the motor.

Vibration endurance test benches needing variable speeds of vibrating motors.

Testing of rotating machines.

All applications needing traditional external controls.

Keypad,External

FACTORY

Hand/Auto Processes requiring motor speed control automatically with PLC or other process automation and manually with an external control panel. Active control location selection is made with a digital input.

Speed controls having one or two external control locations with reference setting and START/STOP control. Active reference selection is made with digital input.

EXT1, EXT2 HAND/AUTO

PID Control Intended for use with different closed loop control systems such as pressure control, level control, and flow control. For example:• Booster pumps of municipal water supply systems.• Automatic level control of water reservoirs.• Booster pumps of district heating systems.• Speed control of different types of material handling systems

where the material flow has to be regulated.

EXT1, EXT2 PID-CTRL

Torque Control Processes requiring torque control, e.g. mixers and slave drives. Torque reference comes from a PLC or some other process automation system or control panel. Manual reference is speed reference.

EXT1, EXT2 T-CTRL

Sequential Control

Processes requiring motor speed control in addition to the adjustable speed with 1 to 15 constant speeds and/or with two different acceleration/deceleration times. The control can be performed automatically with a PLC or some other process automation system or by using normal speed selection switches.

Regulated Constant Speed

SEQ CTRL

Firmware Manual 5-3

Chapter 5 – Standard Application Macro Programs

Application Macro 1 – Factory

All drive commands and reference settings can be given from the Control Panel keypad or selectively from an external control location. The active control location is selected with the LOC REM key on the Control Panel keypad. The drive is speed controlled.

In External Control the control location is EXT1. The reference signal is connected to analogue input AI1 and Start/Stop and Direction signals to digital inputs DI1 and DI2. By default, the direction is fixed to FORWARD (Parameter 10.03 DIRECTION). DI2 does not control the rotation direction unless Parameter 10.03 DIRECTION is changed to REQUEST.

Three constant speeds are available on digital inputs DI5 and DI6 with external control location selection. Two acceleration/deceleration ramps are preset. The acceleration and deceleration ramps are applied according to the state of digital input DI4.

Two analogue and three relay output signals are available on terminal blocks. Default signals for the Actual Signal Display Mode of the Control Panel are FREQUENCY, CURRENT and POWER.

Operation Diagram

Figure 5-1 Operation Diagram for Factory Macro.

Input and OutputSignals

Table 5-2 Input and Output Signals as set by the Factory Macro.

Input Signals Output Signals

Start, Stop, Direction (DI1,2)Analogue Reference (AI1)Constant Speed Selection (DI5,6) ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL through (DI4)

Analogue Output AO1: SpeedAnalogue Output AO2: CurrentRelay Output RO1: READYRelay Output RO2: RUNNINGRelay Output RO3: FAULT (-1)

rpm

A

M3~

Relay

Motor

Ext. Controls

Input1 L ->1242.0 rpm IFREQ 45.00 Hz CURRENT 80.00 APOWER 75.00 %

1 ->1000.0 rpm IFREQ 40.00 Hz CURRENT 65.00 APOWER 60.00 %

Power

Current

Outputs

SpeedReference and Start/Stop and Direction commands are given from the Control Panel. To change to External, press LOC REM key.

Reference is read from analogue input AI1. Start/Stop and Direction commands are given through digital inputs DI1 and DI2.

5-4 Firmware Manual

Chapter 5 – Standard Application Macro Programs

External Connections The following connection example is applicable when the Factory Macro settings are used.

Figure 5-2 Control Connections for Application Macro 1 — Factory. The markings of the NIOC board terminals are given above. In ACS 601 and ACS 604, user connections are always made directly to the input and output terminals of the NIOC board. In ACS 607 the connections are made either directly to NIOC board, or the I/O terminals of the NIOC board are wired to a separate terminal block intended for the user connections. The separate terminal block is optional. See the appropriate hardware manual for the corresponding terminal markings.

Relay output 2

RUNNING

1

2

3

4

7

8

8

7

1

2

3

4

5

6

9

10

11

12

1

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

VREF

GND

AI1+

AI1-

AI3+

AI3-

+24DVDC

+24DVDC

DI1

DI2

DI3

D4

DI5

DI6

AO1+

AO1-

AO2+

AO2-

RO11

RO12

RO13

RO21

RO22

RO23

RO31

RO32

RO33

Terminal Block X21 Function

Reference voltage 10 VDC

External reference 1

0 … 10 V

Not specified in this application

+24 VDC max. 100 mA

STOP/START

FORWARD/REVERSE (if 10.3 is REQUEST)

CONSTANT SPEED SELECT*

ACCEL/DECEL 1/2

Speed

0 … 20 mA <-> 0 … Motor nom. speed

Current

Relay output 1

READY

Relay output 3

FAULT (-1)

A

rpm

0 … 20 mA <-> 0 … Motor nom. current

* Operation: 0 = Open, 1 = Closed

DI 5 DI 6 Output

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

set speed through AI1

Constant Speed 1

Constant Speed 2

Constant Speed 3

Referencemax. 10 mA

CONSTANT SPEED SELECT*

NOT IN USE

Terminal Block X25

Terminal Block X26

Terminal Block X27

5

6

AI2+

AI2-

Not specified in this application

9 DGND Digital ground

Terminal Block X22

0 … 20 mA

0 … 20 mA

1

2

+24 VDC

GND

Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC

Terminal Block X23

Ready

Run

Fault

max. 250 mA

Firmware Manual 5-5

Chapter 5 – Standard Application Macro Programs

Control SignalConnections

Control signals i.e. Reference, Start, Stop and Direction command connections are established as in Figure 5-3 when you select the Factory Macro.

Figure 5-3 Control Signal connections for the Factory Macro.

11EXTERNALREF 1

Start/Stop/Direction source selection

10.01 EXT1STRT/STP/DIR

Group 25CRITICAL SPEEDS

20.01 MINIMUM SPEED20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED

Group 22ACCEL/DECEL

Group 23SPEED CTRL

Speed Controller

2.02SPEED REF 3

2.01SPEED REF 2

ACS 600

Reference source selection

Reference selection

11.06 EXTREF2 SELECT

Group 12CONSTANT

SPEEDS

11.03 EXTREF1 SELECT

12.01 CONSTSPEED SEL

11.01 KEYPADREF SELECT

11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT

DI5,6

12EXTERNALREF 2

EXT1DI1,2

KEYPAD

EXT2

CONTROLPANEL

REF

LOC

REM

AI1

EXT1

NOT SEL

EXTERNAL

NOT SEL

KEYPAD

KEYPAD

KEYPAD

KEYPAD

KEYPAD

KEYPAD

YES

DI1-6, COMM.MOD.

AI1-3,DI1-6 COMM.MOD.

EXTERNAL

REF2(%)

REF1(rpm)

NOT SEL

REQUEST

FORWARD

REVERSE

10.02 EXT2STRT/STP/DIR

10.03DIRECTION

16.01RUN ENABLE

EXT2

EXTERNAL

Start/Stop

Direction

NAIO

I/O Termi-nals on NIOC

I/O Extension Modules

CH0 Fieldbus Adapter

Standard Modbus

Link

FieldbusSelectionApp. C

NDIO

I/O Ext. SettingsGroup 98

5-6 Firmware Manual

Chapter 5 – Standard Application Macro Programs

Application Macro 2 – Hand/Auto

Start/Stop and Direction commands and reference settings can be given from one of two external control locations, EXT1 (Hand) or EXT2 (Auto). The Start/Stop/Direction commands of the EXT1 (Hand) are connected to digital inputs DI1 and DI2, and the reference signal is connected to analogue input AI1. The Start/Stop/Direction commands of the EXT2 (Auto) are connected to digital inputs DI5 and DI6, and the reference signal is connected to analogue input AI2. The selection between EXT1 and EXT2 is dependent on the status of digital input DI3. The drive is speed controlled. Speed reference and Start/Stop and Direction commands can be given from the Control Panel keypad also. One constant speed can be selected through digital input DI4.

Speed reference in Auto Control (EXT2) is given as a percentage of the maximum speed of the drive (see Parameters 11.07 EXT REF2 MINIMUM and 11.08 EXT REF2 MAXIMUM).

Two analogue and three relay output signals are available on terminal blocks. Default signals for the Actual Signal Display Mode of the Control Panel are FREQUENCY, CURRENT and CTRL LOC.

Operation Diagram

Figure 5-4 Operation Diagram for Hand/Auto Macro.

Input and OutputSignals

Table 5-3 Input and Output Signals as set by the Hand/Auto Macro.

Input Signals Output Signals

Start/Stop (DI1,6) and Reverse (DI2,5) Switch for each control location Two analogue reference inputs (AI1,AI2)Control Location Selection (DI3)Constant Speed Selection (DI4)

Speed (AO1)Current (AO2)READY (RO1)RUNNING (RO2)FAULT (-1) (RO3)

rpm

A

M3�

Relay

Motor

EXT1 (rpm) =Input

1 L ->1242.0 rpm IFREQ 45.00 Hz CURRENT 80.00 ACTRL LOC LOCAL

1 L ->1200.0 rpm IFREQ 43.00 Hz CURRENT 77.00 ACTRL LOC EXT1

Power

Current

Outputs

Hand/Auto

Const.Speed1

PLCorautomationEXT2 (%) =

Speed

Hand Control

Auto Control

Reference, Start/Stop and Direction commands are given from the Control Panel. To change to External, press LOC REM key.

Hand control: Reference is read from analogue input AI1. Start/Stop and Direction commands are given through digital inputs DI1 and DI2.

Firmware Manual 5-7

Chapter 5 – Standard Application Macro Programs

External Connections The following connection example is applicable when the Hand/Auto Macro settings are used.

Figure 5-5 Control Connections for Hand/Auto Application Macro. The markings of the NIOC board terminals are given above. In ACS 601 and ACS 604, user connections are always made directly to the input and output terminals of the NIOC board. In ACS 607 the connections are made either directly to NIOC board, or the I/O terminals of the NIOC board are wired to a separate terminal block intended for the user connections. The separate terminal block is optional. See the appropriate hardware manual for the corresponding terminal markings.

Relay output 2

RUNNING

1

2

3

4

7

8

1

2

8

7

1

2

3

4

5

6

9

10

11

12

1

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

VREF

GND

AI1+

AI1-

AI3+

AI3-

+24 VDC

GND

+24DVDC

DI1

DI2

DI3

DI4

DI5

DI6

AO1+

AO1-

AO2+

AO2-

RO11

RO12

RO 13

RO21

RO22

RO23

RO 31

RO 32

RO 33

Terminal Block X21 Function

Reference voltage 10 VDC

External reference 1 (Hand Control)

0 … 10 V

Not specified in this application

Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC

+24 VDC max. 100 mA

STOP/START (Hand)

FORWARD/REVERSE (Hand)

STOP/START (Auto)

CONSTANT SPEED 4

Speed

0 … 20 mA <-> 0 … Motor rated speed

Current

Relay output 1

READY

Relay output 3

FAULT (-1)

0 … 20 mA <-> 0 … Motor nom. current

* Operation: Open Switch = Hand (EXT1),

Referencemax. 10 mA

FORWARD/REVERSE (Auto)

EXT1/EXT2 SELECT*

Terminal Block X25

Terminal Block X26

Terminal Block X27

5

6

AI2+

AI2-

External reference 2 (Auto Control)

9 DGND Digital ground

Terminal Block X22

(Hand)

Reference(Auto) 0 … 20 mA

Terminal Block X23

A

rpm

+24DVDC

Closed Switch = Auto (EXT2)

250 mA

Ready

Run

Fault

5-8 Firmware Manual

Chapter 5 – Standard Application Macro Programs

Control SignalConnections

Control signals i.e. Reference, Start, Stop and Direction command connections are established as in Figure 5-6 when you select the Hand/Auto Macro.

Figure 5-6 Control Signal connections for the Hand/Auto Macro.

EXTERNAL

KEYPAD

Start/Stop/Direction source selection

10.01 EXT1STRT/STP/DIR

Group 25CRITICAL SPEEDS

20.01 MINIMUM SPEED20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED

Group 22ACCEL/DECEL

Group 23SPEED CTRL

Speed Controller

2.02SPEED REF 3

2.01SPEED REF 2

ACS 600

Reference source selection

Reference selection

11.06 EXTREF2 SELECT

Group 12CONSTANT

SPEEDS

11.03 EXTREF1 SELECT

12.01 CONSTSPEED SEL

11.01 KEYPADREF SELECT

11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT

DI4(SPEED4)

12EXTERNALREF 2

11EXTERNALREF 1

EXT1DI1,2

KEYPAD

EXT2

CONTROLPANEL

REF

LOC

REM

AI1

EXT1

NOT SEL

NOT SEL

KEYPAD

KEYPAD

KEYPAD

KEYPAD

KEYPAD

YES

EXTERNAL

DI6,5

REF2(%)

REF1(rpm)

NOT SEL

REQUEST

FORWARD

REVERSE

10.02 EXT2STRT/STP/DIR

10.03DIRECTION

16.01RUN ENABLE

EXT2

DI3

AI2

EXTERNAL

Statr/Stop

Direction

NAIO

I/O Termi-nals on NIOC

I/O Extension Modules

CH0 Fieldbus Adapter

Standard Modbus

Link

FieldbusSelectionApp. C

NDIO

I/O Ext. SettingsGroup 98

Firmware Manual 5-9

Chapter 5 – Standard Application Macro Programs

Application Macro 3 – PID Control

The PID Control macro is used for controlling a process variable – such as pressure or flow – by controlling the speed of the driven motor.

Process reference signal is connected to analogue input AI1 and process feedback signal to analogue input AI2.

Alternatively, a direct speed reference can be given to the ACS 600 through analogue input AI1. Then the PID controller is bypassed and the ACS 600 no longer controls the process variable. Selection between the direct speed control and the process variable control is done with digital input DI3.

Two analogue and three relay output signals are available on terminal blocks. Default signals for the Actual Signal Display Mode of the Control Panel are SPEED, ACTUAL VALUE1 and CONTROL DEVIATION.

Operation Diagram

Figure 5-7 Operation Diagram for the PID Control Macro.

Input and OutputSignals

Table 5-4 Input and Output Signal as set by the PID Control Macro.

Note: Constant speeds (parameter Group 12) are not considered while the process reference is fol-lowed (PID controller is in use).

Input Signals Output Signals

START/STOP for each control location (DI1,DI6)Analogue Reference (AI1)Actual Value (AI2)Control Location Selection (DI3)Constant Speed Selection (DI4)Run Enable (DI5)

Speed (AO1)Current (AO2)READY (RO1)RUNNING (RO2)FAULT (-1) (RO3)

rpm

A

M3�

Relay

Motor

Input 1 L ->1242.0 rpm ISPEED 1242.0 rpm ACT VAL1 52.00 %CONT DEV 0.1 %

Power

Current

OutputsConst.Speed

Speed

Run Enable

Speed/Process

PIDPT

EXT1

EXT2

START/STOP(EXT2)START/STOP(EXT1)

Ref.

Actual value

(EXT1/EXT2) 1 -> 52.1 % ISPEED 1242.0 rpm ACT VAL1 52.0 %CONT DEV 0.1 %

Reference is read from analogue input AI1. Start/Stop command is given through digital input DI1 while in direct speed control (EXT1) or through digital input DI6 while in Process Control (EXT2).

Reference and Start/Stop and Direction commands are given from the Control Panel. To change to External, press the LOC REM key.

External ControlEXT1 (rpm) = Direct Speed ControlEXT2 (%) = Process PID Control

Keypad ControlREF1 (rpm) = Direct Speed ControlREF2 (%) = Process PID Control

5-10 Firmware Manual

Chapter 5 – Standard Application Macro Programs

External Connections The following connection example is applicable when the PID Control Macro settings are used.

Figure 5-8 Control Connections for the PID Control Application Macro. The markings of the NIOC board terminals are given above. In ACS 601 and ACS 604, user connections are always made directly to the input and output terminals of the NIOC board. In ACS 607 the connections are made either directly to NIOC board, or the I/O terminals of the NIOC board are wired to a separate terminal block intended for the user connections. The separate terminal block is optional. See the appropriate hardware manual for the corresponding terminal markings.

Relay output 2

RUNNING

1

2

3

4

7

8

8

7

1

2

3

4

5

6

9

10

11

12

1

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

VREF

GND

AI1+

AI1-

AI3+

AI3-

+24DVDC

+24DVDC

DI1

DI2

DI3

DI4

DI5

DI6

AO1+

AO1-

AO2+

AO2-

RO11

RO12

RO13

RO21

RO22

RO23

RO 31

RO 32

RO 33

Terminal Block X21 Function

Reference voltage 10 VDC

EXT1 or EXT2 reference

0 … 10 V

Not specified in this application

+24 VDC max. 100 mA

STOP/START (Manual)

Not specified in this application

STOP/START (Process)

CONSTANT SPEED 4****

Speed

0 … 20 mA <-> 0 … Motor rated speed

Current

Relay output 1

READY

Relay output 3

FAULT (-1)

0 … 20 mA <-> 0 … Motor nom. current

Reference Setting***max. 10 mA

RUN ENABLE**

EXT1/EXT2 SELECT*

Terminal Block X25

Terminal Block X26

Terminal Block X27

5

6

AI2+

AI2-

Actual Signal

9 DGND Digital ground

Terminal Block X22

(EXT1 and EXT2)

Transducer feedback

0 … 20 mA

* Open Switch = Speed Control (direct speed setting)

PT

Closed Switch (+24 V) = Process Control (PID control)

*** Reference setting possible also internally with the

1

2

+24 VDC

GND

Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC

Terminal Block X23

A

rpm

250 mA

** Open switch = No RUN ENABLE signal received; The drive will not start (or it stops).Closed switch (+24 V) =RUN ENABLE activated;Normal operation is allowed.

keypad.

**** No constant speeds can be selected if the Process Control is selected (i.e. if +24 V d.c. is connected to DI3). See Figure 5-9.

Ready

Run

Fault

Firmware Manual 5-11

Chapter 5 – Standard Application Macro Programs

Control SignalConnections

Control signals i.e. Reference, Start, Stop and Direction command connections are established as in Figure 5-9 when you select the PID Control Macro.

Figure 5-9 Control Signal connections for the PID Control Macro.

AI1

AI3

AI2

NOT SEL

DI6

12EXTERNALREF 2

Start/Stop/Direction source selection

10.01 EXT1STRT/STP/DIR

Group 25CRITICAL SPEEDS

20.01 MINIMUM SPEED20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED

Group 22ACCEL/DECEL

Group 23SPEED CTRL

Speed Controller

2.02SPEED REF 3

2.01SPEED REF 2

ACS 600

Reference source selection

Reference selection

11.06 EXTREF2 SELECT

Group 12CONSTANT

SPEEDS

11.03 EXTREF1 SELECT

12.01 CONSTSPEED SEL

11.01 KEYPADREF SELECT

11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT

DI4(SPEED4)

11EXTERNALREF 1

EXT1

KEYPAD

EXT2

EXT1

NOT SEL

EXTERNAL

KEYPAD

KEYPAD

KEYPAD

KEYPAD

KEYPAD

KEYPAD

EXTERNAL REF2(%)

REF1(rpm)

NOT SEL

REQUEST

FORWARD

REVERSE

10.02 EXT2STRT/STP/DIR

10.03DIRECTION

16.01RUN ENABLE

DI1-6

PID CONTROL-

LER

16 APPL BLOCK OUTPUT

EXT2

EXTERNAL

Start/Stop

Direction

DI3

AI1

AI1

Actual source selection40.08 ACTUAL 2

INPUT SEL40.06 ACTUAL

VALUE SEL40.07 ACTUAL 1

INPUT SEL

26 CONTROL DEVIATION

24 ACTUAL VALUE 1

25 ACTUAL VALUE 2

AI1

AI3

AI2

ACT1

DI1

11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT

DI3 DI5

CONTROLPANEL

REF

LOC

REM

NAIO

I/O Termi-nals on NIOC

I/O Extension Modules

CH0 Fieldbus Adapter

Standard Modbus

Link

FieldbusSelectionApp. C

NDIO

I/O Ext. SettingsGroup 98

5-12 Firmware Manual

Chapter 5 – Standard Application Macro Programs

Application Macro 4 – Torque Control

Torque Control macro is used in applications that require torque control of the motor. Torque reference is given through analogue input AI2 as a current signal. By default, 0 mA corresponds to 0 %, and 20 mA to 100 % of the rated motor torque. The Start/Stop/Direction commands are given through digital inputs DI1 and DI2. The Run enable signal is connected to DI6.

Through digital input DI3 it is possible to select speed control instead of torque control. It is also possible to change the external control location to local (i.e. to Control Panel) by pressing the key. The Panel controls the speed by default. If torque control with the Panel is required, the value of Parameter 11.01 KEYPAD REF SEL should be changed to REF2 (%).

Two analogue and three relay output signals are available on terminal blocks. Default signals for the Actual Signal Display Mode of the Control Panel are SPEED, TORQUE and CTRL LOC.

Operation Diagram

Figure 5-10 Operation Diagram for the Torque Control Macro.

Input and OutputSignals

Table 5-5 Input and Output Signals as set by the Torque Control Macro.

Input Signals Output Signals

Start/Stop (DI1,2) Analogue Speed Reference (AI1)Analogue Torque Reference (AI2)Torque Control Selection (DI3)Accel/Decel 1/2 Selection (DI5)Constant Speed Selection (DI4)Run Enable (DI6)

Speed (AO1)Current (AO2)READY (RO1)RUNNING (RO2)FAULT (-1) (RO3)

LOC

REM

1 L ->1242.0 rpm ISPEED 1242.0 rpm TORQUE 66.00 %CTRL LOC LOCAL

1 -> 50.0 % ISPEED 1242.0 rpm TORQUE 66.00 %CTRL LOC EXT2

rpm

A

M3�

Relay

Motor

Ext. Controls

InputPower

Current

Outputs

Speed

External ControlEXT1 (rpm) = Speed ControlEXT2 (%) = Torque Control

Keypad ControlREF1 (rpm) = Speed ControlREF2 (%) = Torque Control

Reference and Start/Stop and Direction commands are given from the Control Panel. To change to External, press LOC REM key.

Reference is read from analogue input AI2 (torque control selected) or AI1 (speed control selected). Start/Stop and Direc-tion commands are given through digital inputs DI1 and DI2. Selection between speed and torque control is done through DI3.

EXT1

EXT2

Speed ref.Torque ref.

Firmware Manual 5-13

Chapter 5 – Standard Application Macro Programs

External Connections The following connection example is applicable when the Torque Control Macro settings are used.

Figure 5-11 Control Connections for Torque Control Application Macro. The markings of the NIOC board terminals are given above. In ACS 601 and ACS 604, user connections are always made directly to the input and output terminals of the NIOC board. In ACS 607 the connections are made either directly to NIOC board, or the I/O terminals of the NIOC board are wired to a separate terminal block intended for the user connections. The separate terminal block is optional. See the appropriate hardware manual for the corresponding terminal markings.

Relay output 2

RUNNING

1

2

3

4

7

8

1

2

8

7

1

2

3

4

5

6

9

10

11

12

1

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

VREF

GND

AI1+

AI1-

AI3+

AI3-

+24 VDC

GND

+24DVDC

+24DVDC

DI1

DI2

DI3

DI4

DI5

DI6

AO1+

AO1-

AO2+

AO2-

RO11

RO12

RO13

RO21

RO22

RO23

RO 31

RO 32

RO 33

Terminal Block X21 Function

Reference voltage 10 VDC

Speed reference (EXT1)

0 … 10 V

Not specified in this application

Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC

+24 VDC max. 100 mA

STOP/START

FORWARD/REVERSE

RUN ENABLE***

CONSTANT SPEED SELECTION****

Speed

0 … 20 mA <-> 0 … Motor rated speed

Current

Relay output 1

READY

Relay output 3

FAULT (-1)

0 … 20 mA <-> 0 … Motor nom .current

Speed Referencemax.10 mA

ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL**

SPEED/TORQUE CONTROL SEL*

Terminal Block X25

Terminal Block X26

Terminal Block X27

5

6

AI2+

AI2-

Torque reference (EXT2)

9 DGND Digital ground

Terminal Block X22

Torque Reference0 … 20 mA

Terminal Block X23

A

rpm

* Open Switch = EXT1 selected = Speed Control Closed Switch (+24 V) = EXT2 selected = Torque Control

** Open switch = ACC/DEC 1 selectedClosed Switch (+24 V) = ACC/DEC 2 selected

*** Open switch = No RUN ENABLE signal received; The drive will not start (or it stops).Closed switch (+24 V) =RUN ENABLE activated; Normal operation is allowed.

**** No constant speeds can be selected if the Torque Controlis selected (i.e. if +24 V d.c. is connected to DI3). SeeFigure 5-12.

250 mA

Ready

Run

Fault

5-14 Firmware Manual

Chapter 5 – Standard Application Macro Programs

Control SignalConnections

Control signals i.e. Reference, Start, Stop and Direction command connections are established as in Figure 5-12 when you select the Torque Control Macro.

Figure 5-12 Control Signal connections for the Torque Control Macro.

Start/Stop/Direction source selection

10.01 EXT1STRT/STP/DIR

Group 25CRITICAL SPEEDS

20.01 MINIMUM SPEED20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED

Group 22ACCEL/DECEL

Group 23SPEED CTRL

Speed Controller

2.02SPEED REF 3

2.01SPEED REF 2

ACS 600

Reference source selection

Reference selection

11.06 EXTREF2 SELECT

Group 12CONSTANT

SPEEDS

11.03 EXTREF1 SELECT

12.01 CONSTSPEED SEL

11.01 KEYPADREF SELECT

11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT

EXT1

11EXTERNALREF 1

EXT1

KEYPAD

EXT2

EXT1

NOT SEL

EXTERNAL

NOT SEL

KEYPAD

KEYPAD

KEYPAD

KEYPAD

KEYPAD

KEYPAD

EXTERNAL REF2(%)

REF1(rpm)

NOT SEL

REQUEST

FORWARD

REVERSE

10.02 EXT2STRT/STP/DIR

10.03DIRECTION

16.01RUN ENABLE

DI1-6

12EXTERNALREF 2

EXT2

REF2(%)

REF1(rpm)

EXTERNAL

KEYPAD

EXT2

EXTERNAL

20.04 MAXIMUM TORQUE

Group 24TORQUE CTRL

Torque Controller

2.13TORQ REF USED

2.10TORQ REF 3

2.09TORQ REF 2

Start/Stop

Direction

DI1,2

DI1,2

DI6

AI1

AI2

DI3 DI4(SPEED4)

CONTROLPANEL

REF

LOC

REM

NAIO

I/O Termi-nals on NIOC

I/O Extension Modules

CH0 Fieldbus Adapter

Standard Modbus

Link

FieldbusSelectionApp. C

NDIO

I/O Ext. SettingsGroup 98

Firmware Manual 5-15

Chapter 5 – Standard Application Macro Programs

Application Macro 5 – Sequential Control

This macro offers seven preset constant speeds, which can be activated by digital inputs DI4 to DI6 according to the Figure 5-16. Two acceleration/deceleration ramps are preset. The acceleration and deceleration ramps are applied according to the state of digital input DI3. The Start/Stop and Direction commands are given through digital inputs DI1 and DI2.

External speed reference can be given through analogue input AI1. It is active only when all of the digital inputs DI4 to DI6 are 0 VDC. Giving operational commands and setting reference is possible also from the Control Panel.

Two analogue and three relay output signals are available on terminal blocks. Default stop mode is ramp. Default signals for the Actual Signal Display Mode of the Control Panel are FREQUENCY, CURRENT and POWER.

Operation Diagram

Figure 5-13 Operation Diagram for the Sequential Control Macro.

rpm

A

M3�

Relay

Motor

Ext. Controls

InputPower

Current

Outputs

Speed

Accel1 Accel1 Accel2 Decel2

Speed 3

Speed 2

Speed 1

Speed

Time

Start/Stop

Accel1/Decel1

Speed 1

Speed 2

Accel2/Decel2Speed 3

Stop with deceleration ramp

Example of sequential control using constant speeds and different acceleration and deceleration times.

External ControlEXT1 (rpm) = Speed Control EXT2 (%) = Speed ControlKeypad ControlREF1 (rpm) = Speed ControlREF2 (%) = Speed Control

5-16 Firmware Manual

Chapter 5 – Standard Application Macro Programs

Figure 5-14 Keypad Control and External Control modes of the Sequential Control Macro.

Input and OutputSignals

Input and Output signals of the ACS 600 as set by the Sequential Control Macro are listed in Table 5-6.

Table 5-6 Input and Output Signals for Sequential Control Macro.

Input Signals Output Signals

Start/Stop (DI1) and Reverse (DI2)Analogue Reference (AI1)Accel/Decel 1/2 Selection (DI3)Constant Speed Selection (DI4-6)

Speed (AO1)Current (AO2)READY (RO1)RUNNING (RO2)FAULT (-1) (RO3)

1 L ->1242.0 rpm IFREQ 45.00 Hz CURRENT 80.00 APOWER 75.00 %

1 ->1242.0 rpm IFREQ 45.00 Hz CURRENT 80.00 APOWER 75.00 %

To change to External, press the LOC REM key.

Reference is read from analogue input AI1 or constant speed is used. Start/Stop and Direction commands are given through digital inputs DI1 and DI2.

Reference and Start/Stop and Direction commands are given from the Control Panel.

Firmware Manual 5-17

Chapter 5 – Standard Application Macro Programs

External Connections The following connection example is applicable when the Sequential Control Macro settings are used.

Figure 5-15 Control Connections for Sequential Control Application Macro. The markings of the NIOC board terminals are given above. In ACS 601 and ACS 604, user connections are always made directly to the input and output terminals of the NIOC board. In ACS 607 the connections are made either directly to NIOC board, or the I/O terminals of the NIOC board are wired to a separate terminal block intended for the user connections. The separate terminal block is optional. See the appropriate hardware manual for the corresponding terminal markings.

Relay output 2

RUNNING

1

2

3

4

7

8

1

2

8

7

1

2

3

4

5

6

9

10

11

12

1

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

VREF

GND

AI1+

AI1-

AI3+

AI3-

+24 VDC

GND

+24 DVDC

+24 DVDC

DI1

DI2

DI3

DI4

DI5

DI6

AO1+

AO1-

AO2+

AO2-

RO11

RO12

RO13

RO21

RO22

RO23

RO31

RO32

RO33

Terminal Block X21 Function

Reference voltage 10 VDC

External reference

0 … 10 V

Not specified in this application

Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC

+24 VDC max. 100 mA

STOP/START

FORWARD/REVERSE

CONSTANT SPEED SELECT*

CONSTANT SPEED SELECT*

Speed

0 … 20 mA <-> 0 … Motor rated speed

Current

Relay output 1

READY

Relay output 3

FAULT (-1)

0 … 20 mA <-> 0 … Motor nom. current

max. 10 mA

CONSTANT SPEED SELECT*

ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL

Terminal Block X25

Terminal Block X26

Terminal Block X27

5

6

AI2+

AI2-

Not specified in this application

9 DGND Digital ground

Terminal Block X22

DI4 DI5 DI6 Output

set speed through AI1

Constant Speed 1

Constant Speed 2

Constant Speed 3

Constant Speed 4

Constant Speed 5

Constant Speed 6

Constant Speed 7

0

0 0

1 0

1 0

0 1

0 1

1 1

1 1

* Operation: 0 = Open, 1 = Closed

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

0

Terminal Block X23

A

rpm

Reference

250 mA

Ready

Run

Fault

5-18 Firmware Manual

Chapter 5 – Standard Application Macro Programs

Control SignalConnections

Control signals i.e. Reference, Start, Stop and Direction command connections are established as in Figure 5-16 when you select the Sequential Control Macro.

Figure 5-16 Control Signal connections for the Sequential Control Macro.

EXTERNAL

KEYPAD

Start/Stop/Direction source selection

10.01 EXT1STRT/STP/DIR

Group 25CRITICAL SPEEDS

20.01 MINIMUM SPEED20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED

Group 22ACCEL/DECEL

Group 23SPEED CTRL

Speed Controller

2.02SPEED REF 3

2.01SPEED REF 2

ACS 600

Reference source selection

Reference selection

11.06 EXTREF2 SELECT

Group 12CONSTANT

SPEEDS

11.03 EXTREF1 SELECT

12.01 CONSTSPEED SEL

11.01 KEYPADREF SELECT

11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT

DI4,5,6

12EXTERNALREF 2

11EXTERNALREF 1

EXT1DI1,2

KEYPAD

EXT2

AI1

EXT1

NOT SEL

NOT SEL

KEYPAD

KEYPAD

KEYPAD

KEYPAD

KEYPAD

YES

EXTERNAL

DI1,DI2

REF2(%)

REF1(rpm)

NOT SEL

REQUEST

FORWARD

REVERSE

10.02 EXT2STRT/STP/DIR

10.03DIRECTION

16.01RUN ENABLE

EXT2

AI1

EXTERNAL

Statr/Stop

Direction

EXT1

CONTROLPANEL

REF

LOC

REM

NAIO

I/O Termi-nals on NIOC

I/O Extension Modules

CH0 Fieldbus Adapter

Standard Modbus

Link

FieldbusSelectionApp. C

NDIO

I/O Ext. SettingsGroup 98

Firmware Manual 5-19

Chapter 5 – Standard Application Macro Programs

5-20 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Overview This chapter explains the function of, and valid selections for, each ACS 600 parameter.

Parameter Groups The ACS 600 parameters are arranged into groups by their function. Figure 6-1 illustrates the organisation of the parameter groups. Chapter 2 – Overview of ACS 600 Programming… explains how to select and set the parameters. Refer to Chapter 3 – Start-up Data and Chapter 4 – Control Operation for more information on the Start-up Data and Actual Signals. Some parameters that are not in use in the current application are hidden to simplify programming.

CAUTION! Exercise caution when configuring input/output connections, as it is possible (albeit not recommended) to use one I/O connection to control several operations. If an I/O is programmed for some purpose the setting remains, even if you select the I/O for another purpose with another parameter.

Figure 6-1 Parameter Groups.

35 MOT TEMP MEAS

34 PROCESS SPEED33 INFORMATION

32 SUPERVISION

31 AUTOMATIC RESET30 FAULT FUNCTIONS

.

.

.

22 ACCEL/DECEL

20 LIMITS21 START/STOP

24 TORQUE CTRL25 CRITICAL SPEEDS

26 MOTOR CONTROL

23 SPEED CTRL

.

.

.

.

.

99 START-UP DATA

98 OPTION MODULES

96 EXTERNAL AO

92 D SET TR ADDR

90 D SET REC ADDR

70 DDCS CONTROL

60 MASTER/FOLLOWER

12 CONSTANT SPEEDS

10 START/STOP/DIR11 REFERENCE SELECT

14 RELAY OUTPUTS15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS

16 SYSTEM CTR INPUTS

13 ANALOGUE INPUTS

.

.

.

52 STANDARD MODBUS51 COMMUNICATION MOD

50 ENCODER MODULE

45 FUNCTION SELECTION42 BRAKE CONTROL

40 PID CONTROL40.1 PID GAIN…

Firmware Manual 6-1

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Group 10 Start/Stop/Dir These parameter values can only be altered with the ACS 600 stopped. The Range/Unit column in Table 6-1 shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.

Table 6-1 Group 10.

Start, Stop and Direction commands can be given from the keypad or from two external locations. The selection between the two external locations is made with Parameter 11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT. For more information on control locations refer to Chapter 4 – Control Operation.

10.01 EXT1STRT/STP/DIR

This parameter defines the connections and the source of Start, Stop and Direction commands for External control location 1 (EXT1).

NOT SELNo Start, Stop and Direction command source for EXT1 is selected.

DI1Two-wire Start/Stop, connected to digital input DI1. 0 V DC on DI1 = Stop; 24 V DC on DI1 = Start. Direction of rotation is fixed according to Parameter 10.3 DIRECTION.

WARNING! After a fault reset, the drive will start if the start signal is on.

DI1,2Two-wire Start/Stop. Start/Stop is connected to digital input DI1 as above. Direction is connected to digital input DI2. 0 V DC on DI2 = Forward; 24 V DC on DI2 = Reverse. To control Direction, value of Parameter 10.3 DIRECTION should be REQUEST.

WARNING! After a fault reset, the drive will start if the start signal is on.

Parameter Range/Unit Description

1 EXT1STRT/STP/DIR

NOT SEL; Digital Inputs; KEYPAD; COMM. MODULE

Selects source of Start/Stop/ Direction commands for External control location EXT1.

2 EXT2 STRT/STP/DIR

NOT SEL; Digital Inputs; KEYPAD; COMM. MODULE

Selects source of Start/Stop/ Direction commands for External control location EXT2.

3 DIRECTION FORWARD; REVERSE; REQUEST

Rotation direction lock.

6-2 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

DI1P,2PThree-wire Start/Stop. Start/Stop commands are given by means of momentary push-buttons (the P stands for “pulse”). The Start push-button is normally open, and connected to digital input DI1. The Stop push-button is normally closed, and connected to digital input DI2. Multiple Start push-buttons are connected in parallel; multiple Stop push-buttons are connected in series. Direction of rotation is fixed according to Parameter 10.03 DIRECTION.

DI1P,2P,3Three-wire Start/Stop. Start/Stop connected as with DI1P,2P. Direction is connected to digital input DI3. 0 V DC on DI3 = Forward; 24 V DC on DI3 = Reverse. To control Direction, value of Parameter 10.03 DIRECTION should be REQUEST.

DI1P,2P,3PStart Forward, Start Reverse, and Stop. Start and Direction commands are given simultaneously with two separate momentary push-buttons (the P stands for “pulse”). The Stop push-button is normally closed, and connected to digital input DI3. The Start Forward and Start Reverse push-buttons are normally open, and connected to digital inputs DI1 and DI2 respectively. Multiple Start push-buttons are connected in parallel, and multiple Stop push-buttons are connected in series. To control Direction, value of Parameter 10.03 DIRECTION should be REQUEST.

DI6Two-wire Start/Stop, connected to digital input DI6. 0 V DC on DI6 = Stop and 24 V DC on DI6 = Start. Direction of rotation is fixed according to Parameter 10.03 DIRECTION.

WARNING! After a fault reset, the drive will start if the start signal is on.

DI6,5Two-wire Start/Stop. Start/Stop is connected to digital input DI6. Direction is connected to digital input DI5. 0 V DC on DI5 = Forward and 24 V DC on DI5 = Reverse. To control Direction, value of Parameter 10.03 DIRECTION should be REQUEST.

WARNING! After a fault reset, the drive will start if the start signal is on.

KEYPADThe Start/Stop and Direction commands are given from the Control Panel keypad when External control location 1 is active. To control Direction, value of Parameter 10.03 DIRECTION should be REQUEST.

COMM. MODULEThe Start/Stop and Direction commands are given through Fieldbus Control Word. See Appendix C – Fieldbus Control.

Firmware Manual 6-3

Chapter 6 – Parameters

DI7; DI7,8; DI7P,8P; DI7P,8P,9; DI7P,8P,9PFor the connection of digital inputs DI7, DI8 and DI9, see Parameter Group 98 Option Modules. For the function descriptions, see the corresponding selections implemented using DI1, DI2 and DI3.

10.02 EXT2STRT/STP/DIR

This parameter defines the connections and the source of Start, Stop and Direction commands for External control location 2 (EXT2).

NOT SEL; DI1; DI1,2; DI1P,2P; DI1P,2P,3; DI1P,2P,3P; DI6; DI6,5; KEYPAD; COMM. MODULE; DI7; DI7,8; DI7P,8P; DI7P,8P,9; DI7P,8P,9PRefer to Parameter 10.01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR above for details on these settings.

10.03 DIRECTION This parameter allows you to fix the direction of rotation of the motor to FORWARD or REVERSE. If you select REQUEST, the direction is selected as defined by Parameters 10.01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR and 10.02 EXT2 STRT/STP/DIR or by keypad push-buttons.

6-4 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Group 11 ReferenceSelect

These parameter values can be altered with the ACS 600 running, except those marked with (O). The Range/Unit column in Table 6-2 shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.

Table 6-2 Group 11.

Reference can be set from the keypad or from two external locations. Refer to Chapter 4 – Control Operation.

11.01 KEYPAD REF SEL REF1 (rpm)Keypad reference 1 is selected as the active keypad reference. The type of the reference is speed, given in rpm. If scalar control is selected (Parameter 99.04 is set to SCALAR), the reference is given in Hz.

REF2 (%)Keypad reference 2 is selected as the active keypad reference. Keypad reference 2 is given in %. The type of Keypad reference 2 depends on the selected Application Macro. For example, if the Torque Control macro is selected, REF 2 (%) is torque reference.

Parameter Range/Unit Description

1 KEYPAD REF SEL REF1 (rpm); REF2 (%)

Selection of active keypad reference.

2 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT (O)

DI1 … DI12; EXT1; EXT2; COMM. MODULE

External control location selection input.

3 EXT REF1 SELECT (O)

KEYPAD; Analogue and Digital Inputs; COMM. REF; COMMREF+AI1; COMMREF*AI1; FAST COMM; COMMREF+AI5; COMMREF*AI5;

External reference 1 input.

4 EXT REF1 MINIMUM (0 … 18000) rpm External reference 1 minimum value.

5 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM (0 … 18000) rpm External reference 1 maximum value.

6 EXT REF2 SELECT (O)

KEYPAD; Analogue and Digital Inputs; COMM. REF; COMMREF+AI1; COMMREF*AI1; FAST COMM; COMMREF+AI5; COMMREF*AI5

External reference 2 input.

7 EXT REF2 MINIMUM 0 … 100 % External reference 2 minimum value.

8 EXT REF2 MAXIMUM 0 … 500 % External reference 2 maximum value.

Firmware Manual 6-5

Chapter 6 – Parameters

11.02 EXT1/EXT2SELECT (O)

This parameter sets the input used for selecting the external control location, or fixes it to EXT1 or EXT2. The external control location of both Start/Stop/Direction commands and reference is determined by this parameter.

EXT1External control location 1 is selected. The control signal sources for EXT1 are defined with Parameter 10.01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR and Parameter 11.03 EXT REF1 SELECT (O).

EXT2External control location 2 is selected. The control signal sources for EXT2 are defined with Parameter 10.02 EXT2 STRT/STP/DIR and Parameter 11.06 EXT REF2 SELECT (O).

DI1 — DI12External control location 1 or 2 is selected according to the state of the selected digital input (DI1 … DI12), where 0 V DC = EXT1 and 24 V DC = EXT2. For the connection of DI7 to DI12, see Group 98 Option Modules.

COMM. MODULEExternal control location 1 or 2 is chosen through Fieldbus Control Word. See Appendix C – Fieldbus Control.

11.03 EXT REF1SELECT (O)

This parameter selects the signal source of External reference 1.

KEYPADReference is given from the Keypad. The first line on the display shows the reference value.

AI1Reference from analogue input 1 (voltage signal).

AI2Reference from analogue input 2 (current signal).

AI3Reference from analogue input 3 (current signal).

AI1/JOYST; AI2/JOYSTReference from analogue input 1 (or 2 accordingly) configured for a joystick. The minimum input signal runs the drive at maximum reference in the reverse direction. The maximum input signal runs the drive at maximum reference in the forward direction (See Figure 6-2). See also Parameter 10.03 DIRECTION.

CAUTION: Minimum reference for joystick must be higher than 0.5 V. If a 0 … 10 V signal is used, the ACS 600 will operate at maximum reference in the reverse direction if the control signal is lost. Set Parameter 13.01 MINIMUM AI1 to 2 V or to a value higher than 0.5 V, and Parameter 30.01 AI<MIN FUNCTION to FAULT, and the ACS 600 will stop in case the control signal is lost.

6-6 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Figure 6-2 Joystick control. Maximum for the external reference 1 is set with Parameter 11.05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM and minimum with Parameter 11.04 EXT REF1 MINIMUM.

AI1+AI3; AI2+AI3; AI1-AI3; AI2-AI3; AI1*AI3; AI2*AI3; MIN(AI1,AI3); MIN(AI2,AI3); MAX(AI1,AI3); MAX(AI2,AI3)The reference is calculated from the selected input signals according to the mathematical functions defined by this setting.

DI3U,4D(R)Speed reference is given through digital inputs as motor potentiometer control (or Floating Point Control). Digital input DI3 increases the speed (the U stands for “up”), and digital input DI4 decreases the speed (the D stands for “down”). (R) indicates that the reference will be reset to zero when a Stop command is given. The rate of change of the reference signal is controlled by Parameter 22.04 ACCEL TIME 2.

DI3U,4DSame as above, except that the speed reference is not reset to zero on a Stop command or when power is switched off. When the ACS 600 is started, the motor will ramp up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored reference.

DI5U,6DSame as above, except that the digital inputs in use are DI5 and DI6.

COMM. REFThe reference is given through fieldbus reference REF1. See Appendix C – Fieldbus Control.

COMMREF+AI1; COMMREF*AI1;The reference is given through fieldbus reference REF1. The analogue input signal 1 is combined to the fieldbus reference (sum or multiplication). See Appendix C – Fieldbus Control for more information.

EXT REF MAXIMUM

EXT REF MINIMUM

0

— EXT REF MINIMUM

— EXT REF MAXIMUM

1050 REF [V]

AI MINIMUM = 0 VAI MAXIMUM = 10 V

SPEEDout

Firmware Manual 6-7

Chapter 6 – Parameters

FAST COMMAs with the selection COMM. REF, the reference is given through fieldbus reference REF1. See Appendix C – Fieldbus Control. The FAST COMM differs from the COMM. REF as follows:

• shorter communication cycle time when transferring the reference to the core motor control program (6 ms -> 2ms)

• the direction cannot be controlled through interfaces defined byParameters 10.01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR or 10.02 EXT2 STRT/STP/DIR, nor from the control panel.

• Group 25 Critical Speeds is not effective

Note: If any of the following selections is true, the selection FAST COMM is not effective. Instead, the operation is according to selection COMM. REF.

• 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO is PID

• 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is SCALAR

• 40.14 TRIM MODE is PROPORTIONAL or DIRECT

COMMREF+AI5; COMMREF*AI5The reference is given through fieldbus reference REF1. The analogue input signal AI5 is combined to the fieldbus reference (sum or multiplication). See Appendix C – Fieldbus Control for more information. For the connection of analogue input AI5, see Group 98 Option Modules.

AI5; AI6; AI5/JOYST; AI6/JOYST; AI5+AI6; AI5-AI6; AI5*AI6; MIN(AI5,6); MAX(AI5,6)For the function description, see the corresponding selection described for AI1 and AI2 above. For the connection of analogue inputs AI5 and AI6, see Group 98 Option Modules.

DI11U,12D(R);DI11U,12DFor the function description, see the corresponding selection described for DI3 and DI4 above. For the connection of digital inputs DI11 and DI12, see Group 98 Option Modules.

11.04 EXT REF1MINIMUM

This parameter sets the minimum speed reference in rpm. The value corresponds to the minimum of the analogue input signal connected to REF1 (value of Parameter 11.03 EXT REF1 SELECT (O) is AI1, AI2 or AI3). See Figure 6-3. In the SCALAR control mode (see 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE), this parameter is given in Hz.

Note: If the reference is given through fieldbus, the scaling differs from that of an analogue signal. See Appendix C – Fieldbus Control for more information.

6-8 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

11.05 EXT REF1MAXIMUM

This parameter sets the maximum speed reference in rpm. The value corresponds to the maximum of the analogue input signal connected to REF1 (value of Parameter 11.03 EXT REF1 SELECT (O) is AI1, AI2 or AI3). See Figure 6-3. In the SCALAR control mode (see Parameter 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE), this parameter is given in Hz.

Note: If the reference is given through fieldbus, the scaling differs from that of an analogue signal. See Appendix C – Fieldbus Control for more information.

11.06 EXT REF2SELECT (O)

This parameter selects the signal source for External reference 2. The alternatives are the same as with External reference 1.

11.07 EXT REF2MINIMUM

This parameter sets the minimum reference in percent. The value corresponds to the minimum of the analogue input signal connected to REF2 (value of 11.06 EXT REF2 SELECT (O) is AI1, AI2 or AI3). See Figure 6-3.

• If the Factory, Hand/Auto or Sequential Control macro is selected, this parameter sets the minimum speed reference. The value is given as a percentage of the maximum speed defined with Parameter 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED, or 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED if the absolute value of the minimum limit is greater than the maximum limit.

• If the Torque Control macro is selected, this parameter sets the minimum torque reference. The value is given as a percentage of the nominal torque.

• If the PID Control macro is selected, this parameter sets the minimum process reference. The value is given as a percentage of the maximum process quantity.

In the SCALAR control mode (see Parameter 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE), this value is given as a percentage of the maximum frequency defined with Parameter 20.08 MAXIMUM FREQ, or 20.07 MINIMUM FREQ if the absolute value of the minimum limit is greater than the maximum limit.

Note: If the reference is given through fieldbus, the scaling differs from that of an analogue signal. See Appendix C – Fieldbus Control for more information.

11.08 EXT REF2MAXIMUM

This parameter sets the maximum reference in percent. The value corresponds to the maximum of the analogue signal connected to REF2 (value of 11.06 EXT REF2 SELECT (O) is AI1, AI2 or AI3). See Figure 6-3.

• If the Factory, Hand/Auto or Sequential Control macro is selected, this parameter sets the maximum speed reference. The value is given as a percentage of the maximum speed defined with Parameter 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED, or 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED if the absolute value of the minimum limit is greater than the maximum limit.

Firmware Manual 6-9

Chapter 6 – Parameters

• If the Torque Control macro is selected, this parameter sets the maximum torque reference. The value is given as a percentage of the nominal torque.

• If the PID Control macro is selected, this parameter sets the maximum process reference. The value is given as a percentage of the maximum process quantity.

In the SCALAR control mode (see Parameter 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE), this value is given as a percentage of the maximum frequency defined with Parameter 20.08 MAXIMUM FREQ, or 20.07 MINIMUM FREQ if the absolute value of the minimum limit is greater than the maximum limit.

Note: If the reference is given through fieldbus, the scaling differs from that of an analogue signal. See Appendix C – Fieldbus Control for more information.

Figure 6-3 Setting EXT REF MINIMUM and MAXIMUM. The range of the analogue input signal is set by Parameter 13.02 MAXIMUM AI1, 13.07 MAXIMUM AI2, 13.12 MAXIMUM AI3 and Parameter 13.01 MINIMUM AI1, 13.06 MINIMUM AI2, 13.11 MINIMUM AI3, depending on the analogue input used.

10 V20 mA

0/2 V0/4 mA

The range of analogue input

MAXIMUM AI

MINIMUM AI

18000 rpm

1500 rpm

0 rpm

18000 rpm

0 rpm

11.05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM

11.04 EXT REF1 MINIMUM

500 %

100 %

0 %

100 %

0 %

11.08 EXT REF2 MAXIMUM

11.07 EXT REF2 MINIMUM

The range of ex-ternal reference 1

The range of ex-ternal reference 2

6-10 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Group 12 ConstantSpeeds

These parameter values can be altered with the ACS 600 running, except those marked with (O). The Range/Unit column in Table 6-3 below shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.

Table 6-3 Group 12.

If a constant speed is activated, the absolute value of the speed is read from parameter group 12. The sign of speed no. 15 is considered when used as a Fault Speed (see Parameters 30.01 AI<MIN FUNCTION and 30.02 PANEL LOSS).

In External Control, when External Control Location EXT 1 is selected, constant speeds override other speed references. Constant speed selections are ignored if the torque reference or process PID reference is followed (see the Torque Control and PID Control Macros).

In the SCALAR control mode (see Parameter 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE), six constant frequencies can be set with Parameters 12.02 to 12.06 and 12.15. By default, the parameter values are set to zero Hz.

Parameter Range/Unit Description

1 CONST SPEED SEL (O)

NOT SEL; Digital Inputs Constant speed selection

2 CONST SPEED 1 0 … 18000 rpm Constant speed 1

3 CONST SPEED 2 0 … 18000 rpm Constant speed 2

4 CONST SPEED 3 0 … 18000 rpm Constant speed 3

5 CONST SPEED 4 0 … 18000 rpm Constant speed 4

6 CONST SPEED 5 0 … 18000 rpm Constant speed 5

7 CONST SPEED 6 0 … 18000 rpm Constant speed 6

8 CONST SPEED 7 0 … 18000 rpm Constant speed 7

9 CONST SPEED 8 0 … 18000 rpm Constant speed 8

10 CONST SPEED 9 0 … 18000 rpm Constant speed 9

11 CONST SPEED 10 0 … 18000 rpm Constant speed 10

12 CONST SPEED 11 0 … 18000 rpm Constant speed 11

13 CONST SPEED 12 0 … 18000 rpm Constant speed 12

14 CONST SPEED 13 0 … 18000 rpm Constant speed 13

15 CONST SPEED 14 0 … 18000 rpm Constant speed 14

16 CONST SPEED 15 -18000 … 18000 rpm Constant speed 15/ Fault speed

Firmware Manual 6-11

Chapter 6 – Parameters

12.01 CONST SPEEDSEL

This parameter defines which digital inputs are used to select Constant Speeds.

NOT SELConstant speed function disabled.

DI1(SPEED1); DI2(SPEED2); DI3(SPEED3); DI4(SPEED4); DI5(SPEED5); DI6(SPEED6)Constant Speeds 1-6 selected with digital inputs DI1-DI6. 24 V DC = Constant Speed activated.

DI1,2Three Constant Speeds (1 … 3) are selected with two digital inputs.

Table 6-4 Constant Speed selection with digital inputs DI1,2.

DI3,4Three Constant Speeds (1 … 3) are selected with two digital inputs as in DI1,2.

DI5,6Three Constant Speeds (1 … 3) are selected with two digital inputs as in DI1,2.

DI1,2,3Seven Constant Speeds (1 … 7) are selected with three digital inputs.

Table 6-5 Constant Speed selection with digital inputs DI1,2,3.

DI3,4,5Refer to DI1,2,3.

DI1 DI2 Function

0 0 No Constant Speed

1 0 Constant Speed 1

0 1 Constant Speed 2

1 1 Constant Speed 3

DI1 DI2 DI3 Function

0 0 0 No Const. Speed

1 0 0 Constant Speed 1

0 1 0 Constant Speed 2

1 1 0 Constant Speed 3

0 0 1 Constant Speed 4

1 0 1 Constant Speed 5

0 1 1 Constant Speed 6

1 1 1 Constant Speed 7

6-12 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

DI4,5,6Refer to DI1,2,3.

DI3,4,5,615 Constant Speeds (1 … 15) are selected with four digital inputs.

Table 6-6 Constant Speed selection with digital inputs DI3,4,5,6.

DI7(SPEED1); DI8 (SPEED2); DI9(SPEED3); DI10 (SPEED4); DI11(SPEED5); DI12 (SPEED6); DI7,8; DI9,10; DI11,12For the connection of digital inputs DI7 to DI12, see Group 98 Option Modules. For the function descriptions, see the corresponding selections implemented using DI1 to DI6.

DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 Function

0 0 0 0 No Const. Speed

1 0 0 0 Constant Speed 1

0 1 0 0 Constant Speed 2

1 1 0 0 Constant Speed 3

0 0 1 0 Constant Speed 4

1 0 1 0 Constant Speed 5

0 1 1 0 Constant Speed 6

1 1 1 0 Constant Speed 7

0 0 0 1 Constant Speed 8

1 0 0 1 Constant Speed 9

0 1 0 1 Constant Speed 10

1 1 0 1 Constant Speed 11

0 0 1 1 Constant Speed 12

1 0 1 1 Constant Speed 13

0 1 1 1 Constant Speed 14

1 1 1 1 Constant Speed 15

Firmware Manual 6-13

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Group 13 AnalogueInputs

These parameter values can be altered with the ACS 600 running. The Range/Unit column in Table 6-7 below shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.

Table 6-7 Group 13.

Parameter Range/Unit Description

1 MINIMUM AI1 0 V; 2 V; TUNED VALUE; TUNE

Minimum value of AI1. Value to correspond to minimum reference.

2 MAXIMUM AI1 10 V; TUNED VALUE; TUNE

Maximum value of AI1. Value to correspond to maximum reference.

3 SCALE AI1 0 … 100.0 % Scaling factor for AI1.

4 FILTER AI1 0 … 10 s Filter time constant for AI1.

5 INVERT AI1 NO; YES Analogue input signal 1 inversion.

6 MINIMUM AI2 0 mA; 4 mA; TUNED VALUE; TUNE

Minimum value of AI2. Value to correspond to minimum reference.

7 MAXIMUM AI2 20 mA; TUNED VALUE; TUNE

Maximum value of AI2. Value to correspond to maximum reference.

8 SCALE AI2 See the corresponding parameters for AI1.

9 FILTER AI2

10 INVERT AI2

11 MINIMUM AI3

12 MAXIMUM AI3

13 SCALE AI3

14 FILTER AI3

15 INVERT AI3

16 MINIMUM AI5

17 MAXIMUM AI5

18 SCALE AI5

19 FILTER AI5

20 INVERT AI5

21 MINIMUM AI6

22 MAXIMUM AI6

23 SCALE AI6

24 FILTER AI6

25 INVERT AI6

6-14 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

13.01 MINIMUM AI1 0 V; 2 V; TUNED VALUE; TUNE

This parameter sets the minimum value of the signal to be applied to AI1. If AI1 is selected as the signal source for external reference 1 (Par. 11.03) or external reference 2 (Par. 11.06), this value will correspond to the reference defined by Parameter 11.04 EXT REF1 MINIMUM or 11.07 EXT REF2 MINIMUM. Typical minimum values are 0 V or 2 V.

To tune the minimum value according to the analogue input signal, press the ENTER key, select TUNE, apply the minimum analogue input signal and press ENTER again. The value is set as the minimum. The readable range in tuning is 0 V to 10 V. The text TUNED VALUE is displayed after the TUNE operation.

The ACS 600 has a “living zero” function which allows the protection and supervision circuitry to detect a loss of control signal. To enable this feature, the minimum input signal must be set higher than 0.5 V and Parameter 30.01 AI<MIN FUNCTION must be set accordingly.

13.02 MAXIMUM AI1 10 V; TUNED VALUE; TUNE

This parameter sets the maximum value of the signal to be applied to AI1. If AI1 is selected as the signal source for external reference 1 (Par. 11.03) or external reference 2 (Par. 11.06), this value will correspond to the reference defined by Parameter 11.05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM or 11.08 EXT REF2 MAXIMUM. A typical maximum value is 10 V.

To tune the maximum value according to the analogue input signal, press the ENTER key, select TUNE, apply the maximum analogue input signal and press ENTER again. The value is set as the maximum. The readable range in tuning is 0 V to 10 V. The text TUNED VALUE is displayed after TUNE operation.

13.03 SCALE AI1 Scaling factor for analogue input AI1 signal. See Figure 6-5.

13.04 FILTER AI1 Filter time constant for analogue input AI1. As the analogue input value changes, 63 % of the change takes place within the time specified by this parameter.

Note: Even if you select 0 s as the minimum value, the signal is still filtered with a time constant of 10 ms due to the signal interface hardware. This cannot be changed by any parameters.

Firmware Manual 6-15

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Figure 6-4 Filter time constant for analogue input AI1.

13.05 INVERT AI1 NO; YES

If this parameter is set to YES, the maximum value of the analogue input signal corresponds to minimum reference and the minimum value of the analogue input signal corresponds to maximum reference.

13.06 MINIMUM AI2 0 mA; 4 mA; TUNED VALUE; TUNE

This parameter sets the minimum value of the signal to be applied to analogue input AI2. If AI2 is selected as the signal source for external reference 1 (Par. 11.03) or external reference 2 (Par. 11.06), this value will correspond to the reference set by Parameter 11.04 EXT REF1 MINIMUM or 11.07 EXT REF2 MINIMUM. Typical minimum values are 0 mA or 4 mA.

To tune the minimum value according to the analogue input signal, press the ENTER key, select TUNE, apply the minimum analogue input signal and press ENTER again. The value is set as the minimum. The readable range in tuning is 0 mA to 20 mA. The text TUNED VALUE is displayed after the TUNE operation.

The ACS 600 has a “living zero” function which allows the protection and supervision circuitry to detect a loss of signal. To enable this feature, the minimum input signal must be greater than 1 mA.

13.07 MAXIMUM AI2 20 mA; TUNED VALUE; TUNE

This parameter sets the maximum value of the signal to be applied to AI2. If AI2 is selected as the signal source for external reference 1 (Parameter 11.03 EXT REF1 SELECT (O)) or external reference 2 (Parameter 11.06 EXT REF2 SELECT (O)), this value will correspond to the reference defined by Parameter 11.05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM or 11.08 EXT REF2 MAXIMUM. A typical maximum value is 20 mA.

To tune the maximum value according to the analogue input signal, press the ENTER key, select TUNE, apply the maximum analogue input signal and press ENTER again. The values is set as the

63

[%]

100

Time constantt

Filtered Signal

Unfiltered Signal

6-16 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

maximum. The readable range in tuning is 0 mA to 20 mA. The text TUNED VALUE is displayed after TUNE operation.

13.08 SCALE AI2 Refer to Parameter 13.03 SCALE AI1.

13.09 FILTER AI2 Refer to Parameter 13.04 FILTER AI1.

13.10 INVERT AI2 Refer to Parameter 13.05 INVERT AI1.

13.11 MINIMUM AI3 Refer to Parameter 13.06 MINIMUM AI2.

13.12 MAXIMUM AI3 Refer to Parameter 13.07 MAXIMUM AI2.

13.13 SCALE AI3 Refer to Parameter 13.03 SCALE AI1.

13.14 FILTER AI3 Refer to Parameter 13.04 FILTER AI1.

13.15 INVERT AI3 Refer to Parameter 13.05 INVERT AI1.

13.16 MINIMUM AI5 Refer to Parameter 13.06 MINIMUM AI2.

13.17 MAXIMUM AI5 Refer to Parameter 13.07 MAXIMUM AI2.

13.18 SCALE AI5 Refer to Parameter 13.03 SCALE AI1.

13.19 FILTER AI5 Refer to Parameter 13.04 FILTER AI1.

13.20 INVERT AI5 Refer to Parameter 13.05 INVERT AI1.

13.21 MINIMUM AI6 Refer to Parameter 13.06 MINIMUM AI2.

13.22 MAXIMUM AI6 Refer to Parameter 13.07 MAXIMUM AI2.

13.23 SCALE AI6 Refer to Parameter 13.03 SCALE AI1.

13.24 FILTER AI6 Refer to Parameter 13.04 FILTER AI1.

13.25 INVERT AI6 Refer to Parameter 13.05 INVERT AI1.

Figure 6-5 Example of scaling of analogue inputs. External reference 1 has been selected by Parameter 11.03 EXT REF1 SELECT (O) as AI1 + AI3 and the maximum value for it (1500 rpm) by Parameter 11.05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM. The scale for analogue input AI1 is set to 100 % by Parameter 13.03 SCALE AI1. The scale for analogue input AI3 is set to 10 % by Parameter 13.13 SCALE AI3.

60 %

40 %

150 rpm 1500 rpm 10 V

SCALE AI1100 %

SCALE AI310 %

0 V 0 mA

20 mA EXT REF1 MAXIMUM1500 rpm

EXT REF1

600 rpm

90 rpm

690 rpm

AI1 + AI3 =

0 rpm

Firmware Manual 6-17

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Group 14 Relay Outputs These parameter values can only be altered when the ACS 600 is stopped. The text following Table 6-8 below explains the parameters in detail.

Table 6-8 Group 14.

14.01 RELAY RO1OUTPUT

This parameter allows you to select which information is indicated with relay output 1.

NOT USED

READYThe ACS 600 is ready to function. The relay is energised unless no run enable signal is present or a fault exists.

RUNNINGThe ACS 600 has been started, run enable signal is active, and no active faults exist.

FAULTA fault has occurred. See Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing for more details.

FAULT (-1)Relay energised when power is applied, and de-energised upon a fault trip.

FAULT(RST)The ACS 600 is in a fault condition, but will reset after the programmed autoreset delay (refer to Parameter 31.03 DELAY TIME).

Parameter Range/Unit Description

1 RELAY RO1 OUTPUT Refer to the text below for the available selections.

Relay output 1 content.

2 RELAY RO2 OUTPUT Relay output 2 content.

3 RELAY RO3 OUTPUT Relay output 3 content.

4 RO1 TON DELAY 0.0 to 3600.0 s Operation delay of the relay

5 RO1 TOFF DELAY 0.0 to 3600.0 s Release delay of the relay

6 RO2 TON DELAY 0.0 to 3600.0 s Operation delay of the relay

7 RO2 TOFF DELAY 0.0 to 3600.0 s Release delay of the relay

8 RO3 TON DELAY 0.0 to 3600.0 s Operation delay of the relay

9 RO3 TOFF DELAY 0.0 to 3600.0 s Release delay of the relay

10 NDIO MOD1 RO1 READY; RUNNING; FAULT; WARNING; REF 2 SEL; AT SPEED; POINTER1 (or POINTER2 or POINTER3)

Drive status indicated by a relay output of the optional Digital I/O Extension Module (NDIO).11 NDIO MOD1 RO2

12 NDIO MOD2 RO1

13 NDIO MOD2 RO2

14 NDIO MOD3 RO1

15 NDIO MOD3 RO2

6-18 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

STALL WARNStall alarm has been activated (refer to Parameter 30.10 STALL FUNCTION).

STALL FLTStall protection has tripped (refer to Parameter 30.10 STALL FUNCTION).

MOT TEMP WRNMotor temperature has exceeded the warning level.

MOT TEMP FLTMotor thermal protection has tripped.

ACS TEMP WRNThe ACS 600 temperature has exceeded the warning level 115 °C(239 °F).

ACS TEMP FLTThe ACS 600 overheat protection has tripped. The tripping level is 125 °C (257 °F).

FAULT/WARNAny fault or warning has occurred.

WARNINGAny warning has occurred.

REVERSEDMotor rotates in reverse direction.

EXT CTRLExternal control is selected.

REF 2 SELReference 2 is selected.

CONST SPEEDA Constant Speed (1 … 15) is selected.

DC OVERVOLTThe intermediate circuit DC voltage has exceeded the overvoltage limit.

DC UNDERVOLThe intermediate circuit DC voltage has fallen below the undervoltage limit.

SPEED 1 LIMOutput speed has exceeded or fallen below the supervision limit 1. Refer to Parameter 32.01 SPEED1 FUNCTION and Parameter 32.02 SPEED1 LIMIT.

SPEED 2 LIMOutput speed has exceeded or fallen below the supervision limit 2. Refer to Parameter 32.03 SPEED2 FUNCTION and Parameter 32.04 SPEED2 LIMIT.

Firmware Manual 6-19

Chapter 6 – Parameters

CURRENT LIMMotor current has exceeded or fallen below the set current supervision limit. Refer to Parameter 32.05 CURRENT FUNCTION and Parameter 32.06 CURRENT LIMIT.

REF 1 LIMReference 1 has exceeded or fallen below the set supervision limit. Refer to Parameter 32.11 REF1 FUNCTION and Parameter 32.12 REF1 LIMIT.

REF 2 LIMReference 2 has exceeded or fallen below the set supervision limit. Refer to Parameter 32.13 REF2 FUNCTION and Parameter 32.14 REF2 LIMIT.

TORQUE 1 LIMThe motor torque has exceeded or fallen below the set supervision limit. Refer to Parameter 32.07 TORQUE1 FUNCTION and Parameter 32.08 TORQUE1 LIMIT.

TORQUE 2 LIMThe motor torque has exceeded or fallen below the set supervision limit. Refer to Parameter 32.09 TORQUE2 FUNCTION and Parameter 32.10 TORQUE2 LIMIT.

STARTEDThe ACS 600 has received a Start command.

LOSS OF REFThe reference has been lost.

AT SPEEDThe actual value has reached the reference value. The speed error is max. 10 % of the nominal speed in the speed control mode.

ACT1 LIMPID controller actual value 1 has exceeded or fallen below the set supervision limit. Refer to Parameter 32.15 ACT1 FUNCTION and Parameter 32.16 ACT1 LIMIT.

ACT2 LIMPID controller actual value 2 has exceeded or fallen below the set supervision limit. Refer to Parameter 32.17 ACT2 FUNCTION and Parameter 32.18 ACT2 LIMIT.

COMM. MODULEThe relay is controlled by fieldbus reference REF3. See Appendix C –Fieldbus Control.

POINTER1The relay output is controlled by a status bit selected using Parameters 45.01 POINTER1 GRP+IND and 45.02 POINTER1 BIT.

BRAKE CTRLThe relay output is controlled by a brake control function. See Group 42 Brake Control.

6-20 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

14.02 RELAY RO2OUTPUT

Refer to Parameter 14.01 RELAY RO1 OUTPUT. Difference:

• POINTER1 is replaced with POINTER2.The relay is controlled by a status bit selected using Parameters 45.03 POINTER2 GRP+IND and 45.04 POINTER2 BIT.

14.03 RELAY RO3OUTPUT

Refer to Parameter 14.01 RELAY RO1 OUTPUT. Differences:

• ACT 1 LIM and ACT 2 LIM indications cannot be selected for RO3.

• POINTER1 is replaced with POINTER3. The relay is controlled by a status bit selected using Parameters 45.05 POINTER3 GRP+IND and 45.06 POINTER3 BIT.

• MAGN READY can be selected for RO3 only.The motor is magnetised and ready to give nominal torque (nominal magnetising of the motor has been reached).

• USER 2 SEL can be selected for RO3 only.The User Macro 2 has been loaded.

14.04 RO1 TON DELAY Sets an operation delay for relay output RO1.

0.0 s to 3600.0 sDefault value is 0.0 s.

14.05 RO1 TOFF DELAY Sets the release delay for relay output RO1. See Parameter 14.04 RO1 TON DELAY for more information.

14.06 RO2 TON DELAY Sets the operation delay for relay output RO2. See Parameter 14.04 RO1 TON DELAY for more information.

14.07 RO2 TOFF DELAY Sets the release delay for relay output RO2. See Parameter 14.04 RO1 TON DELAY for more information.

14.08 RO3 TON DELAY Sets the operation delay for relay output RO3. See Parameter 14.04 RO1 TON DELAY for more information.

14.09 RO3 TOFF DELAY Sets the release delay for relay output RO3. See Parameter 14.04 RO1 TON DELAY for more information.

“1”

“0”

“1”

“0”

timetOn tOff tOn tOff

tOn Operation delay for relay output RO1 (14.04 RO1 TON DELAY)tOff Release delay for relay output RO1 (14.05 RO1 TOFF DELAY)

Drive status

Relay RO1 status

Firmware Manual 6-21

Chapter 6 – Parameters

14.10 NDIO MOD1 RO1 Selects the drive status that is indicated by relay output RO1 of the optional Digital I/O Extension Module no. 1 (see Parameter 98.03 DI/O EXT MODULE 1).

READY; RUNNING; FAULT; WARNING; REF 2 SEL; AT SPEEDREADY is the default value. See Parameter 14.01 RELAY RO1 OUTPUT for more information on the selections.

POINTER1The relay output is controlled by a status bit selected using Parameters 45.01 POINTER1 GRP+IND and 45.02 POINTER1 BIT.

14.11 NDIO MOD1 RO2 Selects the drive status that is indicated by relay output RO2 of the optional Digital I/O Extension Module no. 1 (see Parameter 98.03 DI/O EXT MODULE 1).

READY; RUNNING; FAULT; WARNING; REF 2 SEL; AT SPEEDRUNNING is the default value. See Parameter 14.01 RELAY RO1 OUTPUT for more information on the selections.

POINTER2The relay is controlled by a status bit selected using Parameters 45.03 POINTER2 GRP+IND and 45.04 POINTER2 BIT.

14.12 NDIO MOD2 RO1 Selects the drive status that is indicated by relay output RO1 of the optional Digital I/O Extension Module no. 2 (see Parameter 98.04 DI/O EXT MODULE 2).

READY; RUNNING; FAULT; WARNING; REF 2 SEL; AT SPEEDFAULT is the default value. See Parameter 14.01 RELAY RO1 OUTPUT for more information on the selections.

POINTER3The relay is controlled by a status bit selected using Parameters 45.05 POINTER3 GRP+IND and 45.06 POINTER3 BIT.

14.13 NDIO MOD2 RO2 Selects the drive status that is indicated by relay output RO2 of the optional Digital I/O Extension Module no. 2 (see Parameter 98.04 DI/O EXT MODULE 2).

READY; RUNNING; FAULT; WARNING; REF 2 SEL; AT SPEEDWARNING is the default value. See Parameter 14.01 RELAY RO1 OUTPUT for more information on the selections.

POINTER4The relay is controlled by a status bit selected using Parameters 45.07 POINTER4 GRP+IND and 45.08 POINTER4 BIT.

14.14 NDIO MOD3 RO1 Selects the drive status that is indicated by relay output RO1 of the optional Digital I/O Extension Module no. 3 (see Parameter 98.05 DI/O EXT MODULE 3).

READY; RUNNING; FAULT; WARNING; REF 2 SEL; AT SPEEDREF 2 SEL is the default value. See Parameter 14.01 RELAY RO1 OUTPUT for more information on the selections.

6-22 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

POINTER5The relay is controlled by a status bit selected using Parameters 45.09 POINTER5 GRP+IND and 45.10 POINTER5 BIT.

14.15 NDIO MOD3 RO2 Selects the drive status that is indicated by relay output RO2 of the optional Digital I/O Extension Module no. 3 (see Parameter 98.05 DI/O EXT MODULE 3).

READY; RUNNING; FAULT; WARNING; REF 2 SEL; AT SPEEDAT SPEED is the default value. See Parameter 14.01 RELAY RO1 OUTPUT for more information on the selections.

POINTER6The relay is controlled by a status bit selected using Parameters 45.11 POINTER6 GRP+IND and 45.12 POINTER6 BIT.

Firmware Manual 6-23

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Group 15 AnalogueOutputs

These parameter values can be altered with the ACS 600 running, except those marked with (O). The Range/Unit column in Table 6-9 below shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.

Table 6-9 Group 15.

15.01 ANALOGUEOUTPUT1 (O)

This parameter allows you to select which output signal is connected to analogue output AO1 (current signal). The following list shows the full scale value with Parameters 15.05 SCALE AO1 and 15.10 SCALE AO2 set to 100 %.

NOT USED

P SPEEDValue of a process quantity derived from the motor speed. Refer to Group 34 Process Variable for scaling and unit selection (%; m/s; rpm). The updating interval is 100 ms.

SPEEDMotor speed. 20 mA = motor nominal speed. The updating interval is 24 ms.

Parameter Range/Unit Description

1 ANALOGUE OUTPUT 1 (O)

Refer to the text below for the available selections.

Analogue output 1 content.

2 INVERT AO1 NO; YES Analogue output signal 1 inversion.

3 MINIMUM AO1 0 mA; 4 mA Analogue output signal 1 minimum.

4 FILTER AO1 0.00 … 10.00 s Filter time constant for AO1.

5 SCALE AO1 10 … 1000 % Analogue output signal 1 scaling factor.

6 ANALOGUE OUTPUT 2 (O)

Refer to the text below for the available selections.

Analogue output 2 content.

7 INVERT AO2 NO; YES Analogue output signal 2 inversion.

8 MINIMUM AO2 0 mA; 4 mA Analogue output signal 2 minimum.

9 FILTER AO2 0.00 … 10.00 s Filter time constant for AO2.

10 SCALE AO2 10 … 1000 % Analogue output signal 2 scaling factor.

6-24 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

FREQUENCYOutput frequency. 20 mA = motor nominal frequency. The updating interval is 24 ms.

CURRENTOutput current. 20 mA = motor nominal current. The updating interval is 24 ms.

TORQUEMotor torque. 20 mA = 100 % of motor nominal rating. The updating interval is 24 ms.

POWERMotor power. 20 mA = 100 % of motor nominal rating. The updating interval is 100 ms.

DC BUS VOLTDC bus voltage. 20 mA = 100 % of the reference value. The reference value is 540 V d.c. ( =1.35 · 400 V) for the ACS 600 with 380 … 415 V a.c. mains voltage rating and 675 V d.c. (1.35 · 500 V) for the ACS 600 with 380 … 500 V a.c. mains voltage rating. The updating interval is 24 ms.

OUTPUT VOLTMotor voltage. 20 mA = motor rated voltage. The updating interval is 100 ms.

APPL OUTPUTThe reference which is given as output from the application. For example, if the PID Control macro is in use, this is the output of the process PID controller. The updating interval is 24 ms.

REFERENCEActive reference that the ACS 600 is currently following. 20 mA = 100 % of the active reference. The updating interval is 24 ms.

CONTROL DEVThe difference between the reference and the actual value of the Process PID Controller. 0/4 mA = -100 %, 10/12 mA = 0 %, 20 mA = 100 %. The updating interval is 24 ms.

ACTUAL 1Actual value 1 of the process PID controller. 20 mA = value of Parameter 40.10 ACT1 MAXIMUM. The updating interval is 24 ms.

ACTUAL 2Actual value 2 of the process PID controller. 20 mA = value of Parameter 40.12 ACT2 MAXIMUM. The updating interval is 24 ms.

COMM. MODULEThe value is read from fieldbus reference REF4. See Appendix C –Fieldbus Control.

M1 TEMP MEASAnalogue output is a current source in a motor temperature measuring circuit. Depending on the sensor type, the output is 9.1 mA (Pt 100) or

Firmware Manual 6-25

Chapter 6 – Parameters

1.6 mA (PTC). For more information, see Parameter 35.01 MOT1 TEMP AI1 SEL.

If this value is selected, the settings of Parameters 15.02 INVERT AO1 to 15.05 SCALE AO1 are not effective.

15.02 INVERT AO1 If you select YES, the analogue output AO1 signal is inverted.

15.03 MINIMUM AO1 The minimum value of the analogue output signal can be set to either 0 mA or 4 mA.

15.04 FILTER AO1 Filter time constant for analogue output AO1.

As the analogue output value changes, 63 % of the change takes place within the time period specified by this parameter (See Figure 6-4).

Note: Even if you select 0 s as the minimum value, the signal is still filtered with a time constant of 10 ms due to the signal interface hardware. This cannot be changed by any parameters.

15.05 SCALE AO1 This parameter is the scaling factor for the analogue output AO1 signal. If the selected value is 100 %, the nominal value of the output signal corresponds to 20 mA. If the maximum is less than full scale, increase the value of this parameter.

Example: The nominal motor current is 7.5 A and the measured maximum current at maximum load is 5 A. The motor current 0 to 5 A is read as 0 to 20 mA analogue signal through AO1.

1. AO1 is set to CURRENT with Parameter 15.01 ANALOGUE OUTPUT1 (O).

2. AO1 minimum is set to 0 mA with Parameter 15.03 MINIMUM AO1.

3. The measured maximum motor current is scaled to correspond to 20 mA analogue output signal: The reference value of the output signal CURRENT is the motor nominal current i.e. 7.5 A (see Parameter 15.01 ANALOGUE OUTPUT1 (O)). With 100 % scaling, the reference value corresponds to full scale output signal 20 mA. To make the measured maximum motor current correspond to 20 mA, it should be scaled equal to the reference value before it is converted to analogue output signal.

Thus the scaling factor is set to 150 %.

15.06 ANALOGUEOUTPUT2 (O)

Refer to Parameter 15.01 ANALOGUE OUTPUT1 (O).

Exceptions:

• If COMM. MODULE is selected, the value is read from fieldbus reference REF 5. See Appendix C – Fieldbus Control.

• Selection M1 TEMP MEAS is not available.

15.07 INVERT AO2 Refer to Parameter 15.02 INVERT AO1.

k · 5 A = 7.5 A => k = 1.5 = 150 %

6-26 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

15.08 MINIMUM AO2 Refer to Parameter 15.03 MINIMUM AO1.

15.09 FILTER AO2 Refer to Parameter 15.04 FILTER AO1.

15.10 SCALE AO2 Refer to Parameter 15.05 SCALE AO1.

Firmware Manual 6-27

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Group 16 System CtrInputs

These parameter values can only be altered with the ACS 600 stopped. The Range/Unit column in Table 6-10 below shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.

Table 6-10 Group 16.

16.01 RUN ENABLE This parameter selects the source of the run enable signal.

Indication of missing Run Enable signal is shown on the first row of the Control Panel display (see Chapter 2 – Overview of ACS 600 Programming and the CDP 312 Control Panel).

YESRun enable signal is active. The ACS 600 is ready to start without an external run enable signal.

DI1 … DI12To activate the Run Enable signal, the selected digital input must be connected to +24 V DC. If the voltage drops to 0 V DC, the ACS 600 will stop and will not start until the run enable signal resumes. The drive stop mode is selected with Parameter 21.07 RUN ENABLE FUNC.

For the connection of DI7 to DI12 see Group 98 Option Modules.

COMM. MODULEThe signal is given through Fieldbus Control Word. See Appendix C –Fieldbus Control.

16.02 PARAMETERLOCK

This parameter selects the state of the Parameter Lock. With Parameter Lock you can inhibit unauthorised parameter changes.

OPENParameter Lock is open. Parameters can be altered.

Parameter Range/Unit Description

1 RUN ENABLE YES; DI1; …; DI12; COMM. MODULE

Run enable input.

2 PARAMETER LOCK OPEN; LOCKED; Parameter lock input.

3 PASS CODE 0 … 30000 Parameter lock pass code.

4 FAULT RESET SEL NOT SEL; DI1; … ;DI6; ON STOP; COMM. MODULE; DI7; … ; DI12

Fault reset input.

5 USER MACRO IO CHG NOT SEL; DI1; … ; DI12

Restores parameters to user macro setting values.

6 LOCAL LOCK OFF; ON Disables local control (Panel)

7 PARAM SAVE SAVE..; DONE Parameter saving to the permanent memory

6-28 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

LOCKEDParameter Lock is closed from the Control Panel. Parameters cannot be altered. The Parameter Lock can be opened only by entering the valid code at Parameter 16.03 PASS CODE.

16.03 PASS CODE This parameter selects the Pass Code for the Parameter Lock. The default value of this parameter is 0. In order to open the Parameter Lock change the value to 358. After the Parameter Lock is opened the value is automatically changed back to 0.

16.04 FAULT RESET SEL NOT SELIf you select NOT SEL, fault reset is executed from the Control Panel keypad only.

DI1 … DI12If a digital input is selected, fault reset is executed through the digital input, or from the Control Panel:

• Control Panel is in remote mode: Reset is activated by a rising (positive) edge of the digital input signal i.e. by closing the normally open contact connecting 24 VDC to the digital input terminal.

• Control Panel is in local mode: Reset is activated by the Control Panel reset key.

For the connection of DI7 to DI12, see Group 98 Option Modules.

ON STOPFault reset is executed along with the stop signal received through a digital input. Reset can be given from the Control Panel also.

COMM. MODULEThe signal is given through fieldbus Control Word. See Appendix C –Fieldbus Control. Reset can be given from the Control Panel also.

16.05 USER MACRO IOCHG

NOT SEL; DI1 … DI12

This parameter enables the selection of the desired User Macro via a digital input in the following way:

When the state of the specified digital input changes from high to low User Macro 1 is loaded. When the state of the specified digital input changes from low to high User Macro 2 is loaded.

The User Macro used can be changed via a digital input only when the drive is stopped. During the change of the Macro the drive will not start.

The value of this parameter is not included in the User Macro. The setting once made remains despite of the User Macro change.

User Macro 2 selection can be supervised via relay output 3. See Parameter 14.03 RELAY RO3 OUTPUT for more information.

Note: Always redo the User Macro save by Parameter 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO after changing parameter settings or reperforming the motor identification. If Parameter 16.05 USER

Firmware Manual 6-29

Chapter 6 – Parameters

MACRO IO CHG is pointing to digital input, the last settings saved by the user are loaded into use whenever the power is switched off and on again, or macro is changed. Any unsaved changes will be lost.

For the connection of DI7 to DI12, see Group 98 Option Modules.

16.06 LOCAL LOCK OFF No local lock in use.ONDisables entering to local control mode (LOC/REM key of the Panel).

WARNING: Before activating this function it must be ensured that the Control Panel is not needed for stopping the drive.

16.07 PARAM SAVE SAVE..; DONESelection SAVE saves parameter values to the permanent memory.

Note: A new parameter value of a standard macro is saved automatically when changed from the Panel but not when altered through a fieldbus connection.

6-30 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Group 20 Limits These parameter values can be altered with the ACS 600 running. The Range/Unit column in Table 6-11 below shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.

Table 6-11 Group 20.

Parameter Range/Unit Description

1 MINIMUM SPEED -18000/(number of pole pairs)… 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED

Operating range minimum speed. Cannot be used in the SCALAR mode.

2 MAXIMUM SPEED 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED … 18000/(number of pole pairs)

Operating range maxi-mum speed. Cannot be used in the SCALAR mode.

3 MAXIMUM CURRENT 0 % Ihd … 200 % Ihd Maximum output current.

4 MAXIMUM TORQUE 0.0 % … 600.0 % Maximum torque. Cannot be used in the SCALAR mode.

5 OVERVOLTAGE CTRL YES; NO DC overvoltage controller

6 UNDERVOLTAGE CTRL YES; NO DC undervoltage control-ler

7 MINIMUM FREQ -300 Hz … 50 Hz Operating range mini-mum frequency. Visible in the SCALAR mode only.

8 MAXIMUM FREQ -50 … 300 Hz Operating range maxi-mum frequency. Visible in the SCALAR mode only.

9 MIN TORQ SELECTOR -MAX TORQ; SET MIN TORQ

Minimum torque limit selector. Cannot be used in the SCALAR mode.

10 SET MIN TORQUE -600.0 % … 0.0 % Minimum torque value, when Parameter 20.09 MIN TORQ SELECTOR is SET MIN TORQ. Cannot be used in the SCALAR mode.

11 P MOTORING LIMIT 0%…600% Limit for the maximum power from inverter to motor

12 P GENERATING LIMIT -600% .. 0% Limit for the maximum power from motor to inverter

Firmware Manual 6-31

Chapter 6 – Parameters

20.01 MINIMUM SPEED Represents the minimum speed. The default value depends on the number of motor pole pairs and it is either -750, -1000, -1500 or -3000. When the value is positive the motor will not run in the reverse direction.

This limit cannot be set in the SCALAR control mode.

Note: The speed limits in Group 20 Limits are linked to the setting of 99.08 MOTOR NOM SPEED. If value of Parameter 99.08 MOTOR NOM SPEED is changed, the speed limit settings change automatically as well.

20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED Represents the maximum speed. The default value depends on the selected motor and it is either 750, 1000, 1500 or 3000.

This limit cannot be set in the SCALAR control mode.

Note: The speed limits in Group 20 Limits are linked to the setting of 99.08 MOTOR NOM SPEED. If value of Parameter 99.08 MOTOR NOM SPEED is changed, the speed limit settings change automatically as well.

20.03 MAXIMUMCURRENT

The maximum output current that the ACS 600 will supply to the motor. The default value is 200 % I2hd e.g. 200 percentage of the heavy-duty use output current of the ACS 600.

20.04 MAXIMUMTORQUE

This setting defines the momentarily allowed maximum torque of the motor in the forward direction. The motor control software of the ACS 600 limits the setting range of the maximum torque according to the inverter and motor data. The default value is 300 % of the nominal torque of the motor.

This limit cannot be set in the SCALAR control mode.

20.05 OVERVOLTAGECTRL

Selection NO deactivates the overvoltage controller.

Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the DC bus voltage to rise to the overvoltage control limit. To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the limit, the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the braking torque.

CAUTION! If a braking chopper and a braking resistor are connected to the ACS 600, this parameter value must be set to OFF to ensure proper operation of the chopper.

20.06 UNDERVOLTAGECTRL

Selection NO deactivates the undervoltage controller.

If the DC bus voltage drops due to loss of input power, the undervoltage controller will decrease the motor speed in order to keep the DC bus voltage above the lower limit. By decreasing the motor speed, the inertia of the load will cause regeneration back into the ACS 600, keeping the DC bus charged, and preventing an undervoltage trip.

6-32 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

This will increase power loss ride through on systems with a high inertia, such as a centrifuge or fan.

20.07 MINIMUM FREQ This limit can be set in the SCALAR control mode only. When the value is positive the motor will not run in the reverse direction.

20.08 MAXIMUM FREQ This limit can be set in the SCALAR control mode only.

20.09 MIN TORQSELECTOR

Parameter defines the allowed minimum torque i.e. the allowed torque in reverse (negative) rotation direction.

This parameter cannot be set in the SCALAR control mode.

-MAX TORQ

Minimum torque limit is equal to the inverted maximum limit (20.04 MAXIMUM TORQUE).

SET MIN TORQ

Minimum torque limit is defined with Parameter 20.10 SET MIN TORQUE.

20.10 SET MIN TORQUE Parameter defines the allowed minimum torque of the motor when Parameter 20.09 MIN TORQ SELECTOR is set to value SET MIN TORQ.

This parameter cannot be set in the SCALAR control mode.

-600 % … 0%Minimum torque limit in percent of the nominal motor torque. Default value is -300 %.

20.11 P MOTORINGLIMIT

Parameter defines the allowed maximum power fed by the inverter to the motor.

0% … 600%Maximum motoring power limit in percent of the motor nominal power. Default value is 300%.

20.12 P GENERATINGLIMIT

Parameter defines the allowed maximum power fed by the motor to the inverter.

-600% … 0%Maximum generating power limit in percent of the motor nominal power. Default value is -300%.

Firmware Manual 6-33

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Group 21 Start/Stop The parameter values marked with (O) cannot be altered with the ACS 600 running. The Range/Unit column in Table 6-12 below shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.

Table 6-12 Group 21.

21.01 START FUNCTION(O)

AUTOMATICAutomatic start is the default start function. This selection guarantees optimal motor start in most cases. It includes the flying start (starting to a rotating machine) and the automatic restart (stopped motor can be restarted immediately without waiting the motor flux to die away) functions.

The ACS 600 motor control identifies the flux as well as the mechanical state of the motor and starts the motor instantly under all conditions.

AUTOMATIC is always to be selected in the scalar control mode (see Parameter 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE) although no flying start or automatic restart is possible by default in scalar control. The flying start feature needs to be activated separately with Parameter 21.08 SCALAR FLY START.

DC MAGNDC magnetising should be selected if high breakaway torque is required. The ACS 600 pre-magnetises the motor before the start. The pre-magnetising time is determined automatically, being typically 200 ms to 2 s depending on the motor size. This selection guarantees the highest possible break-away torque.

The starting to a rotating machine is not possible when DC magnetising is selected. DC magnetising cannot be selected in the scalar control mode (see Parameter 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE).

Parameter Range/Unit Description

1 START FUNCTION (O)

AUTO; DC MAGN; CNST DC MAGN

Start function selection.

2 CONST MAGN TIME (O)

30.0 ms … 10000.0 ms

Time for pre–magnetising.

3 STOP FUNCTION COAST; RAMP Stop function selection.

4 DC HOLD NO; YES Enable DC Hold.

5 DC HOLD SPEED (O) 0 rpm … 3000 rpm Speed for DC Hold.

6 DC HOLD CURR (O) 0 % … 100 % Current for DC Hold.

07 RUN ENABLE FUNC RAMP STOP; COAST STOP; OFF2 STOP; OFF3 STOP

Drive stop mode for the run enable function

8 SCALAR FLY START NO; YES Activation of the flying start feature in scalar control mode.

6-34 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

CNST DC MAGNConstant DC magnetising should be selected instead of DC magnetising if constant pre-magnetising time is required (e.g. if the motor start must be simultaneous with a mechanical brake release). This selection also guarantees the highest possible break-away torque when the pre-magnetising time is set long enough. The pre-magnetising time is defined by Parameter 21.02 CONST MAGN TIME (O).

WARNING! The drive will start after the set magnetising time has passed although the motor magnetisation is not completed. In applications where a full breakaway torque is essential, ensure always that the constant magnetising time is long enough to allow generation of full magnetisation and torque.

The starting to a rotating machine is not possible when DC magnetising is selected. DC magnetising cannot be selected in the scalar control mode (see Parameter 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE.

21.02 CONST MAGNTIME (O)

Defines the magnetising time in the constant magnetising mode. After the start command the ACS 600 automatically pre-magnetises the motor the set time.

To ensure full magnetising, set the value the same as or higher than the rotor time constant. If not known, use the rule-of-thumb value given in table below:

21.03 STOP FUNCTION COASTThe ACS 600 stops supplying voltage immediately after a Stop command is received and the motor coasts to a stop.

RAMPRamp deceleration, as defined by the active deceleration time, Parameter 22.03 DECEL TIME 1 or Parameter 22.05 DECEL TIME 2.

Warning: If the brake control function is on, the application program uses ramp stop in spite of the selection COAST (see Group 42 Brake Control

21.04 DC HOLD If this parameter is set to YES, the DC Hold feature is enabled.

Motor Rated Power Constant Magnetising Time

< 10 kW > 100 to 200 ms

10 to 200 kW > 200 to 1000 ms

1200 to 1000 kW > 1000 to 2000 ms

Firmware Manual 6-35

Chapter 6 – Parameters

DC Hold is not possible in the SCALAR control mode.

Figure 6-6 DC Hold.

When both reference and speed drop below Parameter 21.05 DC HOLD SPEED (O), the ACS 600 will stop generating sinusoidal current and inject DC into the motor. The current value is the current set by Parameter 21.06 DC HOLD CURR (O). When the reference speed rises above 21.05 DC HOLD SPEED (O), the DC will be removed and normal ACS 600 function resumed.

DC Hold has no effect if the Start signal is deactivated.

Note: Injecting DC current into the motor causes the motor to heat up. In applications where long DC Hold times are required, externally ventilated motors should be used. If the DC Hold period is long, the DC Hold cannot prevent the motor shaft from rotating if a constant load is applied to the motor.

21.05 DC HOLD SPEED(O)

Sets the speed limit for DC Hold.

21.06 DC HOLD CURR(O)

Sets the current applied to the motor when DC Hold is activated.

21.07 RUN ENABLEFUNC

Parameter selects which stop mode is applied when the run enable signal is switched off. The run enable signal is put into use by Parameter 16.01 RUN ENABLE.

The setting overrides the normal stop mode setting (Parameter 21.03 STOP FUNCTION) when the run enable signal is switched off.

WARNING! The drive will restart after the run enable signal restores (if the START signal is on).

DC HOLD SPEED

t

t

SPEEDmotor

Ref.

DC Hold

6-36 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Warning: If the brake control function is on, the application program uses ramp stop in spite of the selection COAST STOP (see Group 42 Brake Control).

RAMP STOPThis is the default value. The application program stops the drive along the deceleration ramp defined by Parameters in Group 22 Accel/Decel.

COAST STOPThe application program stops the drive by cutting off the motor power supply (the inverter IGBTs are blocked). The motor rotates freely to zero speed.

OFF2 STOPThe application program stops the drive by cutting off the motor power supply (the inverter IGBTs are blocked). The motor rotates freely to zero speed.

The drive will restart only when the run enable signal is on and the START signal is switched on (progam receives a rising edge of the START signal).

OFF3 STOPThe application program stops the drive along the deceleration ramp defined by Parameter 22.07 EM STOP RAMP TIME.

The drive will restart only when the run enable is on and the START signal is switched on (progam receives a rising edge of the START signal).

21.08 SCALAR FLYSTART

This Parameter activates the flying start feature in the scalar control mode. See Parameters 21.01 START FUNCTION (O) and 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE.

NOFlying start feature is not active. This is the default setting.

YESFlying start feature is active.

Firmware Manual 6-37

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Group 22 Accel/Decel These parameter values can be altered with the ACS 600 running, except those marked with (O). The Range/Unit column in Table 6-13 below shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.

Table 6-13 Group 22.

22.01 ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL(O)

This parameter selects the Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp pair that is used. The selection can be performed through digital inputs DI1 to DI12. 0 V DC = Acceleration ramp 1 and Deceleration ramp 1 are used; 24 V DC = Acceleration ramp 2 and Deceleration ramp 2 are used.

For the connection of DI7 to DI12, see Group 98 Option Modules.

22.02 ACCEL TIME 1 The time required for the speed to change from 0 to the maximum speed. The maximum speed is defined with Parameter 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED, or 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED if the absolute value of the minimum limit is greater than the maximum limit.

If the reference signal changes at a rate slower than the acceleration time, the motor speed will follow the reference signal. If the reference signal changes faster than the acceleration time, the rate at which the motor speeds up will be limited by this parameter.

If acceleration time is set too short, the ACS 600 will automatically prolong the acceleration not to exceed the maximum current limit (Parameter 20.03 MAXIMUM CURRENT).

22.03 DECEL TIME 1 The time required for the speed to change from maximum to zero. The maximum speed is defined with Parameter 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED, or 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED, if the absolute value of the minimum limit is greater than the maximum limit.

Parameter Range/Unit Description

1 ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL (O) ACC/DEC 1; ACC/DEC 2;DI1 … DI12

Acceleration/Deceleration ramp selection.

2 ACCEL TIME 1 0.00 … 1800.00 s

Time for speed 0 to max. speed (Acceleration ramp 1).

3 DECEL TIME 1 0.00 … 1800.00 s

Time for max. speed to 0 speed (Deceleration ramp 1).

4 ACCEL TIME 2 0.00 … 1800.00 s

Time for speed 0 to max. speed (Acceleration ramp 2).

5 DECEL TIME 2 0.00 … 1800.00 s

Time for speed max. to 0 speed (Deceleration ramp 2).

6 ACC/DEC RAMP SHPE 0 … 1000.00 s Accel./Decel. ramp shape time.

7 EM STOP RAMP TIME 0.00 … 2000.00 s

Emergency Stop ramp time.

6-38 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

If the reference signal changes at a rate slower than the deceleration time, the motor speed will follow the reference signal. If the reference signal changes faster than the deceleration time, the rate at which the motor slows down will be limited by this parameter.

If deceleration time is set too short, the ACS 600 will automatically prolong the deceleration not to exceed the DC bus overvoltage limit. If there is any doubt about the deceleration time being too short, ensure that the DC overvoltage control is on (Parameter 20.05 OVERVOLTAGE CTRL).

If short deceleration time is needed for the high inertia application, the ACS 600 should be equipped with a braking chopper and a braking resistor. The excess energy generated during the braking is led by the chopper to the resistor and dissipated to prevent a DC voltage rise in the intermediate circuit. The chopper and the resistor are available for all ACS 600 types as optional add-on kits.

22.04 ACCEL TIME 2 Refer to Parameter 22.02 ACCEL TIME 1.

22.05 DECEL TIME 2 Refer to Parameter 22.03 DECEL TIME 1.

22.06 ACC/DECRAMP SHPE

This parameter allows you to select the shape of the acceleration/deceleration ramp.

0 sLinear ramp. Suitable for drives requiring steady acceleration or deceleration and for slow ramps.

0.100 … 1000.00 sS-curve ramp. S-curve ramps are ideal for conveyors carrying fragile loads, or other applications where a smooth transition is required when changing from one speed to another. The S curve consists of symmetrical curves at both ends of the ramp and a linear part in between.

Figure 6-7 Acceleration and deceleration ramp shapes.

Linear ramp ACC/DEC RAMP SHPE = 0 s

S-curve ramp ACC/DEC RAMP SHPE = x s

x s

As a rule of thumb, a suitable relation between the ramp shape time and the acceleration ramp time is 1/5. Examples are given below.

Acc/Dec Ramp Time

(Par. 22.02 to 05)

Ramp Shape Time (Par. 22.06)

1 s 0.2 s

5 s 1 s

15 s 3 s

Firmware Manual 6-39

Chapter 6 – Parameters

22.07 EM STOPRAMP TIME

This parameter defines the time inside which the drive is stopped upon an Emergency Stop command. The command can be given through fieldbus or the NDIO module Emergency Stop option. For more information on the Emergency Stop option consult the local ABB representative.

0.00 … 2000.00 s

6-40 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Group 23 Speed Ctrl These parameter values can be altered with the ACS 600 running. The Range/Unit column in Table 6-14 below shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.

These parameters are not visible in the SCALAR control mode.

Table 6-14 Group 23.

It is possible to tune the PID algorithm based speed controller of the ACS 600 by setting Parameters 1 to 5 in this group or by selecting the Autotune run by Parameter 6. The Motor ID Run automatically tunes the speed controller. In most cases there is no need to tune it separately.

The values of these parameters define how the output of the Speed Controller changes when there is a difference (error value) between the actual speed and the reference. Figure 6-8 displays typical step responses of the Speed Controller.

Step responses can be seen by monitoring Actual Signal 1.02 SPEED.

Note: The Standard Motor ID Run (refer to Chapter 3 – Start-up Data) updates the values of Parameters 23.01, 23.02 and 23.04.

The dynamic performance of the speed control at low speeds can be improved by increasing the relative gain and decreasing the integration time.

Speed controller output is the reference for the torque controller. The torque reference is limited by Parameter 20.04 MAXIMUM TORQUE.

Parameter Range/Unit Description

1 GAIN 0.0 … 200.0 Gain for speed controller.

2 INTEGRATION TIME 0.01 s … 999.97 s Integration time for speed controller.

3 DERIVATION TIME 0.0 … 9999.8 ms Derivation time for speed controller.

4 ACC COMPENSATION

0.00 s … 999.98 s Derivation time used in compensation of acceleration.

5 SLIP GAIN 0.0 % … 400.0 % Gain for the slip of the motor.

6 AUTOTUNE RUN NO; YES Autotuning of the speed controller.

Firmware Manual 6-41

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Figure 6-8 Step responses of the Speed Controller with different settings. 1 to 10 % reference step is used.

Figure 6-9 Speed controller, a simplified block diagram.

23.01 GAIN Relative gain for the speed controller. If you select 1, a 10 % change in error value (e.g. reference — actual value) causes the speed controller output to change 10 % of the nominal torque.

Note: Great gain may cause speed oscillation.

A : Undercompensated: 23.02 INTEGRATION TIME too short and 23.01 GAIN too lowB : Normally tuned, autotuningC : Normally tuned, manual tuning. Better dynamic performance than with B D : Overcompensated: 23.02 INTEGRATION TIME too short and 23.01 GAIN too high

Speed

t

CB DA

Step height

Derivative

Proportional,Integral

Derivative AccelerationCompensation

Torque reference

Speedreference

CalculatedActual Speed

Error value-

++

++

6-42 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Figure 6-10 Speed Controller Output after an error step when the error remains constant.

23.02 INTEGRATIONTIME

Integration time defines the rate at which the controller output changes when the error value is constant. The shorter the integration time, the faster the continuous error value is corrected. Too short integration time makes the control unstable.

Figure 6-11 Speed Controller Output after an error step when the error remains constant.

23.03 DERIVATION TIME Derivative action boosts the controller output if the error value changes. The longer the derivation time, the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change. The derivation makes the control more responsive for the disturbances. If derivation time is set to zero, the controller works as a PI controller, otherwise as a PID controller.

Gain = Kp = 1TI = Integration time = 0TD= Derivation time = 0

Controller

Error Value

Controller Output

t

%

e = Error valueOutput = Kp · e

TI

Controller Output

t

%

Gain = Kp = 1TI = Integration time > 0TD= Derivation time = 0

Kp · e e = Error value

Kp · e

Firmware Manual 6-43

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Figure 6-12 Speed Controller Output after an error step when the error remains constant.

Note: Changing this parameter is recommended only if a pulse encoder is used.

23.04 ACCCOMPENSATION

Derivation time for compensation of acceleration. In order to compensate inertia during acceleration the derivative of the reference is added to the output of the speed controller. The principle of a derivative action is described at 23.03 DERIVATION TIME above.

As a general rule, set this parameter to a value from 50 to 100 % of the sum of the mechanical time constants of the motor and the driven machine.

Figure 6-13 Speed responses when a high inertia load is accelerated along a ramp.

Note: AUTOTUNE RUN initialises this parameter to 50 % of mechanical time constant.

23.05 SLIP GAIN Defines the gain for the slip. 100 % means full slip compensation; 0 % means no slip compensation. The default value is 100 %. Other values can be used if static speed error is detected despite of the full slip compensation.

Example: 1000 rpm constant speed reference is given to the drive. Despite of the full slip compensation (SLIP GAIN = 100 %) a manual

TI

Kp · e

Error Value

Controller Output

t

% Gain = Kp = 1TI = Integration time > 0TD= Derivation time > 0Ts= Sample time period = 2 ms�e = Error value change between two samples

e = Error value

Kp · TD · �eTs Kp · e

Speed referenceActual speed

No Acceleration Compensation Acceleration Compensation

tt

% %

6-44 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

tachometer measurement from the motor axis gives speed value 998 rpm. The static speed error is 1000 rpm — 998 rpm = 2 rpm. To compensate the error, the slip gain should be increased. At 106 % gain value no static speed error exists.

23.06 AUTOTUNE RUN The speed controller of the ACS 600 can be tuned automatically by performing the Autotune Run. The mechanical inertia of the load is taken into consideration in GAIN, INTEGRATION, DERIVATION and ACC COMPENSATION parameters. The system is tuned to be undercompensated rather than overcompensated.

To perform the Autotune Run:

• Run the motor at a constant speed of 20 to 70 % of the rated speed.

• Change Parameter 23.06 AUTOTUNE RUN to YES.

After the Autotune Run is performed, this parameter value automatically reverts to NO.

Note: Autotune Run can be performed only while the ACS 600 is running. The motor load must be connected to the motor. The best result is achieved when the motor is run up to 20 … 40 % of the rated speed before starting the Autotune Run.

CAUTION! The motor will be accelerated by 10 % of the rated speed with 10 … 20 % torque step without any ramp during this procedure. MAKE SURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE AUTOTUNE RUN!

Firmware Manual 6-45

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Group 24 Torque Ctrl This group is visible only if the Torque Control Macro is selected. It is invisible in the SCALAR control mode.

These parameter values can be altered with the ACS 600 running. The Range/Unit column in Table 6-15 below shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.

Table 6-15 Group 24.

24.01 TORQ RAMP UP Defines the time required for the reference to increase from zero to the rated torque.

24.02 TORQ RAMPDOWN

Defines the time required for the reference to decrease from the rated torque to zero.

Parameter Range/Unit Description

1 TORQ RAMP UP 0.00 s … 120.00 s Time for reference from 0 to the rated torque.

2 TORQ RAMP DOWN 0.00 s … 120.00 s Time for reference from the rated torque to 0.

6-46 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Group 25 CriticalSpeeds

These parameter values can be altered with the ACS 600 running. The Range/Unit column in Table 6-16 below shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.

In the SCALAR control mode the critical speed ranges are set as Hz.

Note: In the PID Control macro (see Parameter 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO), Critical Speeds are not in use.

Table 6-16 Group 25.

Note: Using the critical speed lockout function in a closed loop application will cause the system to oscillate if the required output speed is within the critical speed band.

Note: The value of the low speed cannot be higher than the high speed of the same band.

In some mechanical systems, certain speed ranges can cause resonance problems. With this Parameter Group, it is possible to set up to three different speed ranges that the ACS 600 will skip over. It is not required that Parameter 25.04 CRIT SPEED 2 LOW is higher than Parameter 25.03 CRIT SPEED 1 HIGH, as long as the LOW parameter of any one set is lower than the HIGH parameter of the same set. Sets may overlap, but the skip will be from the lower LOW value to the higher HIGH value.

To activate the Critical Speed settings, set Parameter 25.01 CRIT SPEED SELECT to ON.

Note: Set unused Critical Speeds to 0 rpm.

Parameter Range/Unit Description

1 CRIT SPEED SELECT OFF; ON Critical speed jump over logic.

2 CRIT SPEED 1 LOW 0 … 18000 rpm Critical speed 1 start.

3 CRIT SPEED 1 HIGH 0 … 18000 rpm Critical speed 1 end.

4 CRIT SPEED 2 LOW 0 … 18000 rpm Critical speed 2 start.

5 CRIT SPEED 2 HIGH 0 … 18000 rpm Critical speed 2 end.

6 CRIT SPEED 3 LOW 0 … 18000 rpm Critical speed 3 start.

7 CRIT SPEED 3 HIGH 0 … 18000 rpm Critical speed 3 end.

Firmware Manual 6-47

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Example: A fan system has bad vibration from 540 rpm to 690 rpm and from 1380 rpm to 1560 rpm. Set the parameters as follows:

2 CRIT SPEED 1 LOW 540 rpm

3 CRIT SPEED 1 HIGH 690 rpm

4 CRIT SPEED 2 LOW 1380 rpm

5 CRIT SPEED 2 HIGH 1560 rpm

If, due to bearing wear, another resonance occurs at 1020 … 1080 rpm, the critical speed table can be added to as follows:

6 CRIT SPEED 3 LOW 1020 rpm

7 CRIT SPEED 3 HIGH 1080 rpm

Figure 6-14 Example of critical speed settings in a fan system suffering vibration problems in the speed ranges 540 … 690 rpm and 1380 … 1560 rpm.

s1 Low s1 High s2 Low s2 High SPEEDref

540 690 1380 1560 [rpm]

540

690

1380

1560

[rpm]

SPEEDmotor

6-48 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Group 26 Motor Control These parameter values can only be altered with the ACS 600 stopped. The Range/Unit column in Table 6-17 below shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.

Table 6-17 Group 26.

26.01 FLUXOPTIMIZATION

The total energy consumption and noise can be reduced by changing the magnitude of the flux depending on the actual load. Flux optimization should be activated in drives that usually operate below nominal load.

Flux optimization cannot be selected in the scalar control mode (see Parameter 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE).

26.02 FLUX BRAKING The ACS 600 can provide faster deceleration by raising the level of magnetisation in the motor when needed, instead of limiting the deceleration ramp. By increasing the flux in the motor, the energy of the mechanical system is changed to thermal energy in the motor.

Parameter Range/Unit Description

1 FLUX OPTIMIZATION NO; YES Selection of the flux optimization function.

2 FLUX BRAKING NO; YES Selection of the flux braking function.

3 IR COMPENSATION 0 % … 30 % Compensation voltage level.

5 HEX FIELD WEAKEN NO; YES Activates the motor flux control based on a hexagonal flux pattern.

Firmware Manual 6-49

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Figure 6-15 Motor braking torque in percent of the rated torque as function of output frequency.

Flux braking cannot be selected in the scalar control mode (see Parameter 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE).

26.03 IRCOMPENSATION

This parameter is adjustable in the SCALAR control mode only.

This parameter sets the extra relative voltage level that is given to the motor at zero speed. The range is 0 … 30 % of motor nominal voltage. IR compensation increases the breakaway torque.

Figure 6-16 IR Compensation is implemented by applying extra voltage to the motor. UN is the nominal voltage of the motor.

120

80

40

05 10 20 30 40 50

1

2345

120

80

40

05 10 20 30 40 50

1

2

3

4

5

f (Hz)

Braking Torque (%)

f (Hz)

Flux Braking

No Flux Braking

1

2

3

4

5

2.2 kW

15 kW

37 kW

75 kW

250 kW

Rated Motor Power

UN

U (%)

f (Hz)Field weakening point

No compensation

IR Compensation

6-50 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

26.05 HEX FIELDWEAKEN

This parameter selects whether motor flux is controlled along a circular or a hexagonal pattern in the field weakening area of the frequency range.

NOACS 600 controls the motor flux insuch a way that the rotating flux vector follows a circular pattern. This is the default value and ideal for most applications. However, when operated in the field weakening range, it is not possible to reach 100% output voltage. The peak load capacity of the drive is lower than with the full voltage.

YESMotor flux is controlled along a circular pattern below the field weakening point (FWP, typically 50 or 60 Hz), and along a hexagonal pattern in the field weakening range. The applied pattern is changed gradually as the frequency increases from 100% to 120% of the FWP. Using the hexagonal flux pattern, the maximum output voltage can be reached; The peak load capacity is higher than with the circular flux pattern but the continuous load capacity is lower in the frequency range of FWP to 1.6 x FWP, due to increased losses.

Firmware Manual 6-51

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Group 30 FaultFunctions

These parameter values can be altered with the ACS 600 running. The Range/Unit column in Table 6-18 shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.

Table 6-18 Group 30.

Parameter Range/Unit Description

1 AI<MIN FUNCTION FAULT; NO; CONST SP 15; LAST SPEED

Operation in case of AI <Minimum fault.

2 PANEL LOSS FAULT; CONST SP 15; LAST SPEED

Operation in case the Control Panel selected as active control location for the ACS 600 stops communicating.

3 EXTERNAL FAULT NOT SEL; DI1-DI12 External fault input.

4 MOTOR THERM PROT FAULT; WARNING; NO Operation in case of overtemperature.

5 MOT THERM P MODE DTC; USER MODE; THERMISTOR Motor thermal protection mode selection.

6 MOTOR THERM TIME 256.0 … 9999.8 s Time for 63 % temperature rise.

7 MOTOR LOAD CURVE 50.0 … 150.0 % Motor current maximum limit.

8 ZERO SPEED LOAD 25.0 … 150.0 % Motor load curve point at zero speed.

9 BREAK POINT 1.0 … 300.0 Hz Break point of motor load curve.

10 STALL FUNCTION FAULT; WARNING; NO Operation in case of motor stall.

11 STALL FREQ HI 0.5 … 50 Hz Frequency limit for stall protection logic.

12 STALL TIME 10.00 … 400.00 s Time for stall protection logic.

13 UNDERLOAD FUNC NO; WARNING; FAULT Operation in case of underload fault.

14 UNDERLOAD TIME 0.0 … 600.0 s Time limit for underload logic.

15 UNDERLOAD CURVE 1 … 5 Torque limit for underload logic.

16 MOTOR PHASE LOSS

NO; FAULT Operation in case motor phase is lost.

17 EARTH FAULT WARNING; FAULT Operation in case of earth fault.

18 COMM FAULT FUNC FAULT; NO;CONST SP 15;LAST SPEED

Operation of the drive in case of the Main or Auxiliary Reference Data Set loss.

19 MAIN REF DS T-OUT 0.1 s … 60 s Time delay for the Main Data Set supervision function. See Parameter 30.18 COMM FAULT FUNC.

20 COMM FAULT RO/AO ZERO; LAST VALUE Operation of the relay output/analogue output in case of the Auxiliary Reference Data Set loss.

21 AUX DS T-OUT 0.1 … 60.0 s Time delay for the Auxiliary Data Set supervision function. See Parameter 30.18 COMM FAULT FUNC.

22 IO CONF FUNC NO; WARNING Operation in case of an improper use of the optional I/O.

6-52 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

30.01 AI<MIN FUNCTION This parameter allows the selection of operation in case the analogue input signal drops below the minimum limit, provided the minimum is set at 0.5 V / 1 mA or above (“living zero”).

CAUTION: If you select CONST SP 15 or LAST SPEED, make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case analogue input signal is lost.

FAULTFault indication is displayed and the motor coasts to stop.

NONo activity wanted.

CONST SP 15Warning indication is displayed and the speed is set according to Parameter 12.16 CONST SPEED 15.

LAST SPEEDWarning indication is displayed and the speed is set to the level the ACS 600 was last operating at. This value is determined by the average speed over the last 10 seconds.

30.02 PANEL LOSS Defines the operation of the ACS 600 if the Control Panel selected as the control location for the ACS 600 stops communicating.

CAUTION: If you select CONST SP 15 or LAST SPEED, make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case communication with the Control Panel fails.

FAULTFault indication is displayed (if there are any Control Panels communicating on the link) and the ACS 600 stops according to the setting of Parameter 21.03 STOP FUNCTION.

CONST SP 15Warning indication is displayed (if there are any Control Panels communicating on the link) and the speed is set according to Parameter 12.16 CONST SPEED 15.

LAST SPEEDWarning indication on display (if there are any Control Panels communicating on the link) and the speed is set to the level the ACS 600 was last operating at. This value is determined by the average speed over the last 10 seconds.

30.03 EXTERNAL FAULT NOT SEL

DI1-DI12This selection defines the digital input used for an external fault signal. If an external fault occurs, i.e. digital input drops to 0 VDC, the ACS 600

Firmware Manual 6-53

Chapter 6 – Parameters

is stopped and the motor coasts to stop. A fault message is displayed on the Control Panel.

For the connection of DI7 to DI12, see Group 98 Option Modules.

30.04 MOTOR THERMPROT

This parameter defines the operation of the motor thermal protection function which protects the motor from overheating.

FAULTDisplays a warning indication at the warning level. Displays a fault indication and stops the ACS 600 when the motor temperature reaches the 100 % level.

WARNINGWarning indication is displayed when the motor temperature reaches the warning level (95 % of the nominal value).

NONo activity wanted.

30.05 MOT THERM PMODE

Selects the thermal protection mode. The motor protection is made by means of the thermal model or thermistor measurement.

The ACS 600 calculates the temperature of the motor using the following assumptions:

• The motor is in ambient temperature (30 �C) when power is applied to the ACS 600.

• Motor heating is calculated assuming a load curve (Figure 6-19). The motor will heat above nominal temperature if it operates in the region above the curve, and cool if it operates below the curve. The rate of heating and cooling is set by MOTOR THERM TIME.

CAUTION: Motor thermal protection will not protect the motor if the cooling of the motor is reduced due to dust and dirt.

DTCThe DTC (Direct Torque Control) load curve is used for calculating heating of the motor. Motor thermal time is approximated for standard self-ventilated squirrel-cage motors as a function of the current of the motor and the number of pole pairs.

It is possible to scale the DTC load curve with Parameter 30.07 MOTOR LOAD CURVE if the motor is used in conditions other than described above. Parameters 30.06 MOTOR THERM TIME, 30.08 ZERO SPEED LOAD and 30.09 BREAK POINT cannot be set.

Note: Automatically calculated model (DTC) cannot be applied when 99.06 MOTOR NOM CURRENT > 800 A.

USER MODEIn this mode the user can define the operation of thermal protection by

6-54 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

setting Parameters 30.06 MOTOR THERM TIME, 30.08 ZERO SPEED LOAD and 30.09 BREAK POINT.

THERMISTORMotor thermal protection is activated with an I/O signal based on a motor thermistor.

This mode requires a motor thermistor or break contact of a thermistor relay connected between digital input DI6 and +24 V d.c. If direct thermistor connection is used, digital input DI6 supervises the overtemperature as follows:

When overtemperature is detected, the drive stops if the Parameter 30.04 MOTOR THERM PROT is set to FAULT.

WARNING! According to IEC 664, the connection of the thermistor to the digital input 6 of ACS 600 requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and the thermistor. Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creeping distance of 8 mm (400/500 VAC equipment). If the thermistor assembly does not fulfil the requirement, the other I/O terminals of ACS 600 must be protected against contact, or a thermistor relay must be used to isolate the thermistor from the digital input.

WARNING! In standard application macros, digital input 6 is selected as the source for constant speed selection, Start/Stop or Run Enable signal. Change these settings before selecting THERMISTOR for Parameter 30.05 MOT THERM P MODE. In other words, ensure that digital input 6 is not selected as signal source by any other parameter than 30.05 MOT THERM P MODE.

Thermistor resistance DI6 Status Temperature

0 … 1.5 kohm “1” Normal

4 kohm or higher “0” Overtemperature

Firmware Manual 6-55

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Figure 6-17 Thermistor connection. Alternative 2: At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor. If this is not possible, the shield is to be left unconnected.

30.06 MOTOR THERMTIME

This is the time within which the motor temperature reaches 63 % of the final temperature rise. Figure 6-18 shows Motor Thermal Time definition. If the DTC mode is selected for motor thermal protection, motor thermal time can be read from this parameter. This parameter can be set only if Parameter 30.05 MOT THERM P MODE is set to USER MODE.

If thermal protection according to UL requirements for NEMA class motors is desired, use this rule of thumb — Motor Thermal Time equals 35 times t6 (t6 in seconds is the time that the motor can safely operate at six times its rated current, given by the motor manufacturer). The thermal time for a Class 10 trip curve is 350 s, for a Class 20 trip curve 700 s and for a Class 30 trip curve 1050 s.

Figure 6-18 Motor Thermal Time.

MotorT 10 nFMotor

T

Thermistorrelay

6 18 DI6

7 19 +24 V d.c.

Alternative 1 Alternative 2

X22

: NIO

C b

oard

(AC

S 6

01/6

04/6

07)

X2:

Ter

min

al b

lock

(opt

iona

l for

AC

S 6

07)

6 18 DI6

7 19 +24 V d.c.

X22

: NIO

C b

oard

(AC

S 6

01/6

04/6

07)

X2:

Ter

min

al b

lock

(opt

iona

l for

AC

S 6

07)

MotorLoad

100 %

Temp.Rise

63 %

Motor Therm Time

t

t

6-56 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

30.07 MOTOR LOADCURVE

The Motor Load Curve sets the maximum allowable operating load of the motor. When set to 100 %, the maximum allowable load is equal to the value of Start-up Data Parameter 99.06 MOTOR NOM CURRENT. The load curve level should be adjusted if the ambient temperature differs from the nominal value.

Figure 6-19 Motor Load Curve.

30.08 ZERO SPEEDLOAD

This parameter defines the maximum allowable current at zero speed to define the Motor Load Curve.

30.09 BREAK POINT This parameter defines the point at which the motor load curve begins to decrease from the maximum value set by Parameter 30.07 MOTOR LOAD CURVE to the Parameter 30.08 ZERO SPEED LOAD. Refer to Figure 6-19 for an example of motor load curve.

30.10 STALL FUNCTION This parameter defines the operation of the stall protection. The protection is activated if the following conditions are valid at a time longer than the period set by Parameter 30.12 STALL TIME.

• The motor torque is close to the internal momentary changing limit of the motor control software that prevents the motor and the inverter from overheating or the motor from pulling out.

• The output frequency is below the level set by Parameter 30.11 STALL FREQ HI.

FAULTWhen the protection is activated the ACS 600 stops and a fault indication is displayed.

WARNINGA warning indication is displayed. The indication disappears in half of the time set by Parameter 30.12 STALL TIME.

NONo activity is wanted.

50

100

150

30.08 ZERO SPEED LOAD

30.07 MOTOR LOAD CURVE

30.09 BREAK POINT

99.06 MOTOR NOM CURRENT

Speed

( % )

Firmware Manual 6-57

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Figure 6-20 Stall protection. T is motor torque.

30.11 STALL FREQ HI This parameter sets the frequency value for the stall function.

30.12 STALL TIME This parameter sets the time value for the stall function.

30.13 UNDERLOADFUNC

Removal of motor load may indicate a process malfunction. The protection is activated if:

• The motor torque drops below the load curve selected by Parameter 30.15 UNDERLOAD CURVE.

• This condition has lasted longer than the time set by Parameter 30.14 UNDERLOAD TIME.

• Output frequency is higher than 10 % of the nominal frequency of the motor.

The protection function assumes that the drive is equipped with a motor of the rated power.

Select NO; WARNING; FAULT according to the activity you prefer. With selection FAULT the ACS 600 stops the motor and displays a fault message.

30.14 UNDERLOADTIME

Time limit for underload logic.

30.15 UNDERLOADCURVE

This parameter provides five selectable curves shown in Figure 6-21. If the load drops below the set curve for longer than the time set by Parameter 30.14 UNDERLOAD TIME, the underload protection is activated. Curves 1 … 3 reach maximum at the motor rated frequency set by Parameter 99.07 MOTOR NOM FREQUENCY.

T

Stall torque limit

Stall region

ƒStall Frequency(Parameter 30.11)

6-58 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Figure 6-21 Underload curve types. TM nominal torque of the motor, ƒN nominal frequency of the motor.

30.16 MOTOR PHASELOSS

This parameter defines the operation when one or more motor phases are lost.

FAULTFault indication is displayed and the ACS 600 stops.

NONo activity wanted.

30.17 EARTH FAULT This parameter defines the operation when an earth fault is detected in the motor or the motor cable.

FAULTFault indication is displayed and the ACS 600 stops.

WARNINGA warning indication is displayed. Ther drive continues to operate.

30.18 COMM FAULTFUNC

This parameter defines the operation on a fieldbus communication loss, i.e. when the drive fails to receive the Main Reference Data Set or the Auxiliary Reference Data Set. See Appendix C – Fieldbus Control.

The delay times for the supervision function are defined by Parameter 30.19 MAIN REF DS T-OUT for the Main Reference Data Set, and Parameter 30.21 AUX DS T-OUT for the Auxiliary Reference Data Set.

CAUTION: If you select CONST SP 15 or LAST SPEED, make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case communication with the communication module fails.

100

80

60

40

20

02.4 * ƒN

3

2

1 5

4

TM

70 %

50 %

30 %

ƒN

(%)

Firmware Manual 6-59

Chapter 6 – Parameters

FAULTA fault indication is given and the ACS 600 stops according to the setting of Parameter 21.03 STOP FUNCTION.

NONo activity wanted.

CONST SP 15A warning indication is given and the speed is set according to Parameter 12.16 CONST SPEED 15.

LAST SPEEDA warning indication is given and the speed is set to the level theACS 600 was last operating at. This value is determined by the average speed over the last 10 seconds.

30.19 MAIN REF DST-OUT

Time delay for the Main Reference Data Set supervision function. See Parameter 30.18 COMM FAULT FUNC.

Default value is 1 s.

0.1 … 60.0 s

30.20 COMM FAULTRO/AO

This parameter defines the operation of the fieldbus controlled relay output and analogue output in a communication loss. See Parameter Group 14 Relay Outputs, Group 15 Analogue Outputs and Appendix C – Fieldbus Control. Default value is ZERO.

The delay time for the supervision function is equal to value of Parameter 30.21 AUX DS T-OUT.

ZERORelay output is de-energised. Analogue output is set to zero.

LASTRelay output keeps the last state before the communication loss. Analogue output gives the last value before the communication loss.

WARNING After the communication recovers, the update of the relay and analogue outputs starts immediately without the fault message resetting.

30.21 AUX DS T-OUT Time delay for the Auxiliary Reference Data Set supervision function. See Parameter 30.18 COMM FAULT FUNC. The drive automatically activates the supervision function 60 seconds after power switch-on if the Auxiliary Reference Data Set is in use i.e. Parameter 90.01 AUX DS REF3, 90.02 AUX DS REF4 or 90.03 AUX DS REF5 has a value other than zero.

The application program also applies this delay time to the function defined with Parameter 30.20 COMM FAULT RO/AO.

Default value is 1 s.

0.1 … 60.0 s

6-60 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

30.22 IO CONF FUNC Operation in case of improper use of the inputs/outputs of the optional I/O extension modules in the ACS 600 application program.

NONo indication of improper use of the optional I/O.

WARNINGThis is the default value. The application program generates a warning “IO CONF” if an optional input or output channel has been selected as a signal interface, but the communication to the appropriate analogue or digital I/O extension module has not been set up accordingly in Group 98 Option Modules.

Example: The application program generates a warning if Parameter 16.01 RUN ENABLE is set to DI7 but:

• 98.03 DI/O EXT MODULE 1 is set to NO, or

• 98.09 NDIO1 DI FUNC is set to REPL DI1,2

Firmware Manual 6-61

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Group 31 AutomaticReset

These parameter values can be altered with the ACS 600 running. The Range/Unit column in Table 6-19 below shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.

Table 6-19 Group 31.

The Automatic fault reset system resets the faults selected with Parameters 31.04 OVERCURRENT, 31.05 OVERVOLTAGE, 31.06 UNDERVOLTAGE and 31.07 AI SIGNAL<MIN.

31.01 NUMBER OFTRIALS

Sets the number of allowed autoresets within a certain time. The time is defined with Parameter 31.02 TRIAL TIME. The ACS 600 prevents additional autoresets and remains stopped until a successful reset is performed from the Control Panel or through a digital input.

31.02 TRIAL TIME The time within which a limited number of fault autoresets is allowed. The allowed number of faults per this time period is given with Parameter 31.01 NUMBER OF TRIALS.

31.03 DELAY TIME This parameter sets the time that the ACS 600 will wait after a fault occurs before attempting to reset. If set to zero, the ACS 600 will reset immediately. If set to a value higher than zero, the drive will wait before resetting.

31.04 OVERCURRENT If YES is selected, the fault (motor overcurrent) is reset automatically after the delay set by Parameter 31.03 DELAY TIME and the ACS 600 resumes normal operation.

31.05 OVERVOLTAGE If YES is selected, the fault (DC bus overvoltage) is reset automatically after the delay set by Parameter 31.03 DELAY TIME and the ACS 600 resumes normal operation.

Parameter Range/Unit Description

1 NUMBER OF TRIALS 0 … 5 Number of faults limit for Autoreset logic.

2 TRIAL TIME 1.0 … 180.0 s Time limit for Autoreset logic.

3 DELAY TIME 0.0 … 3.0 s Time delay between the fault and the reset attempt.

4 OVERCURRENT NO; YES Enable automatic fault reset.

5 OVERVOLTAGE NO; YES Enable automatic fault reset.

6 UNDERVOLTAGE NO; YES Enable automatic fault reset.

7 AI SIGNAL<MIN NO; YES Enable automatic fault reset.

6-62 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

31.06 UNDERVOLTAGE If YES is selected, the fault (DC bus undervoltage) is reset automatically after the delay set by Parameter 31.03 DELAY TIME and the ACS 600 resumes normal operation.

31.07 AI SIGNAL<MIN If YES is selected, the fault (analogue input signal under minimum level) is reset automatically after the delay set by Parameter 31.03 DELAY TIME.

WARNING! If Parameter 31.07 AI SIGNAL<MIN is enabled, the drive may restart even after a long stop when the analogue input signal is restored. Ensure that the use of this feature will not cause physical injury and/or damage equipment.

Firmware Manual 6-63

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Group 32 Supervision These parameter values can be altered with the ACS 600 running. The Range/Unit column in Table 6-20 below shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.

Table 6-20 Group 32.

*) These parameters are significant only if the PID Control Macro is selected.

32.01 SPEED1FUNCTION

This parameter allows you to activate a speed supervision function. Relay outputs selected with Parameters 14.01 RELAY RO1 OUTPUT, 14.02 RELAY RO2 OUTPUT and 14.03 RELAY RO3 OUTPUT are used to indicate if the speed drops below (LOW LIMIT) or exceeds (HIGH LIMIT) the supervision limit.

Parameter Range/Unit Description

1 SPEED1 FUNCTION

NO; LOW LIMIT; HIGH LIMIT; ABS LOW LIMIT

Speed 1 supervision.

2 SPEED1 LIMIT — 18000 … 18000 rpm Speed 1 supervision limit.

3 SPEED2 FUNCTION

NO; LOW LIMIT; HIGH LIMIT; ABS LOW LIMIT

Speed 2 supervision.

4 SPEED2 LIMIT — 18000 … 18000 rpm Speed 2 supervision limit.

5 CURRENT FUNCTION

NO; LOW LIMIT; HIGH LIMIT

Motor current supervision.

6 CURRENT LIMIT 0 … 1000 A Motor current supervision limit.

7 TORQUE 1 FUNCTION

NO; LOW LIMIT; HIGH LIMIT

Motor torque supervision.

8 TORQUE 1 LIMIT -400 %… 400 % Motor torque supervision limit.

9 TORQUE 2 FUNCTION

NO; LOW LIMIT; HIGH LIMIT

Motor torque supervision.

10 TORQUE 2 LIMIT -400 %… 400 % Motor torque supervision limit.

11 REF1 FUNCTION NO; LOW LIMIT; HIGH LIMIT

Reference 1 supervision.

12 REF1 LIMIT 0 … 18000 rpm Reference 1 supervision limit.

13 REF2 FUNCTION NO; LOW LIMIT; HIGH LIMIT

Reference 2 supervision.

14 REF2 LIMIT 0 … 500 % Reference 2 supervision limit.

15 ACT1 FUNCTION*)

NO; LOW LIMIT; HIGH LIMIT

Actual 1 supervision.

16 ACT1 LIMIT*) 0 … 200 % Actual 1 supervision limit.

17 ACT2 FUNCTION*)

NO; LOW LIMIT; HIGH LIMIT

Actual 2 supervision.

18 ACT2 LIMIT*) 0 … 200 % Actual 2 supervision limit.

6-64 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

NOSupervision not used.

LOW LIMITSupervision will be activated if value is below the limit set.

HIGH LIMITSupervision will be activated if value is above the limit set.

ABS LOW LIMITSupervision will be activated if value is below the set limit. Limit is supervised in both rotating directions, forward and reverse (see the shaded area on the left).

32.02 SPEED1 LIMIT Speed supervision limit adjustable from -18000 rpm to 18000 rpm.

32.03 SPEED2FUNCTION

Refer to Parameter 32.01 SPEED1 FUNCTION.

32.04 SPEED2 LIMIT Speed supervision limit adjustable from -18000 rpm to 18000 rpm.

32.05 CURRENTFUNCTION

Motor current supervision. Same options as with Parameter 32.01 SPEED1 FUNCTION excluding ABS LOW LIMIT.

32.06 CURRENT LIMIT Motor current supervision limit. Setting in actual amperes, adjustable between 0 A … 1000 A.

32.07 TORQUE1FUNCTION

Motor torque supervision. Same options as with Parameter 32.01 SPEED1 FUNCTION excluding ABS LOW LIMIT.

32.08 TORQUE1 LIMIT Motor torque supervision limit. Setting in -400 % … 400 % of the nominal torque of the motor.

32.09 TORQUE2FUNCTION

Motor torque supervision. Same options as with Parameter 32.01 SPEED1 FUNCTION excluding ABS LOW LIMIT.

32.10 TORQUE2 LIMIT Motor torque supervision limit. Setting in -400 % … 400 % of nominal torque of the motor.

32.11 REF1 FUNCTION Reference 1 supervision. Same options as with Parameter 32.01 SPEED1 FUNCTION excluding ABS LOW LIMIT.

32.12 REF1 LIMIT Reference 1 supervision limit adjustable from 0 to 18000 rpm.

32.13 REF2 FUNCTION Reference 2 supervision. Same options as with Parameter 32.01 SPEED1 FUNCTION excluding ABS LOW LIMIT.

32.14 REF2 LIMIT Reference 2 supervision limit adjustable from 0 to 200 %.

32.15 ACT1 FUNCTION Actual value 1 supervision. Same options as with Parameter 32.01 SPEED1 FUNCTION, except that relay output RO3 cannot be used and excluding ABS LOW LIMIT.

32.16 ACT1 LIMIT Actual value 1 supervision limit adjustable from 0 to 200 %.

ABS LOW LIMIT

-ABS LOW LIMIT

speed/rpm

0

Firmware Manual 6-65

Chapter 6 – Parameters

32.17 ACT2 FUNCTION Actual value 2 supervision. Same options as with Parameter 32.01 SPEED1 FUNCTION, except that relay output RO3 cannot be used and excluding ABS LOW LIMIT.

32.18 ACT2 LIMIT Actual value 2 supervision limit adjustable from 0 to 200 %.

Group 33 Information These parameter values cannot be altered. The Range/Unit column in Table 6-21 below shows the parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.

Table 6-21 Group 33.

33.01 SOFTWAREVERSION

This parameter displays the type, and the version of the firmware package loaded into the ACS 600.

33.02 APPL SWVERSION

This parameter displays the type, and the version of the application program of your ACS 600.

33.03 TEST DATE This parameter displays the test date of your ACS 600.

Parameter Range/Unit Description

1 SOFTWARE VERSION

xxxxxxxx Version of the software package.

2 APPL SW VERSION xxxxxxxx Version of the application software.

3 TEST DATE DDMMYY Test date (Day, Month, Year).

ASxxxxyxProduct Family

A = ACS 600Product

S = ACS 600 StandardFirmware Version

5xyx = Version 5.xyx

ASAxxxyxProduct Family

A = ACS 600Product

S = ACS 600 StandardFirmware Type

A = Application ProgramFirmware Version

5xyx = Version 5.xyx

6-66 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Group 34 ProcessVariable

These parameter values can be altered with the ACS 600 running. The Range/Unit column in Table 6-22 below shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.

Table 6-22 Group 34.

Function Description:Process Variable

DefinitionThe block diagram below illustrates the use of the parameters that define actual signal 1.01 PROCESS VARIABLE

34.01 SCALE This parameter scales the selected ACS 600 variable into a desired process variable. Default value is 100.00. See section Function Description: Process Variable Definition above.

34.02 P VAR UNIT This parameter selects the unit for the process variable. See section Function Description: Process Variable Definition above.

NONo unit is selected.

Parameter Range/Unit Description

1 SCALE 0.00 … 100000.00 Scaling factor for the process variable

2 P VAR UNIT NO; rpm; … ; FPM Unit of the process variable

3 SELECT P VAR 0 to 9999 Selects the ACS 600 variable to be scaled into a process variable

4 MOTOR SP FILT TIM 0 to 20000 ms Filter time for actual speed

5 TORQ ACT FILT TIM 0. to 20000 ms Filter time for actual torque

6 RESET RUN TIME NO; YES Reset for the counter 1.43 MOTOR RUN TIME

1.01 PROCESS VARIABLE34.01 SCALE

NO

FPMUnit for value 1.01 PROCESS VARIABLE

34.03

Select

34.02

Select

PARAMETER

00.00

99.99

TABLE

• • •

Mul.

Firmware Manual 6-67

Chapter 6 – Parameters

rpm; %;m/s; A; V; Hz; s; h; kh; C; lft (labels per foot); mA; mV; kW; W; kWh; F; hp; MWh; m3h (m3/h); l/s (dm3/s); bar; kPa; GPM (gallons per minute); PSI (pounds per square inch); CFM (cubic feet per minute); ft; MGD (millions of gallons per day); iHg (inches of mercury); FPM (feet per minute)

Possible choices for the unit. The default value is %.

34.03 SELECT P VAR This parameter selects the ACS 600 variable that is scaled into a desired process variable. Default value is 142 (i.e. Actual Signal 1.42 PROCESS SPEED REL). See section Function Description: Process Variable Definition above.

34.04 MOTOR SP FILTERTIM

Sets a filter time for actual speed signal. Has an effect on:

• 1.02 SPEED

• speed read through an analogue output

• 32.01 SPEED1 FUNCTION and 32.03 SPEED2 FUNCTION

0 to 20000 msDefault value is 500 ms

34.05 TORQ ACT FILTTIM

Sets a filter time for actual torque signal. Has an effect on:

• 1.05 TORQUE

• torque read through an analogue output

• 32.07 TORQUE1 FUNCTION and 32.09 TORQUE2 FUNCTION

0 to 20000 msDefault value is 100 ms

34.06 RESET RUN TIME Selecting YES resets the counter 1.43 MOTOR RUN TIME.

NO; YES

6-68 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Group 35 Mot TempMeas

The parameters of the motor temperature measurement function are included in this group.

The table below lists the parameters. The detailed parameter descriptions are given after two application examples.

Table 6-23 Group 35.

Parameter Range/Unit Description

1 MOT1 TEMP AI1 SEL NOT IN USE; 1XPT100; 2XPT100, 3XPT100, 1..3 PTC

Motor 1 temperature sensor type.

2 MOT 1 TEMP ALM L -10 to 5000 °C / ohm Alarm limit for motor 1 temperature measurement.

3 MOT 1 TEMP FLT L -10 to 5000 °C / ohm Fault limit for motor 1 temperature measurement.

4 MOT2 TEMP AI2 SEL NOT IN USE; 1XPT100; 2XPT100, 3XPT100, 1..3 PTC

Motor 2 temperature sensor type.

5 MOT 2 TEMP ALM L -10 to 5000 °C / ohm Alarm limit for motor 2 temperature measurement.

6 MOT 2 TEMP FLT L -10 to 5000 °C / ohm Fault limit for motor 2 temperature measurement.

7 MOT MOD COMPENSAT

NO; YES Motor model temperature compensation by measured value.

Firmware Manual 6-69

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Application Example:Temperature

Measurement through theNIOC Board

The figure below shows the temperature measurement of one motor using the Standard I/O Board, NIOC.

WARNING! According to IEC 664, the connection of the motor temperature sensor to the Standard IO Board, NIOC, requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and the sensor. Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creeping distance of 8 mm (400/500 VAC equipment). If the assembly does not fulfil the requirement:

• The NIOC terminals must be protected against contact and they may not be connected to other equipment.

Or

• The temperature sensor must be isolated from the NIOC board terminals.

Motor

T

10 nF

3 AI1+

4 AI1-

9 AO1+

10 AO1-

Motor

T

3 AI1+

4 AI1-

9 AO1+

10 AO1-

TT

One sensor

Three sensors

Parameter Settings

15.01 ANALOGUE OUTPUT1 (O) M1 TEMP MEAS

35.01 MOT1 TEMP AI1 SEL To be set according to the type and number of sensors

35.02 MOT 1 TEMP ALM L Alarm limit for motor 1

35.03 MOT 1 TEMP FLT L Fault limit for motor 1

98.12 AI/O MOTOR TEMP NO

Note: Parameters 13.01 MINIMUM AI1 to 13.05 INVERT AI1 and 15.02 INVERT AO1 to 15.05 SCALE AO1 are not effective.

Actual values

1.35 MOTOR 1 TEMP, 3.08 ALARM WORD 1, 3.12 FAULT WORD 3, 3.16 ALARM WORD 3

Warnings (See Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing and Group 3 Actual Signals)

MOTOR 1 TEMP, MOTOR 2 TEMP, T MEAS ALM

Faults (See Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing and Group 3 Actual Signals)

MOTOR 1 TEMP, MOTOR 2 TEMP

Other

At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor. If this is not possible, the shield is to be left unconnected.

NIOC board

NIOC board

10 nF

6-70 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Application Example:Temperature

Measurement through theNAIO Module

The figure below shows the temperature measurement of one motor through an optional Analogue I/O Extension Module, NAIO.

WARNING! According to IEC 664, the connection of the motor temperature sensor to NAIO module requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and sensor. Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creeping distance of 8 mm (400/500 VAC equipment). If the assembly does not fulfil the requirement:

• The NAIO terminals must be protected against contact and they may not be connected to other equipment. The NAIO module power supply output must also have isolation level of 2.5 kV (note that the NIOC board does not fulfil this requirement).

Or

• The temperature sensor must be isolated from the NAIO module terminals.

Motor

T

Motor

TTT

One sensor

Three sensors

Parameter Settings

35.01 MOT1 TEMP AI1 SEL To be set according to the type and number of sensors

35.02 MOT 1 TEMP ALM L Alarm limit for motor 1

35.03 MOT 1 TEMP FLT L Fault limit for motor 1

98.12 AI/O MOTOR TEMP UNIPOLAR

Actual values

1.35 MOTOR 1 TEMP, 3.08 ALARM WORD 1, 3.12 FAULT WORD 3, 3.16 ALARM WORD 3

Warnings (See Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing and Group 3 Actual Signals)

MOTOR 1 TEMP, MOTOR 2 TEMP, T MEAS ALM

Faults (See Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing and Group 3 Actual Signals)

MOTOR 1 TEMP, MOTOR 2 TEMP

Other

At the motor end, the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor. If this is not possible, the shield is to be left unconnected.

The NAIO module must also be connected to a power supply. See the module manual.

AI1+

AI1-

AO1+

AO1-

NAIO module

AI1+

AI1-

AO1+

AO1-

NAIO module

10 nF

10 nF

Firmware Manual 6-71

Chapter 6 – Parameters

35.01 MOT1 TEMP AI1SEL

The Parameter activates the motor 1 temperature measurement function, and selects the sensor type. See the following subsections above:

• Application Example: Temperature Measurement through the NIOC Board

• Application Example: Temperature Measurement through the NAIO Module

NOT IN USEMotor 1 temperature is not measured. This is the default setting.

1xPT100; 2xPT100; 3xPT100Motor 1 temperature is measured using one to three Pt 100 sensors.

The analogue output AO1 feeds a constant current through the sensor. The resistance of the sensor increases linearly as the motor temperature rises, as does the voltage over the sensor. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through an analogue input AI1 and converts it into degrees centigrade.

1..3 PTCMotor 1 temperature is supervised by one to three PTC sensors.

The analogue output AO1 feeds a constant current through the sensor(s). The resistance of the sensor increases sharply as the motor temperature rises over the PTC reference temperature (Tref), as does the voltage over the resistor. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through the analogue input AI1 and converts it into ohms.

The figure below shows typical PTC sensor resistance values as a function of the motor operating temperature.

35.02 MOT 1 TEMPALM L

Sets the alarm limit for the motor 1 temperature measurement. The alarm indication is given when the limit is exceeded.

-10 to 5000 °CAlarm limit if Parameter 35.01 MOT1 TEMP AI1 SEL is 1xPT100; 2xPT100; 3xPT100. Default value is 110 °C.

100

550

1330

4000

Ohm

T

Temperature ResistanceNormal 0 to 1.5 k ohmOvertemperature > 4 kohm

6-72 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

-10 to 5000 ohmAlarm limit if Parameter 35.01 MOT1 TEMP AI1 SEL is 1..3 PTC. Default value is 110 ohm.

35.03 MOT 1 TEMP FLT L Sets the fault trip limit for the motor 1 temperature measurement. The fault indication is given when the limit is exceeded.

-10 to 5000 °CFault trip limit if Parameter 35.01 MOT1 TEMP AI1 SEL is 1xPT100; 2xPT100; 3xPT100. Default value is 130 °C.

-10 to 5000 ohmFault trip limit if Parameter 35.01 MOT1 TEMP AI1 SEL is 1..3 PTC. Default value is 130 ohm.

35.04 MOT2 TEMPAI2 SEL

The parameter activates the motor 2 temperature measurement function, and selects the sensor type. See the subsection Application Example: Temperature Measurement through the NAIO Module above.

Note: Two motors can be protected only by using an optional Analogue Extension Module, NAIO. If Parameter 98.12 AI/O MOTOR TEMP is set, the NAIO module is taken into use, and it is also used in the motor 1 temperature measurement (the Standard I/O Board, NIOC, is not in use).

NOT IN USEMotor 2 temperature is not measured. This is the default setting.

1xPT100; 2xPT100; 3xPT100Motor 2 temperature is measured using one to three Pt 100 sensors. See 35.01 MOT1 TEMP AI1 SEL

1..3 PTCMotor 2 temperature is supervised by one to three PTC sensors. See 35.01 MOT1 TEMP AI1 SEL

35.05 MOT 2 TEMPALM L

Sets the alarm limit for the motor 2 temperature measurement function. The alarm indication is given when the limit is exceeded.

-10 to 5000 °CAlarm limit if Parameter 35.04 MOT2 TEMP AI2 SEL is 1xPT100; 2xPT100; 3xPT100. Default value is 110 °C.

-10 to 5000 ohmAlarm limit if Parameter 35.04 MOT2 TEMP AI2 SEL is 1..3 PTC. Default value is 110 ohm.

35.06 MOT 2 TEMP FLT L Sets the fault trip limit for the motor 2 temperature measurement function. The fault indication is given when the limit is exceeded.

-10 to 5000 °CFault limit if Parameter 35.04 MOT2 TEMP AI2 SEL is 1xPT100; 2xPT100; 3xPT100. Default value is 110 °C.

Firmware Manual 6-73

Chapter 6 – Parameters

-10 to 5000 ohmFault limit if Parameter 35.04 MOT2 TEMP AI2 SEL is 1..3 PTC. Default value is 110 ohm.

35.07 MOT MODCOMPENSATION

Parameter selects whether the measured motor 1 temperature is used in the motor model compensation.

NOMeasured motor 1 temperature is not used.

YESMeasured motor 1 temperature is used in motor model compensation. Note: Selection is possible only when Pt 100 sensor(s) is used.

6-74 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Group 40 PID Control The parameter group includes parameters for three functions:

• process PID control (in use only when Parameter 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO is PID CTRL).

• speed or torque reference trimming (in use only when Parameter 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO is not PID CTRL).

• sleep function for the process PID control (in use only when Parameter 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO is PID CTRL).

Table 6-24 below shows the parameters.The functions are described on the following pages. The text following the function descriptions explains the parameters in detail. The parameter values can be altered with the ACS 600 running.

Table 6-24 Group 40.

Parameter Range/Unit Description

1 PID GAIN 0.1 … 100 PID Controller Gain selection.

2 PID INTEG TIME 0.02 … 320.00 s PID Controller I-time selection.

3 PID DERIV TIME 0.00 … 10.00 s PID Controller D-time selection.

4 PID DERIV FILTER 0.04 … 10.00 s Time constant for the filter of the D-term.

5 ERROR VALUE INV NO; YES PID Controller error value inversion.

6 ACTUAL VALUE SEL

ACT1; ACT1 — ACT2; ACT1 + ACT2;ACT1 * ACT2; ACT1/ACT2; MIN(A1,A2); MAX(A1,A2); sqrt(A1 — A2); sqA1 + sqA2

PID Controller actual signal selection.

7 ACTUAL1 INPUT SEL AI1; AI2; AI3; AI5; AI6; CURRENT; TORQUE; POWER

Actual 1 signal input selection.

8 ACTUAL2 INPUT SEL AI1; AI2; AI3; AI5; AI6; CURRENT; TORQUE; POWER

Actual 2 signal input selection.

9 ACT1 MINIMUM -1000 … 1000 % Minimum scaling factor of the Actual 1.

10 ACT1 MAXIMUM -1000 … 1000 % Maximum scaling factor of the Actual 1.

11 ACT2 MINIMUM -1000 … 1000 % Minimum scaling factor of the Actual 2.

Firmware Manual 6-75

Chapter 6 – Parameters

1) Not visible with 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO = PID CTRL, 2) Visible only when 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO = T CTRL, 3) Visible only when 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO = PID CTRL.

12 ACT2 MAXIMUM -1000 … 1000 % Maximum scaling factor of the Actual 2

13 PID INTEGRATION ON; OFF On/Off switch for the PID control block integrator

14 TRIM MODE1) OFF; PROPORTIONAL; DIRECT

Enables/disbles trim function and selects between direct and proportional trimming

15 TRIM REF SEL1) AI1; AI2; AI3; AI5; AI6; PAR 40.16

Selects the signal source for the trim reference

16 TRIM REFERENCE1) -100.0% to 100.0% Fixed trim reference value (for 40.15 TRIM REF SEL)

17 TRIM RANGE ADJUST1)

-100.0% to 100.0% Multiplier for the PID control block output. Used in the trim function

18 TRIM SELECTION1,2)

SPEED TRIM; TORQUE TRIM

Selects between speed and torque reference trimming

19 ACTUAL FILT TIME 0.04 s to 10.00s Filter time for the actual signals connected to the PID control block

20 SLEEP SELECTION3)

OFF; INTERNAL; DI1; DI2; DI3; DI4; DI5; DI6; DI7; DI8; DI9; DI10; DI11; DI12

Sleep function conrol

21 SLEEP LEVEL3) 0.0 to 7200.0 rpm Sleep activation speed

22 SLEEP DELAY3) 0.0 s to 3600.0 s Sleep activation delay

23 WAKE UP LEVEL3) 0.0 % to 100.0 % Sleep deactivation level (actual value in the process PID ctrl)

24 WAKE UP DELAY3) 0.0 s to 3600.0 s Sleep deactivation delay

Parameter Range/Unit Description

6-76 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Function Description:Process PID Control

The process PID control adjusts the drive speed in order to keep the measured prosess quantity (actual value) at the desired level (reference).

The block diagram below on the right illustrates the process PID control. The minimum and maximum values of the PID controller output are the same as Parameter 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED and 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED (or 20.07 MINIMUM FREQ and 20.08 MAXIMUM FREQ).

The figure on the left shows an application example: The process PID controller adjusts the speed of a pressure boost pump according to the measured pressure and the set pressure reference.

� � � � � � � � � � � � �

� � � � �

� �

� � �

� � � � � � � �

� � � � � � �

� � � � � � � �

� � � � � � � �

�

�

PIDrefktitdidFiltTerrVInvrIntoh1ol1

Actual Values40.05

40.12AI1AI2AI3AI5AI6

IMOT40.19

Filter

%ref40.0140.0240.03

40.0440.0540.13

PIDmaxPIDmin

Switch

Speed reference

Frequencyreference

99.04 = 0(DTC)

Example: Pressure boost pump

.

..

PID Control Block Diagram

Firmware Manual 6-77

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Function Description:Reference Trimming

In trimming, the drive external %-reference (External reference 2) is corrected. The block diagram below illustrates the function.

40.14

Select

%ref

1

Mul.

Mul.

Add

%refThe drive reference before trimming

%ref’The drive reference after trimming

max. speed= 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED (or 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED if the absolute value is greater)

max freq= 20.08 MAXIMUM FREQ (or 20.07 MINIMUM FREQ if the absolute value is greater)

max. torq= 20.04 MAXIMUM TORQUE (or 20.10 SET MIN TORQUE if the absolute value is greater)

%ref%ref’

DIRECT (3)

PROPOR. (2)

OFF (1)

max.speed

Switchmax.freq

99.04 (DTC)

40.17PID

trefktitdidFiltTerrVInvrIntoh1ol1

Actual Values40.05

40.07AI1AI2AI3AI5AI6

IMOT40.19

Filter

40.15

SelectAI1AI2

…40.16

40.0140.0240.03

40.0440.0540.13

PIDmaxPIDmin

.

.

.

40.18

Select

max.torque

6-78 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Example: A speed controlled conveyor line where the line tension also needs to be considered: The drive is speed controlled. In addition, the line tension is monitored. If the measured tension increases too much (above the tension setpoint) the speed is slightly decreased, and vice versa. To accomplish the desired speed correction, the user:

• activates the trimming function and connects the tension setpoint and the measured tension to the trimming function

• tunes the trimming to a suitable level

Drive rollers (pull)Tension measurement

Speed controlled conveyor line

PID

Add

Tension measurement

Speed reference

Tension setpoint

Trimmed speed reference

Speed reference trimming

Firmware Manual 6-79

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Function Description:Sleeping

The block diagram below illustrates the sleep function enable/disable logic. The sleep function can be put into use only when Parameter 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO is PID CTRL.

The time sceme below visualises the operation of the sleep function.

1) “1” = Switch to sleep mode

40.20

SelectCompare

1<2

Or

<1

40.22

Delay

t

1

240.21

Mot.speed0

DI1

And

&%refActivePIDCtrlActive

modulating

Set/Reset

S

R

S/R

Compare

1<21

240.23

0

INTERNALDI1

40.24

Delay

t

Or

<1

StartRq

03.02 (B1)

03.02 (B2)

1)

01.34

INTERNAL

…

40.20

Select

…

Mot.speed: Actual speed of the motor

%refActive: The % reference is in use (instead of the rpm (speed) reference)

PIDCtrlActive: 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO is PID CTRL

modulating: The inverter IGBT control is operating

Actual Value

Wake-up levelParameter 42.23

Motor Speed

Sleep levelPar. 40.21

Time

TimeSTARTSTOP

t<td td

td = Sleep delay, Parameter 40.22

Control PanelSLEEP MODE

Application example: Sleep function and a PID controlled pressure boost pump (see also the subsection Function Description: Process PID Control above)

The water consumption falls at night. As a concequence, the PID process controller decreases the motor speed. However, due to natural losses in the pipes and the low efficiency of the centrifugal pump at low speed, the motor does not stop but keeps rotating. The sleep function detects the slow rotating, and stops the unnecessary pumping after the sleep delay has passed. The drive shifts into sleep mode, still moni-toring the pressure: The pumping restarts when the pressure falls under the allowed minimum level and the wake-up delay has passed.

twd

twd = Wake-up delay, Parameter 40.24

6-80 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

40.01 PID GAIN This parameter defines the gain of the PID Controller. The setting range is 0.1 … 100. If you select 1, a 10 % change in error value causes the PID Controller output to change by 10 %. If the 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED is set to 1500 rpm, the actual speed reference is changed by 150 rpm.

Table 6-25 below lists a few examples of gain settings, and the resulting speed change to a 10 % change in error value and a 50 % change in error value.

Table 6-25 Gain Settings (MAXIMUM SPEED is 1500 rpm).

40.02 PID INTEG TIME Defines the time in which the maximum output is achieved if a constant error value exists and the gain is 1. Integration time 1 s denotes that a 100 % change is achieved in 1 s.

Figure 6-22 PID Controller Gain, I-Time, and Error Value.

PID GainSpeed Change for a

10 % Change in Error

Speed Change for a 50 % Change in Error

0.5 75 rpm 375 rpm

1.0 150 rpm 750 rpm

3.0 450 rpm 1500 rpm (limited by parameter 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED)

Process Error Value

PID Controller OutputGain

Gain

PID Integration Timet

Firmware Manual 6-81

Chapter 6 – Parameters

40.03 PID DERIV TIME Derivative is calculated according to two consecutive error values (EK-1 and EK) according to the following formula:

PID DERIV TIME · (EK — EK-1)/TS, in which TS = 12 ms sample time.

For example, if there is a 10 % step in error value, the output of the PID Controller is increased by:

PID DERIV TIME · 10 % / TS.

The derivative is filtered with a 1-pole filter. The time constant of the filter is defined by Parameter 40.04 PID DERIV FILTER.

40.04 PID DERIV FILTER Time constant of the 1-pole filter.

40.05 ERROR VALUEINV

This parameter allows you to invert the Error Value (and thus the operation of the PID Controller). Normally, a decrease in Actual Signal (feedback) causes an increase in drive speed. If a decrease in Actual is desired to cause a decrease in speed, set Error Value Invert to YES.

40.06 ACTUAL VALUESEL

ACT1; ACT1 — ACT2; ACT1 + ACT2; ACT1 * ACT2; ACT1/ACT2; MIN(A1,A2) ; MAX(A1,A2); sqrt(A1-A2); sqA1 + sqA2

Actual signal source for the PID Process Controller is selected by this parameter. The choice ACT1 sets one of the analogue inputs AI1, AI2 or AI3 as actual signal for the PID Controller. The setting of Parameter 40.07 ACTUAL 1 INPUT SEL determines the analogue inputs used. The setting of Parameter 40.08 ACTUAL 2 INPUT SEL determines the value of ACT2 which is used in selecting the Actual Value for the PID Controller together with ACT1. ACT1 and ACT2 are combined by subtraction, addition, multiplication or other functions as listed above.

In the list of parameter value choices A1 denotes ACT1 and A2 denotes ACT2. MIN(A1,A2) sets the parameter value to either ACT1 or ACT2, depending which one has the smallest value. sqrt(A1 — A2) sets the parameter value to square root of (ACT1 — ACT2). sqA1+sqA2 sets the parameter value to square root of ACT1 plus square root of ACT2.

Use the sqrt(A1 — A2) or sqA1+sqA2 function if the PID Controller controls flow with a pressure transducer measuring the pressure difference over a flow meter.

40.07 ACTUAL 1 INPUTSEL

This parameter selects one of the analogue inputs as actual signal 1 e.g. ACT1 used in Parameter 40.06 ACTUAL VALUE SEL.

AI1; AI2; AI3; AI5; AI6; CURRENT; TORQUE; POWERFor connection of AI5 to AI6, see Group 98 Option Modules.

40.08 ACTUAL 2 INPUTSEL

This parameter selects one of the analogue inputs as actual signal 2 e.g. ACT2 used in Parameter 40.06 ACTUAL VALUE SEL.

AI1; AI2; AI3; AI5; AI6; CURRENT; TORQUE; POWERFor connection of AI5 to AI6, see Group 98 Option Modules.

40.09 ACT1 MINIMUM Minimum value for Actual Value 1. Defined as % of the difference between the maximum and minimum values of the selected analogue input. The setting range is -1000 to +1000 %. Refer to Parameter

6-82 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Group 13 Analogue Inputs for analogue input minimum and maximum settings.

The value of this parameter can be calculated using the formula below. The minimum of the actual value refers to the minimum of the span of the actual value.

For example: The pressure of a pipe system is to be controlled between 0 and 10 bar. The pressure transducer has an output span from 4 to 8 V for pressure between 0 and 10 bar. The minimum output voltage of the transducer is 2 V and the maximum 10 V, so the minimum and the maximum of the analogue input is set to 2 V and 10 V. ACTUAL 1 MINIMUM is calculated as follows:

40.10 ACT1 MAXIMUM Maximum value for the Actual Value 1. Defined as % of the difference between the maximum and minimum values of the selected analogue input. The setting range is -1000 to +1000 %. Refer to Parameter Group 13 Analogue Inputs for analogue input minimum and maximum settings.

The value of this parameter can be calculated using the formula below. The maximum of the actual value refers to the maximum of the span of the actual value

Refer to the description of the example at Parameter 40.09 ACT1 MINIMUM.

ACTUAL 1 MAXIMUM in this case is:

Figure 6-23 below shows three examples of actual value scaling.

ACTUAL 1Minimum of actual value (V or mA) — MINIMUM AI (1, 2 or 3)

MAXIMUM AI (1, 2 or 3) — MINIMUM AI (1, 2 or 3) MINIMUM = · 100 %

ACTUAL 1 4 V — 2 V

10 V — 2 VMINIMUM = · 100 % = 25 %

ACTUAL 1Maximum of actual value (V or mA) — MINIMUM AI (1, 2 or 3)

MAXIMUM AI (1, 2 or 3) — MINIMUM AI (1, 2 or 3) MAXIMUM =· 100 %

ACTUAL 1 8 V — 2 V

10 V — 2 VMAXIMUM = · 100 % = 75 %

Firmware Manual 6-83

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Figure 6-23 Actual Value Scaling.

40.11 ACT2 MINIMUM Refer to Parameter 40.09 ACT1 MINIMUM.

40.12 ACT2 MAXIMUM Refer to Parameter 40.10 ACT1 MAXIMUM.

40.13 PID INTEGRATION On/Off switch for the PID control block integrator.

ONIntegration is in use. This is the default value.

OFFIntegration is not used.

40.14 TRIM MODE Activates the trim function and selects between direct and proportional trimming. Not visible with 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO = PID CTRL. See subsection Function Description: Reference Trimming.

OFFTrim function is not in use. This is the default value.

PROPORTIONALTrim function is in use. The trimming factor is relative to the external %-reference (EXT2).

DIRECTTrim function is in use. The trimming factor is relative to a fixed limit used in the reference control loop (speed, frequency or torque).

40.15 TRIM REF SEL Selects the signal source for the trim reference. Not visible with 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO = PID CTRL. See subsection Function Description: Reference Trimming above.

10 V(100 %)

8 V(75 %)

4 V(25 %)

2 V(0 %)

0 V 0 %

100 %

Actual Scaled Actual

10 V(100 %)

8 V(80 %)

4 V(40 %)

0 V(0 %) 0 %

100 %

Actual Scaled Actual

100 %

60 %

20 %

0 % 0 %

100 %

Actual Scaled Actual

Minimum AI Actual 1 Maximum 75 %Actual 1 Minimum

Actual 1 Maximum = 20 %Actual 1 Minimum = 60 %

2 V/4 mA

25 %

Minimum AI: 0 V/0 mAI Actual 1 Maximum 80 %Actual 1 Minimum 40 %

6-84 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

AI1; AI2; AI3; AI5; AI6;Analogue signal AI1 (to AI6) is used as the trim reference. AI1 is the default value. For the connection of AI5 to AI6, see Group 98 Option Modules.

PAR 40.16Value of Parameter 40.16 TRIM REFERENCE is used as the trim reference.

40.16 TRIMREFERENCE

Fixed trim reference value for the selector 40.15 TRIM REF SEL. Not visible with 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO = PID CTRL. See subsection Function Description: Reference Trimming above.

-100.0% to 100.0%0.0% is the default value.

40.17 TRIM RANGEADJUST

Multiplier for the PID control block output. Used in the trim function. Not visible with 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO = PID CTRL. See subsection Function Description: Reference Trimming above.

-100.0% to 100.0%0.0% is the default value.

40.18 TRIM SELECTION Selects whether the trimming is used for correcting the speed or torque reference. Visible only when 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO = T CTRL. See subsection Function Description: Reference Trimming above.

SPEED TRIMTrimming is used for speed reference correction. This is the default value.

TORQUE TRIMTrimming is used for torque reference correction.

40.19 ACTUAL FILT TIME Filter time for the actual signals connected to the PID control block. See subsection Function Description: Process PID Control above.

0.04 s to 10.00 s

Trim

ref

eren

ce

-minAI1 minAI1 maxAI1-maxAI1

Analogue Input Signal

Legend

AI5 and negative signal range (i.e bipolar signal) can be used only with an optional I/O extension module.

minAI5 = 13.16 MINIMUM AI5

maxAI5 = 13.17 MAXIMUM AI5

scaleAI = 13.18 SCALE AI5

scaleAI1

-scaleAI1

Example: AI5 as a trim reference

Firmware Manual 6-85

Chapter 6 – Parameters

40.20 SLEEPSELECTION

Sets the sleep activation criteria. See subsection Function Description: Sleeping above. Visible only with 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO = PID CTRL.

OFFThe sleep function is not active. This is the default value.

INTERNALThe Sleep function is activated and deactivated as defined with Parameters 40.21 SLEEP LEVEL, and 40.23 WAKE UP LEVEL.

DI1; …; DI12Digital input must be on (“1”) to enter the sleep mode. The sleep delay, set with Parameter 40.22 SLEEP DELAY, is in effect. For connection of DI7 to DI12, see Group 98 Option Modules.

40.21 SLEEP LEVEL Sets the speed limit for the sleep function. See subsection Function Description: Sleeping above.Visible only with 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO = PID CTRL.

0.0 to 7200.0 rpmThe default value is 0.0 rpm. When the motor speed falls below the sleep level, the sleep delay counter is started. When the motor speed exceeds the sleep level the sleep delay counter is reset.

40.22 SLEEP DELAY Sets the delay for the sleep function. See the figures in subsection Function Description: Sleeping above. Visible only with 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO = PID CTRL.

0.0 s to 3600.0 sThe default value is 0.0 s. If the motor speed is below a set level (40.21 SLEEP LEVEL) longer than the sleep delay, the ACS 600 is stopped, and the control panel shows the warning message “SLEEP MODE”.

40.23 WAKE UP LEVEL Sets the process actual value limit for the sleep function. See the figures in subsection Function Description: Sleeping above. Visible only with 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO = PID CTRL.

0.0% to 100.0%The default value is 0.0%. When the process actual value falls below the limit, the wake-up counter starts. The wake-up level is defined in percents of the used process reference value.

40.24 WAKE UP DELAY Sets the wake-up delay for the sleep function. See subsection Function Description: Reference Trimming above. Visible only with 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO = PID CTRL.

0.0 s to 3600.0 sThe default value is 0.0 s. The drive wakes up if the process actual value is below a set level (40.23 WAKE UP LEVEL) longer than the wake-up delay.

6-86 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Group 42 Brake Control Group 42 includes parameters for the brake control function. The function operates on a 100 ms time level.

The mechanical brake is used for holding the motor and driven machinery at zero speed when the drive is stopped, or when the drive is not powered.

Table 6-26 Group 42.

Parameter Range/Unit Description

1 BRAKE CTRL OFF; ON Brake control function on/off

2 BRAKE ACKNOWLEDGE

OFF; DI5; DI6; DI11; DI12 Interface for the brake acknowledge signal

3 BRAKE OPEN DELAY

0.0 to 5.0 s Brake open delay

4 BRAKE CLOSE DELAY

0.0 to 60.0 s Brake close delay

5 ABS BRAKE CLS SPD

0 to 1000 rpm Absolute brake close speed

6 BRAKE FAULT FUNC

FAULT; WARNING Brake fault function

7 STRT TORQ REF SEL

NO; AI1; AI2; AI3; AI5; AI6; PAR 42.08

Starting torque signal source

8 START TORQ REF -300 to 300% Starting torque setting

Firmware Manual 6-87

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Brake Control FunctionDescription

The figure below shows a brake control application example.

WARNING! Make sure the machinery into which the ACS 600 with brake control function is integrated fulfils the personnel safety regulations. Note that the frequency converter (a Complete Drive Module or a Basic Drive Module, as defined in IEC 61800-2), is not considered as a safety device mentioned in the European Machinery Directive and related harmonised standards. Thus the personnel safety of the complete machinery must not be based on a specific frequency converter feature (such as the brake control function), but it has to be implemented as defined in the application specific regulations.

Summary

— brake on/off control through relay output RO1- brake supervision through digital input DI5 (optional) — fixed starting torque at brake release- emergency brake switch in the brake control circuit

Parameter Settings

14.01 RELAY RO1 OUTPUT BRAKE CTRL

42.01 BRAKE CTRL ON

42.02 BRAKE ACKNOWLEDGE

DI5

42.03 BRAKE OPEN DELAY Brake specific

42.04 BRAKE CLOSE DELAY Brake specific

42.05 ABS BRAKE CLS SPD Application specific

42.06 BRAKE FAULT FUNC FAULT

42.07 STRT TORQ REF SEL Par 42.08

42.08 START TORQ REF 100%

Actual values

3.12 FAULT WORD 3, 3.16 ALARM WORD 3

Fault / Warning messages (SeeChapter 7 – Fault Tracing)

BRAKE ACKN

X25

X22

1 RO12 RO1

3 RO1

5 DI5

7 +24 VDC

Motor

M

Wirings

230 VAC

ACS 600NIOC board 1)

Mechanical brake

Brake control hardware

Emergency brake

6-88 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

The time scheme below illustrates the operation of the brake control function. See also the state machine on the following page.

Ts Start torque at brake release: See 42.07 STRT TORQ REF SEL and 42.08 START TORQ REF.

tod Brake open delay: See 42.03 BRAKE OPEN DELAY.

ncs Brake close speed: See 42.05 ABS BRAKE CLS SPD.

tcd Brake close delay: See 42.04 BRAKE CLOSE DELAY.

Start command

Inverter modulating

Motor magnetised

Open brake command

Actual motor speed

Torque reference

time

tod

tcd

ncs

Ts

Speed reference

Firmware Manual 6-89

Chapter 6 – Parameters

The figure below is the state machine for the brake control function.

RFG INPUTTO ZERO

CLOSEBRAKE

BRAKEACK FAULT

OPENBRAKE

From any state

“1”/“1”/“1”

“0”/“1”/“1”

“1”/“1”/“1”

“1”/“1”/“0”

“0”/“0”/“1”

1)

2)

RELEASE RFGINPUT

3)

4)

7)

10)

11)

12)

13)

5)

NOMODULATION “0”/“0”/“1”

9)

6)

A

A

Brake control function state- NN: State name- X/Y/Z: State outputs/operations

X = “1” Open the brake. The relay output set to brake on/off control energises.Y = “1” Forced start. The function keeps the internal Start on until the brake is closed in spite of the

status of the external Start signal.Z = “1” Ramp in zero. Forces the used speed reference to zero along a ramp.

NN X/Y/Z

State change conditions1) Brake control active ”0” -> ”1” OR Inverter is modulating =”0”2) Motor magnetised = “1” AND Drive running = “1”3) Brake acknowlegement = “1” AND Brake open delay passed AND Start = “1”4) Start = “0”5) Start = “0”6) Start = “1”7) Actual motor speed < Brake close speed AND Start = “0”8) Start = “1”9) Brake acknowledgement = “0” AND Brake close delay passed =”1” AND Start = “0”Only if Parameter 42.02 BRAKE ACKNOWLEDGE OFF: 10) Brake acknowledgement = “0” AND Brake open delay passed =”1”11) Brake acknowledgement = “0”12) Brake acknowledgement = “0”13) Brake acknowledgement = “1” AND Brake close delay passed =”1”

=

RFG = Ramp Function Generator. Used in the reference handling in the speed control loop.

(rising edge)

6-90 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

42.01 BRAKE CTRL Activates the brake control function.

OFFOff is the default value: Brake control function is not in use.

ONBrake control function is on.

42.02 BRAKEACKNOWLEDGE

Activates the external brake on/off supervision and selects the source for the signal. The use of the external on/off supervision signal is optional.

OFFExternal brake on/off supervision is not in use. This is the default value.

DI5Brake on/off supervision is in use. Digital input DI5 is the signal source. DI5 = “1”: Brake is open. DI5 = “0”: Brake is closed. The connection is shown in the subsection Brake Control Function Description above.

DI6; DI11; DI12See DI5. For connection of DI11 and DI12, see Group 98 Option Modules.

42.03 BRAKE OPENDELAY

See the operation diagrams in subsection Brake Control Function Description above: The delay counter starts after the motor is magnetised. The brake control function simultaneously energises the ACS 600 relay output, and the brake starts opening. During the delay, the drive rises the motor torque to level required at the brake release (= Parameters 42.07 STRT TORQ REF SEL and 42.08 START TORQ REF).

0.0 to 5.0 sThe default value is zero. Set the delay the same as the mechanical opening delay of the brake given by the brake manufacturer.

42.04 BRAKE CLOSEDELAY

See the operation diagrams in subsection Brake Control Function Description above: The delay counter starts when the motor actual speed has fallen below the set level after the drive has received the stop command (= Parameter 42.05 ABS BRAKE CLS SPD). Simultaneously with the counter start, the brake control function de-energises the relay output, and the brake starts closing. During the delay, the brake function keeps the motor live preventing the motor speed from falling below zero.

0.0 to 60.0 sThe default value is zero. Set the delay the same as the mechanical make up time of the brake (= operating delay when closing) given by the brake manufacturer.

42.05 ABS BRAKE CLSSPD

See Parameter 42.04 BRAKE CLOSE DELAY and the operation diagrams in subsection Brake Control Function Description above. Note: This is an absolute value.

Firmware Manual 6-91

Chapter 6 – Parameters

0 to 1000 rpmDefault value is 100 rpm.

42.06 BRAKE FAULTFUNC

Defines how the drive reacts in case the status of the external brake acknowledge signal does not meet the status expected by the brake control function. See the state machine in subsection Brake Control Function Description above.

FAULTBrake control function generates a fault. The drive trips and a fault message is shown on the control panel display. The fault is also saved in the event log.

WARNINGBrake control function generates a warning. The drive continues operation and a warning message is shown on the control panel display. The warning is also saved in the event log.

42.07 STRT TORQ REFSEL

Selects the source for the motor starting torque reference. See the operation diagrams in subsection Brake Control Function Description above.

NONo source for the starting torque. This is the default value.

AI1; AI2; AI3; AI5; AI6Starting torque reference is given through an analogue input. For the connection of AI5 and AI6, see Group 98 Option Modules.

PAR 42.08Starting torque reference is given by Parameter 42.08 START TORQ REF.

42.08 START TORQ REF Sets the motor starting torque at brake release in percent of the motor nominal torque. See the operation diagrams in subsection Brake Control Function Description above.

-300 to 300 %Default value is 0.

6-92 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Group 45 FunctionSelection

Group 45 includes parameters for six pointers. The user can select any drive status information for a pointer and direct the value to a relay output.

Table 6-27 Group 45.

The figure below shows how to indicate drive status “READY TO OPERATE” through the relay output RO1.

Parameter Range/Value Description

45.01 POINTER1 GRP+IND -9999 to 9999 Index selector for pointer 1

45.02 POINTER1 BIT 0 to 15 Bit selector for pointer 1

45.03 POINTER2 GRP+IND -9999 to 9999 Index selector for pointer 2

45.04 POINTER2 BIT 0 to 15 Bit selector for pointer 2

45.05 POINTER3 GRP+IND -9999 to 9999 Index selector for pointer 3

45.06 POINTER3 BIT 0 to 15 Bit selector for pointer 3

45.07 POINTER4 GRP+IND -9999 to 9999 Index selector for pointer 4

45.08 POINTER4 BIT 0 to 15 Bit selector for pointer 4

45.09 POINTER5 GRP+IND -9999 to 9999 Index selector for pointer 5

45.10 POINTER5 BIT 0 to 15 Bit selector for pointer 5

45.11 POINTER6 GRP+IND -9999 to 9999 Index selector for pointer 6

45.12 POINTER6 BIT 0 to 15 Bit selector for pointer 6

14.01

0000

9999

Select

MAIN CTRL WORD3.01

MAIN STATUS WORD3.02

B0

READY TO OPERATEB1

…B2

…AUX STATUS WORD3.033.02 MAIN STATUS WORD

NOT USED

COMM. MODULEPOINTER1

(POINTER1)

Relay outputRO1

.

..

.

..

(0302)

(1)

45.02

Select

45.01

Select

.

..

.

..

Firmware Manual 6-93

Chapter 6 – Parameters

45.01 POINTER1GRP+IND

Parameter index selector for pointer 1. See the figure above.

-9999 to 9999Default value is 0000. The negative range is reserved for the signal inversion.

Example (see the figure above): If 45.01 POINTER1 GRP+IND has the value -0302, the output of selector 45.02 POINTER1 BIT is inverted. In other words, the pointer output has value “0” when status bit B1 “READY TO OPERATE” has the value “1” and vice versa.

45.02 POINTER1 BIT Bit selector for the pointer 1. See the figure above.

0 to 15Default value is 0 (bit no. 0).

45.03 POINTER2GRP+IND

See Parameter 45.01 POINTER1 GRP+IND.

45.04 POINTER2 BIT See Parameter 45.02 POINTER1 BIT.

45.05 POINTER3GRP+IND

See Parameter 45.01 POINTER1 GRP+IND.

45.06 POINTER3 BIT See Parameter 45.02 POINTER1 BIT.

45.07 POINTER4GRP+IND

See Parameter 45.01 POINTER1 GRP+IND.

45.08 POINTER4 BIT See Parameter 45.02 POINTER1 BIT.

45.09 POINTER5GRP+IND

See Parameter 45.01 POINTER1 GRP+IND.

45.10 POINTER5 BIT See Parameter 45.02 POINTER1 BIT.

45.11 POINTER6GRP+IND

See Parameter 45.01 POINTER1 GRP+IND.

45.12 POINTER6 BIT See Parameter 45.02 POINTER1 BIT.

6-94 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Group 50 EncoderModule

These parameters are visible, and need to be adjusted, only when a pulse encoder module (optional) is installed and activated with Parameter 98.01 ENCODER MODULE.

The parameters in Group 50 define the encoder signal decoding and the operation of the ACS 600 in encoder or NTAC module fault conditions.

These parameter settings will remain the same even though the application macro is changed.

Table 6-28 Group 50 parameters.

50.01 PULSE NR This parameter states the number of the encoder pulses per one revolution.

50.02 SPEEDMEAS MODE

This parameter defines how the encoder pulses are calculated.

A — B DIR

Ch A: positive edges calculated for speed.

Ch B: direction.

A —

Ch A: positive and negative edges calculated for speed.

Ch B: not used.

A — B DIR

Ch A: positive and negative edges are calculated for speed.

Ch B: direction.

Parameter Range Description

50.01 PULSE NR 0 … 29999 Number of encoder pulses per revolution.

50.02 SPEED MEAS MODE

A — B DIR ; A-

— ;

A — B DIR ; A —

— B —

—

Calculation of encoder pulses.

50.03 ENCODER FAULT

WARNING; FAULT Operation of the ACS 600 if an encoder failure or encoder communication failure is detected.

50.04 ENCODER DELAY

5 … 50000 ms Delay for the encoder supervision function (See Parameter 50.03 ENCODER FAULT)

50.05 ENCODER CHANNEL

CHANNEL1, CHANNEL 2

Channel from which the Standard Application Program reads the signals of the Pulse Encoder Module (NTAC).

50.06 SPEED FB SEL INTERNAL; ENCODER

Selects the speed feedback value used in the control; Speed estimate or measured speed.

Firmware Manual 6-95

Chapter 6 – Parameters

A — B —

—

All edges of the signals are calculated.

50.03 ENCODER FAULT This parameter defines the operation of the ACS 600 if a failure is detected in communication between the pulse encoder and the Pulse Encoder Interface Module (NTAC) or in between the NTAC module and the ACS 600.

Encoder supervision function activates if either of the following conditions is valid:

1. There is a 20 % difference between the estimated speed and the measured speed received from the encoder.

2. No pulses are received from the encoder within defined time (see Parameter 50.04 ENCODER DELAY), and the motor torque is at the allowed maximum value.

WARNINGWarning indication is generated.

FAULTFault indication is generated and the ACS 600 stops the motor.

50.04 ENCODER DELAY This is the time delay for the encoder supervision function (See Parameter 50.03 ENCODER FAULT).

50.05 ENCODERCHANNEL

This parameter defines the fibre optic channel of the control board from which the Standard Application Program reads the signals coming from the Pulse Encoder Interface Module (NTAC).

CHANNEL 2Pulse Encoder Module (NTAC) signals are read from channel 2 (CH2). This is the default value. It can be used in most cases.

CHANNEL 1Pulse Encoder Module (NTAC) signals are read from channel 1 (CH1). The Pulse Encoder Module (NTAC) must be connected to CH1 instead of CH2 in applications where CH2 is reserved by a Master station (e.g. a Master/Follower application). This parameter value must be changed accordingly. See also Parameter 70.03 CH1 BAUDRATE.

50.06 SPEED FB SEL This parameter defines the speed feedback value used in control.

INTERNALCalculated speed estimate is used as the speed feedback.

ENCODERActual speed measured with an encoder is used as the speed feedback.

6-96 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Group 51Communication Module

These parameters are visible, and need to be adjusted, only when a fieldbus adapter module (optional) is installed and activated with Parameter 98.02 COMM. MODULE LINK. For details on the parameters, refer to the manual of the fieldbus module.

These parameter settings will remain the same even though the macro is changed.

Group 52 StandardModbus

These parameters define the basic settings for the Standard Modbus Link. See Appendix C – Fieldbus Control.

Table 6-29 Group 52 parameters.

Parameter Range Description

52.01 STATION NUMBER

1 to 247 Device address. Two units with the same addresses are not allowed on-line. Default value is 1.

52.02 BAUDRATE 600; 1200; 2400; 4800; 9600

Transfer rate of the link in bit/s. Default value is 9600.

52.03 PARITY NONE1STOPBIT; NONE2STOPBIT;ODD; EVEN

Usage of parity bit(s). Default value is ODD.

Firmware Manual 6-97

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Group 60MASTER/FOLLOWER

The Master/Follower group includes parameters needed when the system is run by several ACS 600 drives and the motor shafts are coupled to each other via gearing, chain, belt etc.

This section contains a brief introductory to Master/Follower application and the parameter descriptions. For more information see the separate Master/Follower Application Guide (EN code: 58962180).

Table 6-30 Group 60 parameters.

Parameter Range Description

60.01 MASTER LINK MODE

NOT IN USE; MASTER; FOLLOWER

Sets the Master/Follower communication mode for the station

60.02 TORQUE SELECTOR

SPEED;TORQUE; MINIMUM; MAXIMUM; ADD; ZERO

Follower torque reference selector

60.03 WINDOW SEL ON

NO; YES Window function activation

60.04 WINDOW WIDTH POS

0 to 1500 Window limit for the positive speed error

60.05 WINDOW WIDTH NEG

0 to 1500 Window limit for the negative speed error

60.06 DROOP RATE 0 to 100% Droop rate as a percent of the maximum speed

60.07 MASTERSIGNAL 2

0000 to 9999 Addres from which Master reads Reference 1

60.08 MASTERSIGNAL 3

0000 to 9999 Addres from which Master reads Reference 2

6-98 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Function Description:Master/Follower

The figures below illustrate the Master/Follower function in brief.

In Master/Follower communication, the Master station cyclically sends a message to the Follower stations. The message is read by all on-line Follower stations through channel CH2. The drive behaviour depends on the settings of Group 60 Parameters and Parameters 10.01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR, 10.02 EXT2 STRT/STP/DIR, 11.03 EXT REF1 SELECT, 11.06 EXT REF2 SELECT, 16.01 RUN ENABLE and 16.04 FAULT RESET SEL.

MainsSupply 33

Solidly coupled motor shafts:• Speed-Controlled Master • Follower Follows the Torque Reference

of the Master

External Control Signals

MainsSupply 3

n3

22 Master/Follower Link

Follower Fault Supervision

3

22 Master/Follower Link

Follower Fault Supervision

3 3

External Control Signals

MainsSupply 3

n

Flexibly coupled motor shafts:• Speed-Controlled Master • Follower Follows the Speed Reference

of the Master

MainsSupply

ACS 600

ACS 600

ACS 600

ACS 600

M/F Application, Overview

PID–

+

–

+

0

12

0

3

4

5

SPEED REF = Speed ReferenceTORQ REF 1 = Torque ReferenceTORQ REF 2 = Speed Controller OutputTORQ REF 3 = Internal Torque Reference

EXT1 = External control location 1EXT2 = External control location 2See Parameter 11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT (O)

EXT2

EXT1

SPEED

TORQUE

MIN

MAX

ADD

2.102.09TORQ REF 3 TORQUE

TORQ REF 1

TORQ REF 2

DROOP

2.02SPEED REF 3

ACTUAL SPEED

60.02 TORQUESELECTOR

SPEED CONTROLLERWINDOW CONTROL

REFERENCECHAIN

RATE

M/F Application, Functions for the Speed and Torque Control Loop Tuning• Torque selector• Window control• DroopingThe functions are typically applied in the Follower station when selecting and processing the reference(s) received from the Master.

Firmware Manual 6-99

Chapter 6 – Parameters

The Follower drive is torque-controlled. Parameter 11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT is set to EXT2 and 60.02 TORQUE SELEC-TOR to ADD.1. Normal operating range. Window Control keeps the speed con-troller input zero. The Follower is controlled by torque reference of the Master.2. Load loss occurs. Follower actual speed starts to rise.3. The speed increases until the absolute value of the negative speed error exceeds WINDOW WIDTH NEG. Window Control con-nects the value outside the window to the speed controller. Negative speed controller output value is produced and added to torque ref-erence received from the Master. Internal torque reference is restricted to stop the speed increase.

Speed Reference

Internal Torque Reference

Load torque

%

Time

Actual Speed

60.05 WINDOW WIDTH NEG

1. 2.

3.

Example 2: Window Control Onin a Load Loss Condition

60.05 WINDOW WIDTH NEG

60.04 WINDOW WIDTH POS

Speed Reference

Actual Speed

Speed Controller Output

Internal Torque Reference =Torque Reference + Speed Controller Output

Time

The Follower drive is torque-controlled. Parameter 11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT is set to EXT2 and 60.02 TORQUE SELEC-TOR to TORQUE.1. Normal operating range. The Follower is controlled by torque reference of the Master.2. Load loss occurs. Follower actual speed starts to rise.

3. The speed increases until the maximum speed limit of the ACS 600 is reached (Parameter 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED). Internal torque reference is restricted to stop the speed increase.

Speed Reference

Internal Torque Reference

Load torque

%

Time

Actual Speed

1. 2.

3.

Example 1: Window Control Off in a Load Loss Condition

G = Speed controller gaine = Value connected to speed

controller

e

G·e

Torque Reference

20.02 SPEED MAXIMUM

Torque Reference Torque Reference

M/F Application, Window Control

6-100 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

60.01 MASTER LINKMODE

This parameter determines the role of the drive on the Master/Follower link.

NOT IN USEThe Master/Follower link is not active. This the default value.

MASTERThe drive acts as the Master station.

FOLLOWERThe drive acts as a Follower station.

60.02 TORQUESELECTOR

Selects the reference used in motor torque control. Typically, the value needs to be changed only in the Follower station(s). See subsection Function Description: Master/Follower above.

The parameter is visible only when Parameter 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO is T CTRL. External control location 2 (EXT2) must be active to enable torque selector.

SPEEDThe follower speed controller output is used as a reference for motor torque control. The drive is speed controlled.

SPEED can be used both in the Follower and the Master if

• the motor shafts of the Master and Follower are connected flexibly. (A slight speed difference between the Master and the Follower is possible/allowed.)

• drooping is used (see Parameter 60.06 DROOP RATE).

TORQUEThis is the default value. The drive is torque-controlled.

The selection is used in the Follower(s) when the motor shafts of the Master and Follower are coupled solidly to each other by gearing, a chain or other means of mechanical power transmission and no speed difference between the drives is allowed or possible.

Firmware Manual 6-101

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Note: If TORQUE is selected, the ACS 600 does not restrict the speed variation as long as the speed is within the limits defined with Parameters 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED and 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED. More definite speed supervision is often needed. In those cases, the selection ADD should be used instead of TORQUE.

MINIMUMThe torque selector compares the torque reference and the speed controller output, the smaller of which is used as the reference for the motor torque control. MINIMUM is selected in special cases only.

MAXIMUMThe torque selector compares the torque reference and the speed controller output, the greater of which is used as the reference for the motor torque control. MAXIMUM is selected in special cases only.

ADDThe torque selector adds the speed controller output to the torque reference. The drive is torque controlled in the normal operating range.

The selection ADD, together with the window control, forms a speed supervision function for a torque controlled Follower drive as follows:

• In the normal operating range, the Follower follows the torque reference of the Master (TORQ REF 1).

• Window control keeps the speed controller input and output at zero as long as the speed error (speed reference — actual speed) remains within the parameter-set window.

• If the speed error moves out of the window, window control connects the error to the speed controller. The speed controller output increases or decreases the internal torque reference, stopping the change of the actual speed.

ZEROThis selection forces the output of the torque selector to zero.

6-102 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

60.03 WINDOW SEL ON The window control is visualised in the subsection Function Description: Master/Follower above. Window control, together with selection ADD at Parameter 60.02 TORQUE SELECTOR, forms a speed supervision function for a torque controlled drive.

The parameter is visible only when Parameter 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO is T CTRL. External control location 2 (EXT2) must be active to enable window control.

NOWindow control is off. This is the default value.

YESWindow control is on. Selection YES is used only when Parameter 60.02 TORQUE SELECTOR is ADD. Window control supervises the speed error value (Speed Reference — Actual Speed). In the normal operating range, window control keeps the speed controller input at zero. The speed controller is evoked only if:

• the speed error exceeds the value of Parameter 60.04 WINDOW WIDTH POS or

• the absolute value of the negative speed error exceeds the value of Parameter 60.05 WINDOW WIDTH NEG.

When the speed error moves outside the window, the exceeding part of the error value is connected to the speed controller. The speed controller produces a reference term relative to the input and gain of the speed controller (Parameter 23.01 GAIN) which the torque selector adds to torque reference. The result is used as the internal torque reference for the ACS 600.

Example: In a load loss condition, the internal torque reference of the drive is decreased to prevent an excessive rise of the motor speed. If window control were inactivated, the motor speed would rise until a speed limit of the ACS 600 were reached. (Parameters 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED and 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED define the speed limits.)

60.04 WINDOW WIDTHPOS

See Parameter 60.03 WINDOW SEL ON. The parameter is visible only when Parameter 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO is T CTRL.

0 to 1500 rpmThe default value is 0.

60.05 WINDOW WIDTHNEG

See Parameter 60.03 WINDOW SEL ON. The parameter is visible only when Parameter 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO is T CTRL.

0 to 1500 rpmThe default value is 0.

60.06 DROOP RATE This parameter value needs to be changed only if both the Master and the Follower are speed-controlled:

• External control location 1 (EXT1) is selected (see Parameter 11.02 EXT 1/EXT 2 SELECT, or

Firmware Manual 6-103

Chapter 6 – Parameters

• External control location 2 (EXT2) is selected (see Parameter 11.02 EXT 1/EXT 2 SELECT) and Parameter 60.02 TORQUE SELECTOR is set to SPEED.

The default value is 0%.

The drooping prevents conflict between the Master and Follower by allowing a slight speed difference between them.

The correct droop rate for a process mut be found out case by case in practice. The droop rate needs to be set both for the Master and the Follower.

The droop rate is set in % of the motor nominal speed. The actual speed decrease at a certain operating point depends on the droop rate setting and the drive load ( = torque reference / speed controller output). The drooping slightly decreases the drive speed as the drive load increases At 100% speed controller output, drooping is at its nominal level, i.e. equal to the value of the DROOP RATE. The drooping effect decreases linearly to zero along with the decreasing load.

60.07 MASTERSIGNAL 2

This parameter selects the signal that is sent by the Master to the Follower(s) as Reference 1 (speed reference). See the separate Master/Follower Application Guide (English code: 58962180).

The format is as follows: (x)xyy, where (x)x = Actual Signal or Parameter Group, yy = Actual Signal or Parameter Index.

The default value is 202, which denotes Actual Signal Group 2, Index 02, i.e. 2.02 SPEED REF 3.

60.08 MASTERSIGNAL 3

This parameter selects the signal that is sent by the Master to the Follower(s) as Reference 2 (torque reference). See the separate Master/Follower Application Guide (EN code: 58962180).

The format is as follows: (x)xyy, where (x)x = Actual Signal or Parameter Group, yy = Actual Signal or Parameter Index.

The default value is 213, which denotes Actual Signal Group 2, Index 13, i.e. 2.13 TORQ REF USED.

Motor Speed% of nominal

Drooping

No Drooping

Speed Controller100%

} Par. 60.06 DROOP RATE

Output /%

Speed Decrease = Speed Controller Output · Drooping · Max. Speed

Calculation Example:DROOP RATE is 1%, Speed Controller output is 50%, maximum speed of the drive is 1500 rpm.Speed decrease = 0.01 · 0.50 · 1500 rpm = 7.5 rpm

Drive load

100%

6-104 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Group 70 DDCS Control The ACS 600 can communicate with external equipment via a DDCS protocol serial communication channels. The parameters in Group 70 set the ACS 600 node addresses for the DDCS channels.

These parameter values need to be adjusted only in certain special cases, examples of which are given in the table below.

Table 6-31 Group 70 parameters.

Parameter Range Description

70.01 CHANNEL 0 ADDR 1 … 125 Node address for CH0. There must not be two nodes with the same address on-line. The setting needs to be changed when a master station is connected to CH0 and it does not automatically change the address of the slave. Examples of such masters are an ABB Advant Controller AC 70 or another ACS 600.

70.02 CHANNEL 3 ADDR 1 … 254 Node address for CH3. There must not be two nodes with the same address on-line. Typically the setting needs to be changed when ACS 600 is connected to a ring which consists of several ACS 600s and a PC with the DriveWindow® program running.

70.03 CH1 BAUDRATE 8; 4; 2; 1 MBITS

The communication speed of the fibre optic channel 1. Typically the setting needs to be changed only if the Pulse Encoder Module (NTAC) is connected to CH1 instead of CH2. Then the speed must be changed to 4 Mbits. See also Parameter 50.05 ENCODER CHANNEL.

Firmware Manual 6-105

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Group 90 D SET RECADDR

These parameters are visible, and can be adjusted, only when a fieldbus communication is activated with Parameter 98.02 COMM. MODULE LINK.

Table 6-32 Group 90 parameters.

Group 92 D SET TRADDR

These parameters are visible, and can be adjusted, only when a fieldbus communication is activated with Parameter 98.02 COMM. MODULE LINK

Table 6-33 Group 92 parameters.

Parameter Range Description

90.01 AUX DS REF3 0 … 8999 These parameters enable parameter adjustment through the fieldbus reference. See Appendix C – Fieldbus Control.

90.02 AUX DS REF4 0 … 8999

90.03 AUX DS REF5 0 … 8999

90.04 MAIN DS SOURCE

1 … 255 Defines the data set number from which the drive reads the Control Word, Reference REF1 and Reference REF2. See Appendix C – Fieldbus Control.

90.05 AUX DS SRCE 1 … 255 Defines the data set number from which the drive reads the References REF3, REF4 and REF5. See Appendix C –Fieldbus Control.

Parameter Range Description

92.01 MAIN DS STATUS WORD

302 (fixed, not visible)

These parameters define the Main and Auxiliary Actual signal data sets, sent by the ACS 600 to the fieldbus master station. See Appendix C – Fieldbus Control.

92.02 MAIN DS ACT1 0 … 9999

92.03 MAIN DS ACT2 0 … 9999

92.04 AUX DS ACT3 0 … 9999

92.05 AUX DS ACT4 0 … 9999

92.06 AUX DS ACT5 0 … 9999

6-106 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Group 96 EXTERNALAO

These parameters are visible, and can be adjusted, only when the optional Analogue Extension Module (NAIO) is installed and activated by setting Parameter 98.06 AI/O EXT MODULE to UNIPOLAR PRGUNIP AO PROG, BIP AO PROG, UNIP AIO PROG or BIP AIO PROG. The parameters define the content and handling of the analogue output signals of the module.

The Range/Unit column in the table below shows the parameters. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail.

Table 6-34 Group 96 parameters.

96.01 EXT AO1 This parameter allows you to select which signal is connected to analogue output AO1 of the analogue extension module. The alternative settings are the same as for the standard analogue outputs. See Parameter 15.01 ANALOGUE OUTPUT1 (O).

96.02 INVERT EXT AO1 If you select YES, the Extension module analogue output AO1 signal is inverted.

Parameter Range/Unit Description

1 EXT AO1 Refer to the text below for the available selections.

Content of the extension module analogue output 1.

2 INVERT EXT AO1 NO; YES Extension module analogue output signal 1 inversion.

3 MINIMUM EXT AO1 0 mA; 4 mA; 10 mA; 12 mA

Extension module analogue output signal 1 minimum.

4 FILTER EXT AO1 0.00 … 10.00 s Filter time constant for extension module AO1.

5 SCALE EXT AO1 10 … 1000 % Extension module analogue output signal 1 scaling factor.

6 EXT AO2 Refer to the text below for the available selections.

Extension module analogue output 2 content.

7 INVERT EXT AO2 NO; YES Extension module analogue output signal 2 inversion.

8 MINIMUM EXT AO2 0 mA; 4 mA; 10 mA; 12 mA

Extension module analogue output signal 2 minimum.

9 FILTER EXT AO2 0.00 … 10.00 s Filter time constant for extension module AO2.

10 SCALE EXT AO2 10 … 1000 % Extension module analogue output signal 2 scaling factor.

Firmware Manual 6-107

Chapter 6 – Parameters

96.03 MINIMUM EXTAO1

The minimum value of the Extension module analogue output signal can be set to either 0 mA, 4 mA,10 mA or 12 mA. Actually, the setting 10 mA or 12 mA does not set the AO1 minimum but fixes 10/12 mA to actual signal value zero. See the figure below.

Example: Motor speed is read through the analogue output.

• Motor nominal speed is 1000 rpm (Parameter 99.08 MOTOR NOM SPEED).

• 96.02 INVERT EXT AO1 is NO

• 96.05 SCALE EXT AO1 is 100 %

The analogue output value as a function of speed is shown below.

96.04 FILTER EXT AO1 Filter time constant for Extension module analogue output AO1. See Parameter 15.04 FILTER AO1.

96.05 SCALE EXT AO1 This parameter is the scaling factor for the Extension module analogue output AO1 signal. See Parameter 15.05 SCALE AO1.

96.06 EXT AO2 See Parameter 96.01 EXT AO1.

96.07 INVERT EXT AO2 See Parameter 96.02 INVERT EXT AO1.

96.08 MINIMUM EXTAO2

See Parameter 96.03 MINIMUM EXT AO1.

96.09 FILTER EXT AO2 See Parameter 96.04 FILTER EXT AO1.

96.10 SCALE EXT AO2 See Parameter 96.05 SCALE EXT AO1.

-1000

Analogue output

1000

mA

20

0-500 500Speed/rpm

1012

4

1

2

3

4

0 mA

4 mA

10 mA

12 mA

Analogue outputsignal minimum

1

2

3

4

1

2

6-108 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

Group 98 OptionModules

The parameters of this group are set if an option module is installed or external serial communication is in use. For more information on option modules refer to the option module manuals.

These parameter values cannot be altered with the ACS 600 running.

These parameter settings will remain the same even though the application macro is changed.

Table 6-35 Group 98 parameters.

98.01 ENCODERMODULE

Set to YES if pulse encoder module (optional) is installed. Set the module node number to 16 (for directions see module manual). See also Parameter Group 50.

Parameter Range Description

98.01 ENCODER MODULE NO; YES Pulse encoder option module selection. See also Parameter Group 50 Encoder Module.

98.02 COMM. MODULE LINK

NO; FIELDBUS; ADVANT: STD MODBUS; CUSTOMISED

Option module selection.See also Group 51 Communication Module.

98.03 DI/O EXT MODULE 1 NO; YES Option module selection.

98.04 DI/O EXT MODULE 2 NO; YES Option module selection.

98.05 DI/O EXT MODULE 3 NO; YES Option module selection.

98.06 AI/O EXT MODULE NO; UNIP AIO PRG; BIP AIO PRG; UNIPOLAR; BIPOLAR; UNIP AO PRG; BIP AO PRG

Option module selection.

98.07 COMM PROFILE ABB DRIVES; CSA2.8/3.0

Communication profile selection

98.08 NIOC-01 BOARD NO; YES Enable/disable the NIOC board supervision function

98.09 NDIO1 DI FUNC DI7,8; REPL DI1,2

Selects the use of the NDIO module no. 1 input channels

98.10 NDIO2 DI FUNC DI9.10; REPL DI1,2

Selects the use of the NDIO module no. 2 input channels

98.11 NDIO3 DI FUNC DI11,12; REPL DI1,2

Selects the use of the NDIO module no. 3 input channels

98.12 AI/O MOTOR TEMP NO; UNIPOLAR NAIO module setting for motor temperature measuring

Firmware Manual 6-109

Chapter 6 – Parameters

98.02 COMM. MODULELINK

This parameter selects the external serial communication interface. See Appendix C – Fieldbus Control.

NONo external serial communication in use.

FIELDBUSACS 600 communicates with a communication module (e.g. fieldbus adapter) via CH0 Fieldbus Adapter link. See also Parameter Group 51 Communication Module.

ADVANTACS 600 communicates with an ABB Advant OCS system via CH0 Fieldbus Adapter link. See also Parameter Group 70 DDCS Control.

STD MODBUSACS 600 communicates with a Modbus controller via the Standard Modbus link. See also Parameter Group 52 Standard Modbus.

CUSTOMISEDACS 600 can be controlled via two serial communication interfaces simultaneously. The control sources must be defined by the user with Parameter 90.04 MAIN DS SOURCE and 90.05 AUX DS SRCE.

98.03 DI/O EXTMODULE 1

Set to YES if external digital input/output module 1 (NDIO; optional) is installed. Set the module node number to 2 (for directions see module manual).

NOCommunication between ACS 600 and the NDIO module 1 inactive. This is the default value.

YESCommunication between ACS 600 and the NDIO module 1 active.

• Parameter 98.09 NDIO1 DI FUNC further defines the use of the digital inputs in the application program.

• Parameters 14.10 NDIO MOD1 RO1 and 14.11 NDIO MOD1 RO2 select the drive states that are indicated through the relay outputs.

98.04 DI/O EXTMODULE 2

Set to YES if a second NDIO module (digital input/output module 2) is installed. Set the module node number to 3 (for directions see module manual).

NOCommunication between ACS 600 and the NDIO module 2 inactive. This is the default value.

YESCommunication between ACS 600 and the NDIO module 2 active.

• Parameter 98.10 NDIO2 DI FUNC further defines the use of the digital inputs in the application program.

• Parameters 14.12 NDIO MOD2 RO1 and 14.13 NDIO MOD2 RO2 select the drive states that are indicated through the relay outputs.

6-110 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

98.05 DI/O EXTMODULE 3

Set to YES if a third NDIO module (digital input/output module 3) is installed. Set the module node number to 4 (for directions see module manual).

NONo communication between drive and NDIO module 3. This is the default value.

YESCommunication between drive and NDIO module 3 active.

• Parameter 98.11 NDIO3 DI FUNC further defines the use of the digital inputs in the application program.

• Parameters 14.14 NDIO MOD3 RO1 and 14.15 NDIO MOD3 RO2 select the drive states that are indicated through the relay outputs.

98.06 AI/O EXT MODULE Parameter activates the communication to an optional analogue input/output extension module, NAIO.

Note: Before setting the ACS 600 parameters, ensure the NAIO module hardware settings (DIP switches) are OK:

• The NAIO module node number is set to 5.

• The input signal type selections matches the actual signals (mA/V).

• For type NAIO-03 module the operation mode selection matches the applied input signals (unipolar/bipolar).

For directions see Installation and Start-up Guide for NTAC-0x/NDIO-0x/NAIO-0x Modules (EN code: 3AFY 58919730).

For information on the NAIO module with the ACS 600 Standard Application Program, see also Appendix D – Analogue Extension Module NAIO.

NONo communication between the drive and the NAIO module. This is the default value.

Firmware Manual 6-111

Chapter 6 – Parameters

UNIP AIO PROGUnipolar NAIO module inputs: Total number of I/Os in the application program is increased. The application program handles the analogue I/O’s as follows:

• Input type: 0 to 20 mA (0 to 10 V)

• Total no. of inputs: 5

• Total no. of outputs:4

• Input terminals:

• Output terminals:

BIP AIO PROGBipolar NAIO module inputs: Total number of I/Os in the application program is increased. The application program handles the analogue I/O’s as follows:

• Input type: -20 to 20 mA (-10 to 10 V)

• Total no. of inputs: See selection UNIP AIO PROG

• Total no. of outputs:See selection UNIP AIO PROG

• Input terminals: See selection UNIP AIO PROG

• Output terminals: See selection UNIP AIO PROG

Input name in the application program

Physical input terminal

AI1 AI1 on NIOCAI2 AI2 on NIOCAI3 AI3 on NIOCAI1/JOYST AI1 on NIOCAI2/JOYST AI2 on NIOCAI5 AI1 on NAIOAI6 AI2 on NAIOAI5/JOYST AI1 on NAIOAI5/JOYST AI2 on NAIO

Output value selector in the application program

Physical output terminal

15.01 ANALOGUE OUTPUT1 (O)

AO1 on NIOC

15.06 ANALOGUE OUTPUT2 (O)

AO2 on NIOC

96.01 EXT AO1 AO1 on NAIO96.06 EXT AO2 AO2 on NAIO

6-112 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

UNIPOLAR Unipolar NAIO module inputs: Total number of I/Os in the application program is not increased. The application program handles the analogue I/O’s as follows:

• Input type: 0 to 20 mA (0 to 10 V)

• Total no. of inputs: 3

• Total no. of outputs: 2

• Input terminals:

• Output terminals:

BIPOLARBipolar NAIO module inputs: Total number of I/Os in the application program is not increased. The application program handles the analogue I/O’s as follows:

• Input type: -20 to 20 mA (-10 to 10 V)

• Total no. of inputs: See selection UNIPOLAR

• Total no. of outputs: See selection UNIPOLAR

• Input terminals: See selection UNIPOLAR

• Output terminals See selection UNIPOLAR

Input name in the application program

Physical input terminal

AI1 AI1 on NIOCAI2 AI1 on NAIOAI3 AI2 on NAIOAI1/JOYST AI2 on NAIOAI2/JOYST AI1 on NAIOAI5 AI1 on NAIOAI6 AI2 on NAIOAI5/JOYST AI1 on NAIOAI6/JOYST AI2 on NAIO

Output value selector in the application program

Physical output terminal

15.01 ANALOGUE OUTPUT1 (O)

AO1 on NIOC and AO1 on NAIO

15.06 ANALOGUE OUTPUT2 (O)

AO2 on NIOC and AO2 on NAIO

Firmware Manual 6-113

Chapter 6 – Parameters

UNIP AO PROGUnipolar NAIO-module inputs: Total number of outputs in the application program is increased. The application program handles the analogue I/O’s as follows:

• Input type: 0 to 20 mA (0 to 10 V)

• Total no. of inputs: 3

• Total no. of outputs:4

• Input terminals:

• Output terminals:

BIP AO PROGBipolar NAIO-module inputs: Total number of outputs in the application program is increased. The application program handles the analogue I/O’s as follows:

• Input type: -20 to 20 mA (-10 to 10 V)

• Total no. of inputs: See selection UNIP AO PRG

• Total no. of outputs:See selection UNIP AO PRG

• Input terminals: See selection UNIP AO PRG

• Output terminals See selection UNIP AO PRG

98.07 COMM PROFILE This parameter is visible only when a fieldbus communication is activated with Parameter 98.02 COMM. MODULE LINK.

This parameter defines the profile on which the communication with the fieldbus or another ACS 600 is based.

Input name in the application program

Physical input terminal

AI1 AI1 on NIOCAI2 AI1 on NAIOAI3 AI2 on NAIOAI1/JOYST AI2 on NAIOAI2/JOYST AI1 on NAIOAI5 AI1 on NAIOAI6 AI2 on NAIOAI5/JOYST AI1 on NAIOAI6/JOYST AI2 on NAIO

Output value selector in the application program

Physical output terminal

15.01 ANALOGUE OUTPUT1 (O)

AO1 on NIOC

15.06 ANALOGUE OUTPUT2 (O)

AO2 on NIOC

96.01 EXT AO1 AO1 on NAIO96.06 EXT AO2 AO2 on NAIO

6-114 Firmware Manual

Chapter 6 – Parameters

ABB DRIVESThe default profile in ACS 600 application program version 5.0 and later.

CSA 2.8/3.0Communication profile used in ACS 600 application program versions 2.8x and 3.x.

98.08 NIOC-01 BOARD The parameter enables or disables the communication supervision of the Standard I/O Board (NIOC).

NOThe communication to the NIOC board is not supervised.

YESThe communication to the NIOC board is supervised. This is the default value. The application program checks the communication to the NIOC board cyclically. If the communication fails, the program generates a warning “IO COMM”.

98.09 NDIO1 DI FUNC The parameter selects the use of the inputs of the Digital I/O Extension Module (NDIO) no. 1. See Parameter 98.03 DI/O EXT MODULE 1.

DI7,8The DI1 and DI2 of the NDIO module extend the number of input channels. The NDIO inputs are named DI7 and DI8 in the ACS 600 application program.

REPL DI1,2The DI1 and DI2 of the NDIO module replace the standard input channels DI1 and DI2 on the NIOC board. The NDIO inputs are named DI1 and DI2 in the ACS 600 application program. This is the default value.

98.10 NDIO2 DI FUNC The parameter selects the use of the inputs of the Digital I/O Extension Module (NDIO) no. 2. See Parameter 98.04 DI/O EXT MODULE 2.

DI9,10The DI1 and DI2 of the NDIO module extend the total number of digital inputs. The NDIO inputs are named DI9 and DI10 in the ACS 600 application program.

REPL DI3,4The DI1 and DI2 of the NDIO module replace the standard input channels DI3 and DI4. The NDIO inputs are named DI3 and DI4 in the ACS 600 application program. This is the default value.

98.11 NDIO3 DI FUNC The parameter selects the use of the inputs of the Digital I/O Extension Module (NDIO) no. 3. See Parameter 98.05 DI/O EXT MODULE 3.

DI11,12The DI1 and DI2 of the NDIO module extend the total number of digital inputs. The NDIO inputs are named DI11 and DI12 in the ACS 600 application program.

Firmware Manual 6-115

Chapter 6 – Parameters

REPL DI5,6The DI1 and DI2 of the NDIO module replace the standard input channels DI5 and DI6. The NDIO inputs are named DI5 and DI6 in the ACS 600 application program. This is the default value.

98.12 AI/O MOTORTEMP

The parameter sets an optional Analogue I/O Extension Module (NAIO) an interface for motor temperature measurement. For more information on the temperature measurement function and connections see, Parameter Group 35 Mot Temp Meas.

Note: Before setting the ACS 600 parameters, ensure the NAIO module hardware settings (DIP switches) are apprpopriate for the motor temperature measurement:

• The NAIO module node number is 9.

• The input signal type selections are the following:

• for one Pt 100 sensor measurement, set the range to 0 — 2 V.

• for two to three Pt 100 sensors or one to three PTC sensors, set the range to 0 — 10 V.

• For type NAIO-03 module, the operation mode selection is unipolar.

For directions see Installation and Start-up Guide for NTAC-0x/NDIO-0x/NAIO-0x Modules (Eglish code: 3AFY 58919730).

NOThe NAIO module is not used in the motor temperature measurement.

UNIPOLARThe NAIO module is used in the motor temperature measurement. The use of the analogue inputs (AI) and outputs (AO) of the NAIO module is shown in the table below.

Motor 1 temperature measurement

AO1 AO1 feeds a constant current to the motor 1 temperature sensor. The current value depends on the setting of Parameter 35.01 MOT1 TEMP AI1 SEL:- AO1 is 9.1 mA with selections 1xPT100; 2xPT100; 3xPT100 — AO1 is 1.6 mA with selection 1..3 PTC

AI1 AI1 measures voltage over the motor 1 temperature sensor.

Motor 2 temperature measurement

AO2 AO2 feeds a constant current to the motor 2 temperature sensor. The current value depends on the setting of Parameter 35.04 MOT2 TEMP AI2 SEL:- AO2 is 9.1 mA. with selections 1xPT100; 2xPT100; 3xPT100, — AO2 is 1.6 mA. with selection 1..3 PTC

AI2 AI2 measures voltage over the motor 2 temperature sensor.

6-116 Firmware Manual

Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing

WARNING! All electrical installation and maintenance work described in this chapter should only be undertaken by a qualified electrician. The Safety Instructions on the first pages of this manual and the appropriate hardware manual must be followed.

Fault Tracing The ACS 600 is equipped with advanced protection features that continuously guard the unit against damage and down time due to incorrect operating conditions and electrical and mechanical malfunctions.

This chapter explains the ACS 600 fault tracing procedure with the Control Panel.

All Warning and Fault messages are presented in tables below with information on the cause and remedy for each case. Most Warning and Fault conditions can be identified and cured with that information. If not, contact an ABB service representative.

CAUTION! Do not attempt any measurement, parts replacement or other service procedure not described in this manual. Such action will void guarantee, endanger correct operation, and increase downtime and expense.

The Warning message disappears when any of the Control Panel keys are pressed. The Warning will reappear in one minute if conditions remain unchanged. If the frequency converter is operated with the Control Panel detached, the red LED in the Control Panel mounting platform indicates Fault condition.

For setting of programmable warning and fault messages and functions, refer to Chapter 6 – Parameters.

Fault Resetting An active fault can be reset either by pressing the keypad RESET key, by digital input or fieldbus, or switching the supply voltage off for a while. When the fault has been removed, the motor can be started.

WARNING! If an external source for start command is selected and it is ON, the ACS 600 (with Standard Application Program) will start immediately after fault reset. (If the fault has not been removed, the ACS 600 will trip again.)

Firmware Manual 7-1

Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing

Fault History When a Fault is detected, it is stored in the Fault History. The last Faults and Warnings are stored with the time the Fault was detected.

WARNING! After a fault reset, the drive will start if the start signal is on. Before the reset, switch off the external start signal or ensure that it is safe to start.

The Fault History can be viewed by pressing or in the Actual Signal Display Mode. The Fault History can then be scrolled with and . To exit the Fault History press or . The Fault History can be cleared by pressing the RESET key.

Fault and WarningMessages

The Tables below show the warning and fault messages.

Table 7-1 The Warning Messages generated by the drive firmware.

WARNING CAUSE WHAT TO DO

ACS 600 TEMP The ACS 600 internal temperature is excessive. A warning is given if inverter module temperature exceeds 115 °C.

Check ambient conditions.Check air flow and fan operation.Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.Check motor power against unit power.

AI < MIN FUNC(programmableFault Function 30.01)

An analogue control signal is below minimum allowed value. This can be caused by incorrect signal level or a failure in the control wiring.

Check for proper analogue control signal levels.Check the control wiring.Check AI < MIN FUNC Fault Function parameters.

PANEL LOSS(programmableFault Function 30.02)

A Control Panel selected as active control location for the ACS 600 has ceased communicating.

Check the Panel is connected to the right connector (see the appropriate hardware manual).Check Control Panel connector.Replace Control Panel in the mounting platform.Check PANEL LOSS Fault Function parameters.

MOTOR TEMP(programmableFault Function 30.04 … 30.10)

Motor temperature is too high (or appears to be too high). This can be caused by excessive load, insufficient motor power, inadequate cooling or incorrect start-up data.

Check motor ratings, load and cooling.Check start-up data.Check MOTOR TEMP Fault Function parameters.

THERMISTOR(programmableFault Function 30.04 … 30.05)

Motor thermal protection mode selected as THERMISTOR and the temperature is excessive.

Check motor ratings and load.Check start-up data.Check thermistor connections for digital input DI6 of NIOC board.

MOTOR STALL(programmableFault Function 30.10)

Motor is operating in the stall region. This can be caused by excessive load or insufficient motor power.

Check motor load and the ACS 600 ratings.Check MOTOR STALL Fault Function parameters.

7-2 Firmware Manual

Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing

COMM MODULE(programmableFault Function)

Cyclical communication between ACS 600 and fieldbus/ACS 600 Master is lost.

Check the status of fieldbus communication. See Appendix C – Fieldbus Control, or the appropriate fieldbus adapter manual.Check the parameter settings:- Group 51 (for CH0 fieldbus adapter), or- Group 52 (for Standard Modbus Link)Check cable connections. Check if the bus master is not communicating or configured.

UNDERLOAD(programmable Fault Function 30.13)

Motor load is too low. This can be caused by a release mechanism in the driven equipment.

Check for a problem in the driven equipment.Check UNDERLOAD Fault Function parameters.

ENCODER ERR Communication fault between the pulse encoder and the NTAC module or between the NTAC module and the ACS 600.

Check the pulse encoder and its wiring, the NTAC module, Parameter Group 50 settings and the fibre optic connections on NAMC channel CH1.

ID N CHANGED The ID number of the drive has been changed from 1 in Drive Selection Mode (the change is not shown on the display).

To change the ID number back to 1 go to Drive Selection Mode by pressing DRIVE. Press ENTER. Set the ID number to 1. Press ENTER.

MACRO CHANGE Macro is restoring or user Macro is being saved. Please wait.

ID MAGN REQ Motor identification is required. This warning belongs to the normal start-up procedure. The drive expects the user to select how the motor identification is to be performed: By ID magnetisation or by ID Run.

To start the ID magnetisation: Press the Start key.To start the ID Run procedure:Select the Identification Run type (See Parameter 99.10 MOTOR ID RUN).

ID MAGN Motor identification magnetisation is on. This warning belongs to the normal start-up procedure.

Wait until the drive indicates that motor identification is completed.

ID DONE The ACS 600 has performed the motor identification magnetisation and is ready for operation. This warning belongs to the normal start-up procedure.

Continue drive operation.

ID RUN SEL Motor Identification Run is selected, and the drive is ready to start the ID Run. This warning belongs to the ID Run procedure.

Press Start key to start the Identification Run.

MOTOR STARTS Motor Identification Run starts. This warning belongs to the IR Run procedure.

Wait until the drive indicates that motor identification is completed.

ID RUN Motor Identification Run is on. Wait until the drive indicates that Identification Run is completed.

ID DONE The ACS 600 has performed the Identification Run and is ready for operation. This warning belongs to the ID Run procedure.

Continue drive operation.

ENCODER A<>B The pulse encoder phasing is wrong: Phase A is connected to the terminal of phase B and vice versa.

Interchange the connection of pulse encoder phases A and B.

WARNING CAUSE WHAT TO DO

Firmware Manual 7-3

Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing

MOTOR 1 TEMP Measured motor temperature has exceeded the alarm limit set by Parameter 35.02 MOT 1 TEMP ALM L.

Check that the value of the alarm limit is OK.Check that the actual number of the sensors corresponds to the parameter set value. Let the motor cool down. Ensure proper motor cooling: Check the cooling fan, clean the cooling surfaces, etc.

MOTOR 2 TEMP Measured motor temperature has exceeded the alarm limit set by Parameter 35.05 MOT 2 TEMP ALM L.

Check that the value of the alarm limit is OK.Check that the actual number of the sensors corresponds to the parameter set value. Let the motor cool down. Ensure proper motor cooling: Check the cooling fan, clean the cooling surfaces, etc.

T MEAS ALM Motor temperature measurement is out of the acceptable range.

Check the connections of the motor temperature measurement circuit. See Group 35 Mot Temp Meas for the circuit diagram.

BRAKE ACKN Unexpected state of the brake acknowledge signal.

See Group 42 Brake Control. Check the connection of the brake acknowledgement signal.

IO CONF An input or output of an optional I/O extension module has been selected as a signal interface in the application program but the communication to the appropriate I/O extension module has not been set accordingly.

Check the fault function description (Parameter 30.22 IO CONF FUNC) and Group 98 Option Modules. Correct the settings where necessary.

SLEEP MODE The sleep function has entered the sleeping mode.

See Group 40 PID Control.

WARNING CAUSE WHAT TO DO

7-4 Firmware Manual

Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing

Table 7-2 The Warning Messages generated by the Control Panel firmware.

WARNING CAUSE WHAT TO DO

WRITE ACCESS DENIED PARAMETER SETTING NOT POSSIBLE

Certain parameters do not allow changes while motor is running. If tried, no change is accepted, and a warning is displayed.

Stop the motor then change the parameter value.

Parameter Lock is on. Open the parameter Lock (see Parameter 16.02 PARAMETER LOCK).

DOWNLOAD FAILED Download function of the panel has failed. No data has been copied from the Panel to theACS 600.

Make sure the Panel is in local mode. Retry (there might be interference on the link).Contact an ABB representative.

UPLOAD FAILED Upload function of the panel has failed. No data has been copied from the ACS 600 to the Panel.

Retry (there might be interference on the link).Contact an ABB representative.

NOT UPLOADED DOWNLOADING NOT POSSIBLE

No upload function has been performed. Perform the Upload function before downloading. See Chapter 2 – Overview of ACS 600 Programming and the CDP 312 Control Panel.

DRIVE INCOMPATIBLE DOWNLOADING NOT POSSIBLE

Program versions in the Panel and in the ACS 600 do not match. It is not possible to copy data from Panel to the ACS 600.

Check the program versions (see Parameter Group 33 Information).

DRIVE IS RUNNING DOWNLOADING NOT POSSIBLE

Downloading is not possible while the motor is running.

Stop the motor. Perform the downloading.

NO FREE ID NUMBERS ID NUMBER SETTING NOT POSSIBLE

The Panel Link already includes 31 stations. Disconnect another station from the link to free an ID number.

NO COMMUNICATION (X)

There is a cabling problem or a hardware malfunction on the Panel Link.

Check the Panel Link connections.Press the RESET key. The panel reset may take up to half a minute, please wait.

(4) = Panel type is not compatible with the version of the drive application program. CDP 312 Panel does not communicate with Standard Application Program (ACS) version 3.x or earlier. The CDP 311 Panel does not communicate with Standard Application Program (ACS) version 5.x or later.

Check the Panel type and the version of the drive application program. The Panel type is printed on the cover of the Panel. The application program version is stored in Parameter 33.02 APPL SW VERSION.

Firmware Manual 7-5

Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing

Table 7-3 The Fault Messages generated by the drive firmware.

FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO

TEMP The internal temperature is excessive. The trip level of inverter module temperature is 125 °C.

Check ambient conditions.Check air flow and fan operation.Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.Check motor power against unit power.

OVERCURRENT*) Output current is excessive. The software overcurrent trip limit is 3.5 · I2hd.

Check motor load.Check acceleration time.Check motor and motor cable (including phasing).Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in the motor cable.Check encoder cable (including phasing).

SHORT CIRC*) There is a short-circuit in the motor cable(s) or motor.

Check the motor and motor cable.Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in the motor cable.

The output bridge of the converter unit is faulty. Consult an ABB representative.

PPCC LINK*) The fibre optic link to the NINT board is faulty. Check the fibre optic cables connected to the power plates.

DC OVERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is excessive. DC overvoltage trip limit is 1.3 · U1max, where U1max is the maximum value of the mains voltage range. For 400 V units, U1max is 415 V. For 500 V units, U1max is 500 V. The actual voltage in the intermediate circuit corresponding to the mains voltage trip level is 728 V d.c. for 400 V units and 877 V d.c. for 500 V units.

Check that the overvoltage controller is on (Parameter 20.05).Check mains for static or transient overvoltage.Check Braking Chopper and Resistor (if used).Check deceleration time.Use Coasting To Stop function (if applicable).Retrofit the frequency converter with a Braking Chopper and a Braking Resistor.

SUPPLY PHASE Intermediate circuit DC voltage is oscillating. This can be caused by a missing mains phase, a blown fuse or a rectifier bridge internal fault.A trip occurs when the DC voltage ripple is 13 per cent of the DC voltage.

Check mains fuses.Check for mains supply imbalance.

DC UNDERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient. This can be caused by a missing mains phase, a blown fuse or a rectifier bridge internal fault.

DC undervoltage trip limit is 0.65 · U1min, where U1min is the minimum value of the mains voltage range. For 400 V and 500 V units, U1min is 380 V. The actual voltage in the intermediate circuit corresponding to the mains voltage trip level is 334 V d.c.

Check mains supply and fuses.

7-6 Firmware Manual

Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing

OVERFREQ Motor is turning faster than the highest allowed speed. This can be caused by an incorrectly set minimum/maximum speed, insufficient braking torque or changes in the load when using torque reference.

The trip level is 40 Hz over the operating range absolute maximum speed limit (Direct Torque Control mode active) or frequency limit (Scalar Control active). The operating range limits are set by Parameters 20.01 and 20.02 (DTC mode active) or 20.07 and 20.08 (Scalar Control active).

Check minimum/maximum speed settings.Check adequacy of motor braking torque.Check applicability of torque control.Check the need for a Braking Chopper and Resistor(s).

START INHIBIT Optional start inhibit hardware logic is activated. Check the start inhibit circuit (NGPS board).

EARTH FAULT*)

(programmable Fault Function 30.17

The load on the incoming mains system is out of balance. This can be caused by a fault in the motor, motor cable or an internal malfunction.

Check motor.Check motor cable.Check there are no power factor correction capacitors or surge absorbers in the motor cable.

AI < MIN FUNC(programmableFault Function 30.01)

An analogue control signal is below minimum allowed value. This can be caused by incorrect signal level or a failure in the control wiring.

Check for proper analogue control signal levels.Check the control wiring.Check AI < MIN FUNC Fault Function parameters.

PANEL LOSS(programmableFault Function 30.02)

A Control Panel or Drives Window selected as active control location for the ACS 600 has ceased communicating.

Check the Panel is connected to the right connector (see the appropriate hardware manual).Check Control Panel connector.Re-insert Control Panel in the mounting platform.Check PANEL LOSS Fault Function parameters.Check DrivesWindow connection.

EXTERNAL FLT(programmableFault Function 30.03)

There is a fault in one of the external devices. (This information is configured through one of the programmable digital inputs.)

Check external devices for faults.Check Parameter 30.03 EXTERNAL FAULT.

MOTOR TEMP(programmableFault Function 30.04 … 30.09)

Motor temperature is too high (or appears to be too high). This can be caused by excessive load, insufficient motor power, inadequate cooling or incorrect start-up data.

Check motor ratings and load.Check start-up data.Check MOTOR TEMP Fault Function parameters.

THERMISTOR(programmableFault Function 30.04 … 30.05)

Motor thermal protection mode selected as THERMISTOR and the temperature is excessive.

Check motor ratings and load.Check start-up data.Check thermistor connections for digital input DI6.Check thermistor cabling.

I/O COMM A communication error has occurred on the NAMC board, channel CH1.

Electromagnetic interference.

There is an internal fault on the NIOC board.

Check the connections of the fibre optic cables on NAMC channel CH1.Check all I/O modules (if present) connected to channel CH1.Check for proper earthing of the equipment. Check for highly emissive components nearby.Replace the NIOC board.

FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO

Firmware Manual 7-7

Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing

AMBIENT TEMP I/O Control board temperature is lower than -5…0 °C or exceeds +73…82 °C.

Check air flow and fan operation.

USER MACRO There is no User Macro saved or the file is defective.

Create the User Macro again.

MOTOR STALL(programmableFault Function 30.10 … 30.12)

Motor is operating in the stall region. This can be caused by excessive load or insufficient motor power.

Check motor load and the ACS 600 ratings.Check MOTOR STALL Fault Function parameters.

NO MOT DATA Motor data is not given or motor data does not match with inverter data.

Check the motor data given by Parameters 99.04… 99.09.

UNDERLOAD(programmable Fault Function 30.13 … 30.15)

Motor load is too low. This can be caused by a release mechanism in the driven equipment.

Check for a problem in the driven equipment.Check UNDERLOAD Fault Function parameters.

ID RUN FAIL The Motor ID Run is not completed successfully. Check the maximum speed (Parameter 20.02). It should be at least 80 % of the nominal speed of the motor (Parameter 99.08).

MOTOR PHASE (programmable Fault Function 30.16 (ACC: 30.10))

One of the motor phases is lost. This can be caused by a fault in the motor, the motor cable, a thermal relay (if used) or an internal fault.

Check motor and motor cable.Check thermal relay (if used).Check MOTOR PHASE Fault Function parameters. Disable this protection.

COMM MODULE(programmableFault Function)

Cyclical communication with ACS 600 and fieldbus/ACS 600 Master is lost.

Check the status of fieldbus communication. See Appendix C – Fieldbus Control, or the appropriate fieldbus adapter manual.Check the parameter settings:- Group 51 (for CH0 fieldbus adapter), or- Group 52 (for Standard Modbus Link)Check cable connections. Check if the bus master is not communicating or configured.

LINE CONV Fault on the line side converter. Shift the Panel from the motor side converter control board to the line side converter control board. See the line side converter manual for the fault description.

SC (INU 1)*)

SC (INU 2)SC (INU 3)SC (INU 4)

Short circuit in inverter unit consisting of several parallel inverter modules. Number refers to the faulty inverter module number.

Check the motor and motor cable.Check the power semiconductors (IGBT power plates) of the inverter module. (INU 1 stands for inverter module 1 etc.).

NINT board fibre optic connection fault in inverter unit consisting of several parallel inverter modules. Number refers to the inverter module number.

Check the connection from the inverter module Main Circuit Interface Board, NINT to the PPCC Branching Unit, NPBU. (inverter module 1 is connected to NPBU CH1 etc.)

CURR MEAS Current transformer failure in output current measurent circuit.

Check the current tranformers connected to Main Circuit Interface Board, NINT.

FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO

7-8 Firmware Manual

Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing

.

*) More detailed information on the high power units with parallel inverters is given in fault word 3.12 INT FAULT INFO (see Appendix C – Fieldbus Control).

ENCODER ERR Communication fault between the pulse encoder and the NTAC module or between the NTAC module and the ACS 600.

Check the pulse encoder and its wiring, the NTAC module, Parameter Group 50 settings and the fibre optic connections on NAMC channel CH1.

ENCODER A<>B The pulse encoder phasing is wrong: Phase A is connected to the terminal of phase B and vice versa.

Interchange the connection of pulse encoder phases A and B.

MOTOR 1 TEMP Measured motor temperature has exceeded the fault limit set by Parameter 35.03 MOT 1 TEMP FLT L.

Check that the value of the fault limit is ok. Let the motor cool down. Ensure proper motor cooling: Check the cooling fan, clean the cooling surfaces, etc.

MOTOR 2 TEMP Measured motor temperature has exceeded the fault limit set by Parameter 35.06 MOT 2 TEMP FLT L.

Check that the value of the fault limit is ok. Let the motor cool down. Ensure proper motor cooling: Check the cooling fan, clean the cooling surfaces, etc.

THERMAL MODE The motor thermal protection mode is set to DTC for a high-power motor.

See Parameter 30.05 MOT THERM P MODE.

BRAKE ACKN Unexpected state of the brake acknowledge signal.

See Group 42 Brake Control. Check the connection of the brake acknowledgement signal.

IO CONF An input or output of an optional I/O extension module has been selected as a signal interface in the application program but the communication to the appropriate I/O extension module has not been set accordingly.

Check the fault function description (Parameter 30.22 IO CONF FUNC) and Group 98 Option Modules. Correct the settings where necessary.

FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO

Firmware Manual 7-9

Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing

7-10 Firmware Manual

Appendix A – Complete Parameter Settings

The tables in this Appendix list all the actual signals and parameters with their alternative settings of the ACS 600.

The numbers in brackets () in the Range/Unit and Alternative Settings columns show the numerical equivalents for fieldbus use.

Note for Interbus-S (NIBA-01 module) Users: The Parameter Index equals ((Drive Parameter No.) • 100 + 12288) converted to hexadecimal. Example: the index for drive parameter 13.09 is 1309 + 12288 = 13597 = 351Dh.

Table A-1 Group 1 Actual Signals.

No. Signal Short name Range/Unit( ) Fieldbus Equivalent

PR

OF

IBU

SP

ar. N

o.

(Ad

d 4

000

inF

MS

Mo

de)

Mo

dbu

s/M

od

bu

s P

lus

Par

. No

.

Scaling for Fieldbus

1.01 PROCESS VARIABLE PROC VAR NO; rpm; %; m/s; A; V; Hz; s; h; kh; C; lft; mA; mV; kW; W; kWh; F; hp; MWh; m3h; l/s; bar; kPa; GPM; PSI; CFM; ft; MGD; iHg; FPM

1 40101 1 = 1

1.02 SPEED SPEED rpm 2 40102 -20000 = -100 %20000 = 100 %of motor absolute max. speed

1.03 FREQUENCY FREQ Hz 3 40103 -100 = -1 Hz100 = 1 Hz

1.04 CURRENT CURRENT A 4 40104 10 = 1 A

1.05 TORQUE TORQUE % 5 40105 -10000 = -100 %10000 = 100 %of motor nominal torque

1.06 POWER POWER % 6 40106 0 = 0 %1000 = 100 %of motor nominal power

1.07 DC BUS VOLTAGE V DC BUS V V 7 40107 1 = 1 V

1.08 MAINS VOLTAGE MAINS V V 8 40108 1 = 1 V

1.09 OUTPUT VOLTAGE OUT VOLT V 9 40109 1 = 1 V

1.10 ACS 600 TEMP ACS TEMP C 10 40110 1 = 1 °C

1.11 EXTERNAL REF 1 EXT REF1 rpm 11 40111 1 = 1 rpm

1.12 EXTERNAL REF 2 EXT REF2 % 12 40112 0 = 0 %10000 = 100 %of motor max. speed / nominal torque / max. process reference (depending on the ACS 600 macro selected)

1.13 CTRL LOCATION CTRL LOC (1,2) LOCAL; (3) EXT1; (4) EXT2 13 40113 (see Range/Unit)

1.14 OP HOUR COUNTER OP HOURS h 14 40114 1 = 1 h

1.15 KILOWATT HOURS KW HOURS kWh 15 40115 1 = 100 kWh

1.16 APPL BLOCK OUTPUT APPL OUT % 16 40116 0 = 0 %10000 = 100 %

1.17 DI6-1 STATUS DI6-1 17 40117

1.18 AI1 [V] AI1 [V] V 18 40118 1 = 0.001 V

1.19 AI2 [mA] AI2 [mA] mA 19 40119 1 =0.001 mA

Firmware Manual A-1

Appendix A – Complete Parameter Settings

Table A-2 Group 2 Actual Signals for speed and torque reference monitoring.

1.20 AI3 [mA] AI3 [mA] mA 20 40120 1 = 0.001 mA

1.21 RO3-1 STATUS RO3-1 21 40121

1.22 AO1 [mA] AO1 [mA] mA 22 40122 1 =0.001 mA

1.23 AO2 [mA] AO2 [mA] mA 23 40123 1 = 0.001 mA

1.24 ACTUAL VALUE 1 ACT VAL1 % 24 40124 0 = 0 %10000 = 100 %

1.25 ACTUAL VALUE 2 ACT VAL2 % 25 40125 0 = 0 %10000 = 100 %

1.26 CONTROL DEVIATION CONT DEV % 26 40126 -10000 = -100 %10000 = 100 %

1.27 APPLICATION MACRO MACRO (1) FACTORY; (2) HAND/AUTO;(3) PID.CTRL; (4) T-CTRL;(5) SEQ CTRL; (6) USER 1 LOAD;(7) USER 2 LOAD

27 40127 (see Range/Unit)

1.28 EXT AO1 [mA] EXT AO1 mA 28 40128 1 = 0.001 mA

1.29 EXT AO2 [mA] EXT AO2 mA 29 40129 1 = 0.001 mA

1.30 PP 1 TEMP PP 1 TEM °C 30 40130 1 = 1 °C

1.31 PP 2 TEMP PP 2 TEM °C 31 40131 1 = 1 °C

1.32 PP 3 TEMP PP 3 TEM °C 32 40132 1 = 1 °C

1.33 PP 4 TEMP PP 4 TEM °C 33 40133 1 = 1 °C

1.34 ACTUAL VALUE ACT V % 34 40134 0 = 0 %10000 = 100 %

1.35 MOTOR 1 TEMP M 1 TEMP °C 35 40135 1 = 1 °C

1.36 MOTOR 2 TEMP M 2 TEMP °C 36 40136 1 = 1 °C

1.37 MOTOR TEMP EST MOTOR TE °C 37 40137 1 = 1 °C

1.38 AI5 [mA] AI5 [mA] mA 38 40138 1 = 0.001 mA

1.39 AI6 [mA] AI6 [mA] mA 39 40139 1 = 0.001 mA

1.40 DI7-12 STATUS DI7..12 40 40140

1.41 EXT RO STATUS EXT RO 41 40141

1.42 PROCESS SPEED REL P SPEED % 42 40142 1 = 1

1.43 MOTOR RUN TIME MOTOR RUN TIME

h 43 40143 1 = 10 h

No. Signal Short name Range/Unit( ) Fieldbus Equivalent

PR

OF

IBU

SP

ar. N

o.

(Ad

d 4

000

inF

MS

Mo

de)

Mo

dbu

s/M

od

bu

s P

lus

Par

. No

.

Scaling for Fieldbus

2.01 SPEED REF 2 S REF 2 rpm 51 40201 0 = 0 %20000 = 100 %of motor absolute max. speed2.02 SPEED REF 3 S REF 3 rpm 52 40202

2.09 TORQ REF 2 T REF 2 % 59 40209 0 = 0 %10000 = 100 %of motor nominal torque2.10 TORQ REF 3 T REF 3 % 60 40210

2.13 TORQ USED REF T USED R % 63 40213

2.17 SPEED ESTIMATED SPEED ES rpm 67 40217 0 = 0 %20000 = 100 %of motor absolute max. speed

2.18 SPEED MEASURED SPEED ME rpm 68 40218 0 = 0 %20000 = 100 %of motor absolute max. speed

No. Signal Short name Range/Unit( ) Fieldbus Equivalent

PR

OF

IBU

SP

ar. N

o.

(Ad

d 4

000

inF

MS

Mo

de)

Mo

dbu

s/M

od

bus

Plu

sP

ar. N

o.

Scaling for Fieldbus

A-2 Firmware Manual

Appendix A – Complete Parameter Settings

Table A-3 Group 3 Actual Signals for fieldbus communication (each signal is a 16-bit data word).

No. Signal Short name Range/Unit( ) Fieldbus Equivalent

PR

OF

IBU

SP

ar. N

o.

(Ad

d 4

000

inF

MS

Mo

de)

Mo

dbu

s/M

od

bu

s P

lus

Par

. No

.

Scaling for Fieldbus

3.01 MAIN CTRL WORD MAIN CW 0 … 65535 (Decimal) 76 40301

The contents of these data words are detailed in Appendix C – Fieldbus Control.

For the contents of Actual Signal 3.11, see the Master/Follower Application Guide (3AFY 58962180 [English])

3.02 MAIN STATUS WORD MAIN SW 0 … 65535 (Decimal) 77 40302

3.03 AUX STATUS WORD AUX SW 0 … 65535 (Decimal) 78 40303

3.04 LIMIT WORD 1 LIMIT W1 0 … 65535 (Decimal) 79 40304

3.05 FAULT WORD 1 FAULT W1 0 … 65535 (Decimal) 80 40305

3.06 FAULT WORD 2 FAULT W2 0 … 65535 (Decimal) 81 40306

3.07 SYSTEM FAULT SYS FLT 0 … 65535 (Decimal) 82 40307

3.08 ALARM WORD 1 ALARM W 1 0 … 65535 (Decimal) 83 40308

3.09 ALARM WORD 2 ALARM W 2 0 … 65535 (Decimal) 84 40309

3.11 FOLLOWER MCW FOLL MCW 0 … 65535 (Decimal) 86 40311

3.12 INT FAULT INFO INT FAUL 0 … 65535 (Decimal) 87 40312

3.13 AUX STATUS WORD 3 AUX SW 3 0 … 65535 (Decimal) 88 40313

3.14 AUX STATUS WORD 4 AUX SW 4 0 … 65535 (Decimal) 89 40314

3.15 FAULT WORD 3 FAULT W3 0 … 65535 (Decimal) 90 40315

3.16 ALARM WORD 3 ALARM W3 0 … 65535 (Decimal) 91 40316

Firmware Manual A-3

Appendix A – Complete Parameter Settings

Table A-4 Parameter Settings.

Parameter Alternative Settings( ) Fieldbus Equivalent

PR

OF

IBU

SP

ar. N

o.

(Ad

d 4

000

inF

MS

Mo

de)

Mo

dbu

s/M

od

bu

s P

lus

Par

. No

.

Scaling for Fieldbus

99 START-UP DATA

99.01 LANGUAGE (0) ENGLISH; (1) ENGLISH(AM); (2) DEUTSCH;(3) ITALIANO; (4) ESPANOL; (5) PORTUGUES;(6) NEDERLANDS; (7) FRANCAIS; (8) DANSK;(9) SUOMI; (10) SVENSKA

1926 49901 (see Alternative Settings)

99.02 APPLICATION MACRO (1) FACTORY; (2) HAND/AUTO; (3) PID CTRL; (4) T CTRL;(5) SEQ CTRL; (6) USER 1 LOAD; (7) USER 1 SAVE;(8) USER 2 LOAD; (9) USER 2 SAVE

1927 49902 (see Alternative Settings)

99.03 APPLIC RESTORE (0) NO; (1) YES 1928 49903 (see Alternative Settings)

99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE (0) DTC; (1) SCALAR 1929 49904 (see Alternative Settings)

99.05 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE 1/2 · UN of ACS 600 … 2 · UN of ACS 600 (printed on the motor nameplate)

1930 49905 1 = 1 V

99.06 MOTOR NOM CURRENT 1/6 · I2hd of ACS 600 … 2 · I2hd of ACS 600 (printed on the motor nameplate)

1931 49906 1 = 0.1 A

99.07 MOTOR NOM FREQ 8 Hz … 300 Hz (printed on the motor nameplate) 1932 49907 1 = 0.01 Hz

99.08 MOTOR NOM SPEED 1 rpm … 18000 rpm (printed on the motor nameplate) 1933 49908 1 = 1 rpm

99.09 MOTOR NOM POWER 0 kW … 9000 kW (printed on the motor nameplate) 1934 49909 1 = 0.1 kW

99.10 MOTOR ID RUN (1) NO; (2) STANDARD; (3) REDUCED 1935 49910 (see Alternative Settings)

10 START/STOP/DIR

10.01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR (1) NOT SEL; (2) DI1; (3) DI1,2; (4) DI1P,2P; (5) DI1P,2P,3;(6) DI1P,2P,3P; (7) DI6; (8) DI6,5; (9) KEYPAD;(10) COMM. MODULE; (11) DI7; (12) DI7,8; (13) DI7P,8P; (14) DI7P,8P,9; (15) DI7P,8P,9P

101 41001 (see Alternative Settings)

10.02 EXT2 STRT/STP/DIR (1) NOT SEL; (2) DI1; (3) DI1,2; (4) DI1P,2P; (5) DI1P,2P,3;(6) DI1P,2P,3P; (7) DI6; (8) DI6,5; (9) KEYPAD;(10) COMM. MODULE; (11) DI7; (12) DI7,8; (13) DI7P,8P; (14) DI7P,8P,9; (15) DI7P,8P,9P

102 41002 (see Alternative Settings)

10.03 DIRECTION (1) FORWARD; (2) REVERSE; (3) REQUEST 103 41003 (see Alternative Settings)

11 REFERENCE SELECT

11.01 KEYPAD REF SEL (1) REF1(rpm); (2) REF2(%) 126 41101 (see Alternative Settings)

11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT (1) DI1; (2) DI2; (3) DI3; (4) DI4; (5) DI5; (6) DI6; (7) EXT1;(8) EXT2; (9) COMM. MODULE; (10) DI7; (11) DI8; (12) DI9; (13) DI10; (14) DI11; (15) DI12;

127 41102 (see Alternative Settings)

11.03 EXT REF1 SELECT (1) KEYPAD; (2) AI1; (3) AI2; (4) AI3; (5) AI1/JOYST;(6) AI2/JOYST; (7) AI1+AI3; (8) AI2+AI3; (9) AI1-AI3;(10) AI2-AI3; (11) AI1*AI3; (12) AI2*AI3; (13) MIN(AI1,AI3);(14) MIN(AI2,AI3); (15) MAX(AI1,AI3); (16) MAX(AI2,AI3);(17) DI3U,4D(R); (18) DI3U,4D; (19) DI5U,6D;(20) COMM. REF; (21) COMMREF+AI1; (22) COMMREF*AI1; (23) FAST COMM; (24) COMMREF+AI5; (25) COMMREF*AI5; (26) AI5; (27) AI6; (28) AI5/JOYST; (29) AI6/JOYST; (30) AI5+AI6; (31) AI5-AI6; (32) AI5*AI6; (33) MIN(AI5,6); (34) MAX(AI5,6); (35) DI11U,12D(R); (36) DI11U,12D

128 41103 (see Alternative Settings)

11.04 EXT REF1 MINIMUM 0 … 18000 rpm 129 41104 1 = 1 rpm

11.05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM 0 … 18000 rpm 130 41105 1 = 1 rpm

11.06 EXT REF2 SELECT (1) KEYPAD; (2) AI1; (3) AI2; (4) AI3; (5) AI1/JOYST;(6) AI2/JOYST; (7) AI1+AI3; (8) AI2+AI3; (9) AI1-AI3;(10) AI2-AI3; (11) AI1*AI3; (12) AI2*AI3; (13) MIN(AI1,AI3);(14) MIN(AI2,AI3); (15) MAX(AI1,AI3); (16) MAX(AI2,AI3);(17) DI3U,4D(R); (18) DI3U,4D; (19) DI5U,6D;(20) COMM. REF; (21) COMMREF+AI1; (22) COMMREF*AI1; (23) FAST COMM; (24) COMMREF+AI5; (25) COMMREF*AI5; (26) AI5; (27) AI6; (28) AI5/JOYST; (29) AI6/JOYST; (30) AI5+AI6; (31) AI5-AI6; (32) AI5*AI6; (33) MIN(AI5,6); (34) MAX(AI5,6); (35) DI11U,12D(R); (36) DI11U,12D

131 41106 (see Alternative Settings)

A-4 Firmware Manual

Appendix A – Complete Parameter Settings

11.07 EXT REF2 MINIMUM 0 % … 100 % 132 41107 0 = 0 %10000 = 100 %

11.08 EXT REF2 MAXIMUM 0 % … 500 % 133 41108 0 = 0 %5000 = 500 %

12 CONSTANT SPEEDS

12.01 CONST SPEED SEL (1) NOT SEL; (2) DI1 (SPEED1); (3) DI2 (SPEED2);(4) DI3 (SPEED3); (5) DI4 (SPEED4); (6) DI5 (SPEED5); (7) DI6 (SPEED6); (8) DI1,2; (9) DI3,4; (10) DI5,6;(11) DI1,2,3; (12) DI3,4,5; (13) DI4,5,6; (14) DI3,4,5,6; (15) DI7(SPEED1); (16) DI8 (SPEED2); (17) DI9(SPEED3); (18) DI10 (SPEED4); (19) DI11(SPEED5); (20) DI12 (SPEED6); (21) DI7,8; (22) DI9,10; (23) DI11,12

151 41201 (see Alternative Settings)

12.02 CONST SPEED 1 0 … 18000 rpm 152 41202 1 = 1 rpm

12.03 CONST SPEED 2 0 … 18000 rpm 153 41203

12.04 CONST SPEED 3 0 … 18000 rpm 154 41204

12.05 CONST SPEED 4 0 … 18000 rpm 155 41205

12.06 CONST SPEED 5 0 … 18000 rpm 156 41206

12.07 CONST SPEED 6 0 … 18000 rpm 157 41207

12.08 CONST SPEED 7 0 … 18000 rpm 158 41208

12.09 CONST SPEED 8 0 … 18000 rpm 159 41209

12.10 CONST SPEED 9 0 … 18000 rpm 160 41210

12.11 CONST SPEED 10 0 … 18000 rpm 161 41211

12.12 CONST SPEED 11 0 … 18000 rpm 162 41212

12.13 CONST SPEED 12 0 … 18000 rpm 163 41213

12.14 CONST SPEED 13 0 … 18000 rpm 164 41214

12.15 CONST SPEED 14 0 … 18000 rpm 165 41215

12.16 CONST SPEED 15 -18000 … 18000 rpm 166 41216

13 ANALOGUE INPUTS

13.01 MINIMUM AI1 (1) 0 V; (2) 2 V; (3) TUNED VALUE; (4) TUNE 176 41301 (see Alternative Settings)

13.02 MAXIMUM AI1 (1) 10 V; (2) TUNED VALUE; (3) TUNE 177 41302 (see Alternative Settings)

13.03 SCALE AI1 0 … 100 % 178 41303 0 = 0 %10000 = 100 %

13.04 FILTER AI1 0.00 s … 10.00 s 179 41304 0 = 0 s1000 = 10 s

13.05 INVERT AI1 (0) NO; (65535) YES 180 41305 (see Alternative Settings)

13.06 MINIMUM AI2 (1) 0 mA; (2) 4 mA; (3) TUNED VALUE; (4) TUNE 181 41306 (see Alternative Settings)

13.07 MAXIMUM AI2 (1) 20 mA; (2) TUNED VALUE; (3) TUNE 182 41307 (see Alternative Settings)

13.08 SCALE AI2 0 … 100 % 183 41308 0 = 0 %10000 = 100 %

13.09 FILTER AI2 0.00 s … 10.00 s 184 41309 0 = 0 s1000 = 10 s

13.10 INVERT AI2 (0) NO; (65535) YES 185 41310 (see Alternative Settings)

13.11 MINIMUM AI3 (1) 0 mA; (2) 4 mA; (3) TUNED VALUE; (4) TUNE 186 41311 (see Alternative Settings)

13.12 MAXIMUM AI3 (1) 20 mA; (2) TUNED VALUE; (3) TUNE 187 41312 (see Alternative Settings)

13.13 SCALE AI3 0 … 100 % 188 41313 0 = 0 %10000 = 100 %

13.14 FILTER AI3 0.00 s … 10.00 s 189 41314 0 = 0 s1000 = 10 s

13.15 INVERT AI3 (0) NO; (65535) YES 190 41315 (see Alternative Settings)

13.16 MINIMUM AI5 (1) 0 mA; (2) 4 mA; (3) TUNED VALUE; (4) TUNE 191 41316 (see Alternative Settings)

Parameter Alternative Settings( ) Fieldbus Equivalent

PR

OF

IBU

SP

ar. N

o.

(Ad

d 4

000

inF

MS

Mo

de)

Mo

dbu

s/M

od

bus

Plu

sP

ar. N

o.

Scaling for Fieldbus

Firmware Manual A-5

Appendix A – Complete Parameter Settings

13.17 MAXIMUM AI5 (1) 20 mA; (2) TUNED VALUE; (3) TUNE 192 41317 (see Alternative Settings)

13.18 SCALE AI5 0 … 100 % 193 41318 0 = 0 %10000 = 100 %

13.19 FILTER AI5 0.00 s … 10.00 s 194 41319 0 = 0 s1000 = 10 s

13.20 INVERT AI5 (0) NO; (65535) YES 195 41320 (see Alternative Settings)

13.21 MINIMUM AI6 (1) 0 mA; (2) 4 mA; (3) TUNED VALUE; (4) TUNE 196 41321 (see Alternative Settings)

13.22 MAXIMUM AI6 (1) 20 mA; (2) TUNED VALUE; (3) TUNE 197 41322 (see Alternative Settings)

13.23 SCALE AI6 0 … 100 % 198 41323 0 = 0 %10000 = 100 %

13.24 FILTER AI6 0.00 s … 10.00 s 199 41324 0 = 0 s1000 = 10 s

13.25 INVERT AI6 (0) NO; (65535) YES 200 41325 (see Alternative Settings)

14 RELAY OUTPUTS

14.01 RELAY RO1 OUTPUT Relay outputs 1, 2 & 3: (1) NOT USED; (2) READY;(3) RUNNING; (4) FAULT; (5) FAULT(-1); (6) FAULT(RST);(7) STALL WARN; (8) STALL FLT; (9) MOT TEMP WRN;(10) MOT TEMP FLT; (11) ACS TEMP WRN;(12) ACS TEMP FLT; (13) FAULT/WARN; (14) WARNING;(15) REVERSED; (16) EXT CTRL; (17) REF 2 SEL;(18) CONST SPEED; (19) DC OVERVOLT;(20) DC UNDERVOL; (21) SPEED 1 LIM; (22) SPEED 2 LIM;(23) CURRENT LIM; (24) REF 1 LIM; (25) REF 2 LIM;(26) TORQUE 1 LIM; (27) TORQUE 2 LIM; (28) STARTED;(29) LOSS OF REF; (30) AT SPEED; (33) COMM MODULE; (34) POINTERx; (35) BRAKE CTRLRelay output 1 & 2: (31) ACT 1 LIM; (32) ACT 2 LIMRelay output 3: (31) MAGN READY; (32) USER 2 SEL

201 41401 (see Alternative Settings)

14.02 RELAY RO2 OUTPUT 202 41402

14.03 RELAY RO3 OUTPUT 203 41403

14.04 RO1 TON DELAY 0.0 to 3600.0 s 204 41404 10 = 1 s

14.05 RO1 TOFF DELAY 0.0 to 3600.0 s 205 41405 10 = 1 s

14.06 RO2 TON DELAY 0.0 to 3600.0 s 206 41406 10 = 1 s

14.07 RO2 TOFF DELAY 0.0 to 3600.0 s 207 41407 10 = 1 s

14.08 RO3 TON DELAY 0.0 to 3600.0 s 208 41408 10 = 1 s

14.09 RO3 TOFF DELAY 0.0 to 3600.0 s 209 41409 10 = 1 s

14.10 NDIO MOD1 RO1 (1) READY; (2) RUNNING; (3) FAULT; (4) WARNING; (5) REF 2 SEL; (6) AT SPEED; (7) POINTER1

210 41410 (see Alternative Settings)

14.11 NDIO MOD1 RO2 (1) READY; (2) RUNNING; (3) FAULT; (4) WARNING; (5) REF 2 SEL; (6) AT SPEED; (7) POINTER2

211 41411 (see Alternative Settings)

14.12 NDIO MOD2 RO1 (1) READY; (2) RUNNING; (3) FAULT; (4) WARNING; (5) REF 2 SEL; (6) AT SPEED; (7) POINTER3

212 41412 (see Alternative Settings)

14.13 NDIO MOD2 RO2 (1) READY; (2) RUNNING; (3) FAULT; (4) WARNING; (5) REF 2 SEL; (6) AT SPEED; (7) POINTER4

213 41413 (see Alternative Settings)

14.14 NDIO MOD3 RO1 (1) READY; (2) RUNNING; (3) FAULT; (4) WARNING; (5) REF 2 SEL; (6) AT SPEED; (7) POINTER5

214 41414 (see Alternative Settings)

14.15 NDIO MOD3 RO2 (1) READY; (2) RUNNING; (3) FAULT; (4) WARNING; (5) REF 2 SEL; (6) AT SPEED; (7) POINTER6

215 41415 (see Alternative Settings)

15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS

15.01 ANALOGUE OUTPUT1 (1) NOT USED; (2) P SPEED; (3) SPEED; (4) FREQUENCY;(5) CURRENT; (6) TORQUE; (7) POWER; (8) DC BUS VOLT;(9) OUTPUT VOLT; (10) APPL OUTPUT; (11) REFERENCE;(12) CONTROL DEV; (13) ACTUAL 1; (14) ACTUAL 2; (15) COMM. MODULE; (16) M1 TEMP MEAS

226 41501 (see Alternative Settings)

15.02 INVERT AO1 (0) NO; (65535) YES 227 41502 (see Alternative Settings)

15.03 MINIMUM AO1 (1) 0 mA; (2) 4 mA 228 41503 (see Alternative Settings)

Parameter Alternative Settings( ) Fieldbus Equivalent

PR

OF

IBU

SP

ar. N

o.

(Ad

d 4

000

inF

MS

Mo

de)

Mo

dbu

s/M

od

bus

Plu

sP

ar. N

o.

Scaling for Fieldbus

A-6 Firmware Manual

Appendix A – Complete Parameter Settings

15.04 FILTER AO1 0.00 s … 10.00 s 229 41504 0 = 0 s1000 = 10 s

15.05 SCALE AO1 10 % … 1000 % 230 41505 100 = 10 %10000 = 1000 %

15.06 ANALOGUE OUTPUT2 (1) NOT USED; (2) P SPEED; (3) SPEED; (4) FREQUENCY;(5) CURRENT; (6) TORQUE; (7) POWER; (8) DC BUS VOLT;(9) OUTPUT VOLT; (10) APPL OUTPUT; (11) REFERENCE;(12) CONTROL DEV; (13) ACTUAL 1; (14) ACTUAL 2; (15) COMM. MODULE

231 41506 (see Alternative Settings)

15.07 INVERT AO2 (0) NO; (65535) YES 232 41507 (see Alternative Settings)

15.08 MINIMUM AO2 (1) 0 mA; (2) 4 mA 233 41508 (see Alternative Settings)

15.09 FILTER AO2 0.00 s … 10.00 s 234 41509 0 = 0 s1000 = 10 s

15.10 SCALE AO2 10 % … 1000 % 235 41510 100 = 10 %10000 = 1000 %

16 SYSTEM CTR INPUTS

16.01 RUN ENABLE (1) YES; (2) DI1; (3) DI2; (4) DI3; (5) DI4; (6) DI5; (7) DI6; (8) COMM. MODULE; (9) DI7; (10) DI8; (11) DI9; (12) DI10; (13) DI11; (14) DI12

251 41601 (see Alternative Settings)

16.02 PARAMETER LOCK (0) OPEN; (65535) LOCKED 252 41602 (see Alternative Settings)

16.03 PASS CODE 0 … 30000 253 41603 1 = 1

16.04 FAULT RESET SEL (1) NOT SEL; (2) DI1; (3) DI2; (4) DI3; (5) DI4; (6) DI5;(7) DI6; (8) ON STOP; (9) COMM. MODULE; (10) DI7; (11) DI8; (12) DI9; (13) DI10; (14) DI11; (15) DI12

254 41604 (see Alternative Settings)

16.05 USER MACRO IO CHG (1) NOT SEL; (2) DI1; (3) DI2; (4) DI3; (5) DI4; (6) DI5;(7) DI6; (8) DI7; (9) DI8; (10) DI9; (11) DI10; (12) DI11; (13) DI12

255 41605 (see Alternative Settings)

16.06 LOCAL LOCK (0) OFF; (65535) ON 256 41606 (see Alternative Settings)

16.07 PARAM SAVE (0) DONE; (1) SAVE.. 257 41607 (see Alternative Settings)

20 LIMITS

20.01 MINIMUM SPEED -18000/(number of pole pairs) rpm … 20.2 MAXIMUM SPEED 351 42001 1 = 1 rpm

20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED 20.1 MINIMUM SPEED … 18000/(number of pole pairs) rpm 352 42002 1 = 1 rpm

20.03 MAXIMUM CURRENT 0.0 % Ihd … 200.0 % Ihd 353 42003 0 = 0 %20000 = 200 %

20.04 MAXIMUM TORQUE 0.0 % … 600.0 % 354 42004 100 = 1 %

20.05 OVERVOLTAGE CTRL (0) NO; (65535) YES 355 42005 (see Alternative Settings)

20.06 UNDERVOLTAGE CTRL (0) NO; (65535) YES 356 42006 (see Alternative Settings)

20.07 MINIMUM FREQ -300.00 Hz … 50 Hz (visible only when the SCALAR motor control mode is selected)

357 42007 -30000 = -300 Hz5000 = 50 Hz

20.08 MAXIMUM FREQ -50 Hz … 300.00 Hz (visible only when the SCALAR motor control mode is selected)

358 42008 -5000 = -50 Hz30000 = 300 Hz

20.09 MIN TORQ SELECTOR (0) -MAX TORQ; (65535) SET MIN TORQ 359 42009 (see Alternative Settings)

20.10 SET MIN TORQUE -600.0 % … 0.0 % 360 42010 100 = 1%

20.11 P MOTORING LIMIT 0% … 600% 361 42011 100 = 1%

20.12 P GENERATING LIMIT -600% … 0% 362 42012 100 = 1%

21 START/STOP

21.01 START FUNCTION (1) AUTO; (2) DC MAGN; (3) CNST DC MAGN 376 42101 (see Alternative Settings)

21.02 CONST MAGN TIME 30.0 ms … 10000.0 ms 377 42102 1 = 1 ms

21.03 STOP FUNCTION (1) COAST; (2) RAMP 378 42103 (see Alternative Settings)

Parameter Alternative Settings( ) Fieldbus Equivalent

PR

OF

IBU

SP

ar. N

o.

(Ad

d 4

000

inF

MS

Mo

de)

Mo

dbu

s/M

od

bus

Plu

sP

ar. N

o.

Scaling for Fieldbus

Firmware Manual A-7

Appendix A – Complete Parameter Settings

21.04 DC HOLD (0) NO; (65535) YES 379 42104 (see Alternative Settings)

21.05 DC HOLD SPEED 0 rpm … 3000 rpm 380 42105 1 = 1 rpm

21.06 DC HOLD CURR 0 % … 100 % 381 42106 1 = 1 %

21.07 RUN ENABLE FUNC (1) RAMP STOP; (2) COAST STOP; (3) OFF2 STOP; (4) OFF3 STOP

382 42107 (see Alternative Settings)

21.08 SCALAR FLY START (0) NO; (1) YES 383 42108

22 ACCEL/DECEL

22.01 ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL (1) ACC/DEC 1; (2) ACC/DEC 2; (3) DI1; (4) DI2; (5) DI3; (6) DI4; (7) DI5; (8) DI6; (9) DI7; (10) DI8; (11) DI9; (12) DI10; (13) DI11; (14) DI12

401 42201 (see Alternative Settings)

22.02 ACCEL TIME 1 0.00 s … 1800.00 s 402 42202 0 = 0 s18000 = 1800 s

22.03 DECEL TIME 1 0.00 s … 1800.00 s 403 42203

22.04 ACCEL TIME 2 0.00 s … 1800.00 s 404 42204

22.05 DECEL TIME 2 0.00 s … 1800.00 s 405 42205

22.06 ACC/DEC RAMP SHPE 0.00 s … 1000.00 s 406 42206 100 = 1 s

22.07 EM STOP RAMP TIME 0.00 s … 2000.00 s 407 42207 100 = 1 s

23 SPEED CTRL Visible only with 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE = DTC

23.01 GAIN 0.0 … 200.0 426 42301 0 = 010000 = 100

23.02 INTEGRATION TIME 0.01 s … 999.97 s 427 42302 1000 = 1 s

23.03 DERIVATION TIME 0.0 ms … 9999.8 ms 428 42303 1 = 1 ms

23.04 ACC COMPENSATION 0.00 s … 999.98 s 429 42304 0 = 0 s1 = 0.1 s

23.05 SLIP GAIN 0.0 % … 400.0 % 430 42305 1 = 1 %

23.06 AUTOTUNE RUN (0) NO; (65535) YES 431 42306 (see Alternative Settings)

24 TORQUE CTRL (Visible with 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO = T CTRL)

24.01 TORQ RAMP UP 0.00 s … 120.00 s 451 42401 0 = 0 s100 = 1 s

24.02 TORQ RAMP DOWN 0.00 s … 120.00 s 452 42402

25 CRITICAL SPEEDS

25.01 CRIT SPEED SELECT (0) OFF; (65535) ON 476 42501 (see Alternative Settings)

25.02 CRIT SPEED 1 LOW 0 rpm … 18000 rpm 477 42502 1 = 1 rpm

25.03 CRIT SPEED 1 HIGH 0 rpm … 18000 rpm 478 42503

25.04 CRIT SPEED 2 LOW 0 rpm … 18000 rpm 479 42504

25.05 CRIT SPEED 2 HIGH 0 rpm … 18000 rpm 480 42505

25.06 CRIT SPEED 3 LOW 0 rpm … 18000 rpm 481 42506

25.07 CRIT SPEED 3 HIGH 0 rpm … 18000 rpm 482 42507

26 MOTOR CONTROL

26.01 FLUX OPTIMIZATION (0) NO; (65535) YES 501 42601 (see Alternative Settings)

26.02 FLUX BRAKING (0) NO; (65535) YES 502 42602 (see Alternative Settings)

26.03 IR COMPENSATION 0 % … 30 % (visible only with 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE set to SCALAR)

503 42603 100 = 1 %

26.05 HEX FIELD WEAKEN (0) NO; (1) YES 504 42605

Parameter Alternative Settings( ) Fieldbus Equivalent

PR

OF

IBU

SP

ar. N

o.

(Ad

d 4

000

inF

MS

Mo

de)

Mo

dbu

s/M

od

bus

Plu

sP

ar. N

o.

Scaling for Fieldbus

A-8 Firmware Manual

Appendix A – Complete Parameter Settings

30 FAULT FUNCTIONS

30.01 AI<MIN FUNCTION (1) FAULT; (2) NO; (3) CONST SP 15; (4) LAST SPEED 601 43001 (see Alternative Settings)

30.02 PANEL LOSS (1) FAULT; (2) CONST SP 15; (3) LAST SPEED 602 43002 (see Alternative Settings)

30.03 EXTERNAL FAULT (1) NOT SEL; (2) DI1; (3) DI2; (4) DI3; (5) DI4; (6) DI5; (7) DI6; (8) DI7; (9) DI8; (10) DI9; (11) DI10; (12) DI11; (13) DI12

603 43003 (see Alternative Settings)

30.04 MOTOR THERM PROT (1) FAULT; (2) WARNING; (3) NO 604 43004 (see Alternative Settings)

30.05 MOT THERM P MODE (1) DTC; (2) USER MODE; (3) THERMISTOR 605 43005 (see Alternative Settings)

30.06 MOTOR THERM TIME 256.0 s … 9999.8 s 606 43006 1 = 1 s

30.07 MOTOR LOAD CURVE 50.0 % … 150.0 % 607 43007 1 = 1 %

30.08 ZERO SPEED LOAD 25.0 % … 150.0 % 608 43008 1 = 1 %

30.09 BREAK POINT 1.0 Hz … 300.0 Hz 609 43009 100 = 1 Hz30000 = 300 Hz

30.10 STALL FUNCTION (1) FAULT; (2) WARNING; (3) NO 610 43010 (see Alternative Settings)

30.11 STALL FREQ HI 0.5 Hz … 50.0 Hz 611 43011 50 = 0.5 Hz5000 = 50 Hz

30.12 STALL TIME 10.00 s … 400.00 s 612 43012 1 = 1 s

30.13 UNDERLOAD FUNC (1) NO; (2) WARNING; (3) FAULT 613 43013 (see Alternative Settings)

30.14 UNDERLOAD TIME 0 s … 600 s 614 43014 1 = 1 s

30.15 UNDERLOAD CURVE 1 … 5 615 43015 (see Alternative Settings)

30.16 MOTOR PHASE LOSS (0) NO; (65535) FAULT 616 43016 (see Alternative Settings)

30.17 EARTH FAULT (0) WARNING; (65535) FAULT 617 43017 (see Alternative Settings)

30.18 COMM FAULT FUNC (1) FAULT; (2) NO; (3) CONST SP 15; (4) LAST SPEED 618 43018 (see Alternative Settings)

30.19 MAIN ERF DS T-OUT 0.1 s … 60.0 s 619 43019 10 = 0.1 s6000 = 60 s

30.20 COMM FAULT RO/AO (0) ZER0; (65535) LAST VALUE 620 43020 (see Alternative Settings)

30.21 AUX DS T-OUT 0.1 s … 60.0 s 621 43021 10 = 0.1 s6000 = 60 s

30.22 IO CONF FUNC (1) NO; (2) WARNING 622 43022 (see Alternative Settings)

31 AUTOMATIC RESET

31.01 NUMBER OF TRIALS 0 … 5 626 43101

31.02 TRIAL TIME 1.0 s … 180.0 s 627 43102 100 = 1 s18000 = 180 s

31.03 DELAY TIME 0.0 s … 3.0 s 628 43103 0 = 0 s300 = 3 s

31.04 OVERCURRENT (0) NO; (65535) YES 629 43104 (see Alternative Settings)

31.05 OVERVOLTAGE (0) NO; (65535) YES 630 43105 (see Alternative Settings)

31.06 UNDERVOLTAGE (0) NO; (65535) YES 631 43106 (see Alternative Settings)

31.07 AI SIGNAL<MIN (0) NO; (65535) YES 632 43107 (see Alternative Settings)

32 SUPERVISION

32.01 SPEED1 FUNCTION (1) NO; (2) LOW LIMIT; (3) HIGH LIMIT; (4) ABS LOW LIMIT 651 43201 (see Alternative Settings)

32.02 SPEED1 LIMIT — 18000 rpm … 18000 rpm 652 43202 1 = 1 rpm

32.03 SPEED2 FUNCTION (1) NO; (2) LOW LIMIT; (3) HIGH LIMIT; (4) ABS LOW LIMIT 653 43203 (see Alternative Settings)

32.04 SPEED2 LIMIT — 18000 rpm … 18000 rpm 654 43204 1 = 1 rpm

32.05 CURRENT FUNCTION (1) NO; (2) LOW LIMIT; (3) HIGH LIMIT 655 43205 (see Alternative Settings)

32.06 CURRENT LIMIT 0 … 1000 A 656 43206 1 = 1 A

Parameter Alternative Settings( ) Fieldbus Equivalent

PR

OF

IBU

SP

ar. N

o.

(Ad

d 4

000

inF

MS

Mo

de)

Mo

dbu

s/M

od

bus

Plu

sP

ar. N

o.

Scaling for Fieldbus

Firmware Manual A-9

Appendix A – Complete Parameter Settings

32.07 TORQUE 1 FUNCTION (1) NO; (2) LOW LIMIT; (3) HIGH LIMIT 657 43207 (see Alternative Settings)

32.08 TORQUE 1 LIMIT -400 % … 400 % 658 43208 10 = 1 %

32.09 TORQUE 2 FUNCTION (1) NO; (2) LOW LIMIT; (3) HIGH LIMIT 659 43209 (see Alternative Settings)

32.10 TORQUE 2 LIMIT -400 % … 400 % 660 43210 10 = 1 %

32.11 REF1 FUNCTION (1) NO; (2) LOW LIMIT; (3) HIGH LIMIT 661 43211 (see Alternative Settings)

32.12 REF1 LIMIT 0 rpm … 18000 rpm 662 43212 1 = 1 rpm

32.13 REF2 FUNCTION (1) NO; (2) LOW LIMIT; (3) HIGH LIMIT 663 43213 (see Alternative Settings)

32.14 REF2 LIMIT 0 % … 500 % 664 43214 10 = 1 %

32.15 ACT1 FUNCTION (1) NO; (2) LOW LIMIT; (3) HIGH LIMIT 665 43215 (see Alternative Settings)

32.16 ACT1 LIMIT 0 % … 200 % 666 43216 0 = 0 %10 = 1 %

32.17 ACT2 FUNCTION (1) NO; (2) LOW LIMIT; (3) HIGH LIMIT 667 43217 (see Alternative Settings)

32.18 ACT2 LIMIT 0 % … 200 % 668 43218 0 = 0 %10 = 1%

33 INFORMATION

33.01 SOFTWARE VERSION (Version of the ACS 600 software) 676 43301

33.02 APPL SW VERSION (Version of the ACS 600 software) 677 43302

33.03 TEST DATE (Date Tested) 678 43303

34 PROCESS VARIABLE

34.01 SCALE 0.00 … 100000.00 701 43401 1 = 1

34.02 P VAR UNIT (1) NO; (2) rpm; (3) %; (4) m/s; (5) A; (6) V; (7) Hz; (8) s; (9) h; (10) kh; (11) C; (12) lft; (13) mA; (14) mV; (15) kW; (16) W; (17) kWh; (18) F; (19) hp; (20) MWh; (21) m3h; (22) l/s; (23) bar; (24) kPa; (25) GPM; (26) PSI; (27) CFM; (28) ft; (29) MGD ; (30) iHg; (31) FPM;

702 43402 (see Alternative Settings)

34.03 SELECT P VAR 0 to 9999 703 43403

34.04 MOTOR SP FILT TIM 0 to 20000 ms 704 43404 1 = 1

34.05 TORQ ACT FILT TIM 0. to 20000 ms 705 43405 1 = 1

34.06 RESET RUN TIME (0) NO; (65535) YES 706 43406 (see Alternative Settings)

35 MOT TEMP MEAS

35.01 MOT 1 TEMP AI1 SEL (1) NOT IN USE; (2) 1XPT100; (3) 2XPT100, (4) 3XPT100, (5) 1..3 PTC

726 43501 (see Alternative Settings)

35.02 MOT 1 TEMP ALM L -10 to 5000 ohm/°C (PTC/Pt100) 727 43502 1 = 1

35.03 MOT 1 TEMP FLT L -10 to 5000 ohm/°C (PTC/Pt100) 728 43503 1 = 1

35.04 MOT 2 TEMP AI2 SEL (1) NOT IN USE; (2) 1XPT100; (3) 2XPT100; (4) 3XPT100; (5) 1..3 PTC

729 43504 (see Alternative Settings)

35.05 MOT 2 TEMP ALM L -10 … 180°C (Pt 100) or 0 … 5000 ohm (PTC) 730 43505 1 = 1

35.06 MOT 2 TEMP FLT L -10 … 180°C (Pt 100) or 0 … 5000 ohm (PTC) 731 43506 1 = 1

35.07 MOT MOD COMPENSAT (1) NO; (0) YES 732 43507 (see Alternative Settings)

40 PID CONTROL (40.14 TRIM MODE to 40.18 TRIM SELECTION: not visible with 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO = PID CTRL, 40.18 TRIM SELECTION: visible only when 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO = T CTRL, 40.20 SLEEP SELECTION to 40.24 WAKE UP DELAY: visible only when 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO = PID CTRL)

40.01 PID GAIN 0.1 … 100.0 851 44001 10 = 0.110000 = 100

Parameter Alternative Settings( ) Fieldbus Equivalent

PR

OF

IBU

SP

ar. N

o.

(Ad

d 4

000

inF

MS

Mo

de)

Mo

dbu

s/M

od

bus

Plu

sP

ar. N

o.

Scaling for Fieldbus

A-10 Firmware Manual

Appendix A – Complete Parameter Settings

40.02 PID INTEG TIME 0.02 s … 320.00 s 852 44002 2 = 0.02 s32000 = 320 s

40.03 PID DERIV TIME 0.00 s … 10.00 s 853 44003 0 = 0 s1000 = 10 s

40.04 PID DERIV FILTER 0.04 s … 10.00 s 854 44004 4 = 0.04 s1000 = 10 s

40.05 ERROR VALUE INV (0) NO; (65535) YES 855 44005 (see Alternative Settings)

40.06 ACTUAL VALUE SEL (1) ACT1; (2) ACT1 — ACT2; (3) ACT1 + ACT2;(4) ACT1 * ACT2; (5) ACT1/ACT2; (6) MIN(A1,A2);(7) MAX(A1,A2); (8) sqrt(A1 — A2); (9) sqA1 + sqA2

856 44006 (see Alternative Settings)

40.07 ACTUAL1 INPUT SEL (1) AI1; (2) AI2; (3) AI3; (4) AI5; (5) AI6; (6) CURRENT; (7) TORQUE; (8) POWER

857 44007 (see Alternative Settings)

40.08 ACTUAL2 INPUT SEL (1) AI1; (2) AI2; (3) AI3; (4) AI5; (5) AI6; (6) CURRENT; (7) TORQUE; (8) POWER

858 44008 (see Alternative Settings)

40.09 ACT1 MINIMUM -1000 % … 1000 % 859 44009 -10000 = -1000 %10000 = 1000 %

40.10 ACT1 MAXIMUM -1000 % … 1000 % 860 44010

40.11 ACT2 MINIMUM -1000 % … 1000 % 861 44011

40.12 ACT2 MAXIMUM -1000 % … 1000 % 862 44012

40.13 PID INTEGRATION (1) OFF; (2) ON 863 44013 (see Alternative Settings)

40.14 TRIM MODE (1) OFF; (2) PROPORTIONAL; (3) DIRECT 864 44014 (see Alternative Settings)

40.15 TRIM REF SEL (1) AI1; (2) AI2; (3) AI3; (4) AI5; (5) AI6; (6) PAR 40.16 865 44015 (see Alternative Settings)

40.16 TRIM REFERENCE -100.0% to 100.0% 866 44016 100 = 1%

40.17 TRIM RANGE ADJUST -100.0% to 100.0% 867 44017 100 = 1%

40.18 TRIM SELECTION (1) SPEED TRIM; (2) TORQUE TRIM 868 44018 (see Alternative Settings)

40.19 ACTUAL FILT TIME 0.04 s to 10.00s 869 44019 100 = 1 s

40.20 SLEEP SELECTION (1) OFF; (2) INTERNAL; (3) DI1; (4) DI2; (5) DI3; (6) DI4; (7) DI5; (8) DI6; (9) DI7; (10) DI8; (11) DI9; (12) DI10; (13) DI11; (14) DI12

870 44020 (see Alternative Settings)

40.21 SLEEP LEVEL 0.0 to 7200.0 rpm 871 44021 1 = 1 rpm

40.22 SLEEP DELAY 0.0 s to 3600.0 s 872 44022 10 = 1 s

40.23 WAKE UP LEVEL 0.0 % to 100.0 % 873 44023 100 = 1%

40.24 WAKE UP DELAY 0.0 s to 3600.0 s 874 44024 10 = 1 s

42 BRAKE CONTROL (Not accessible from Profibus)

42.01 BRAKE CTRL (1) OFF; (2) ON — 44201 (see Alternative Settings)

42.02 BRAKE ACKNOWLEDGE

(1) OFF; (2) DI5; (3) DI6; (4) DI11; (5) DI12 — 44202 (see Alternative Settings)

42.03 BRAKE OPEN DELAY 0.0 to 5.0 s — 44203 100 = 1 s

42.04 BRAKE CLOSE DELAY 0.0 to 60.0 s — 44204 100 = 1 s

42.05 ABS BRAKE CLS SPD 0 to 1000 rpm — 44205 100 = 1 rpm

42.06 BRAKE FAULT FUNC (1) FAULT; (2) WARNING — 44206 (see Alternative Settings)

42.07 START TORQ REF SEL (1) NO; (2) AI1; (3) AI2; (4) AI3; (5) AI5; (6) AI6; (7) PAR 42.08 — 44207 (see Alternative Settings)

42.08 START TORQ REF -300 to 300% — 44208 100 = 1%

Group 45 FUNCTION SELECTION

(Not accessible from Profibus)

45.01 POINTER1 GRP+IND -9999 to 9999 — 1 = 1

45.02 POINTER1 BIT 0 to 15 — 1 = 1

45.03 POINTER2 GRP+IND -9999 to 9999 — 1 = 1

Parameter Alternative Settings( ) Fieldbus Equivalent

PR

OF

IBU

SP

ar. N

o.

(Ad

d 4

000

inF

MS

Mo

de)

Mo

dbu

s/M

od

bus

Plu

sP

ar. N

o.

Scaling for Fieldbus

Firmware Manual A-11

Appendix A – Complete Parameter Settings

45.04 POINTER2 BIT 0 to 15 — 1 = 1

45.05 POINTER3 GRP+IND -9999 to 9999 — 1 = 1

45.06 POINTER3 BIT 0 to 15 — 1 = 1

45.07 POINTER4 GRP+IND -9999 to 9999 — 1 = 1

45.08 POINTER4 BIT 0 to 15 — 1 = 1

45.09 POINTER5 GRP+IND -9999 to 9999 — 1 = 1

45.10 POINTER5 BIT 0 to 15 — 1 = 1

45.11 POINTER6 GRP+IND -9999 to 9999 — 1 = 1

45.12 POINTER6 BIT 0 to 15 — 1 = 1

50 ENCODER MODULE (Visible with 98.01 ENCODER MODULE set.)

50.01 PULSE NR 0 … 29999 1001 45001 1 = 1 ppr

50.02 SPEED MEAS MODE (1) A — B DIR ; (2) A-

— ; (3) A —

— B DIR ; (4) A —

— B —

— 1002 45002 (see Alternative Settings)

50.03 ENCODER FAULT (0) WARNING; (65535) FAULT 1003 45003 (see Alternative Settings)

50.04 ENCODER DELAY 5 ms… 50000 ms 1004 45004 1 = 1 ms

50.05 ENCODER CHANNEL (1) CHANNEL1; (2) CHANNEL 2 1005 45005 (see Alternative Settings)

50.06 SPEED FB SEL (0) INTERAL; (65535) ENCODER 1006 45006 (see Alternative Settings)

51 COMMUNICATION MODULE

(Visible with 98.02 COMM. MODULE LINK set. See module manual.)

1026 … 45101…

52 STANDARD MODBUS

52.01 STATION NUMBER 1 to 247 1051 45201 (see Alternative Settings)

52.02 BAUDRATE (1) 600; (2) 1200; (3) 2400; (4) 4800; (5) 9600; (6) 19200 1052 45202 (see Alternative Settings)

52.03 PARITY (1) NONE1STOPBIT; (2) NONE2STOPBIT; (3) ODD; (4) EVEN 1053 45203 (see Alternative Settings)

60 MASTER/FOLLOWER

60.01 MASTER LINK MODE (1) NOT IN USE; (2) MASTER; (3) FOLLOWER 1195 46001 (see Alternative Settings)

60.02 TORQUE SELECTOR (1) SPEED; (2) TORQUE; (3) MINIMUM; (4) MAXIMUM; (5) ADD; (6) ZERO (Visible if 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO is T CTRL)

1196 46002

60.03 WINDOW SEL ON (0) NO; (65535) YES (Visible if 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO is T CTRL)

1167 46003 (see Alternative Settings)

60.04 WINDOW WIDTH POS 0 to 1500 (Visible if 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO is T CTRL) 1198 46004 20000 = 1500

60.05 WINDOW WIDTH NEG 0 to 1500 (Visible if 99.02 APPLICATION MACRO is T CTRL) 1199 46005 20000 = 1500

60.06 DROOP RATE 0 to 100% 1200 46006 10 = 1%

60.07 MASTER SIGNAL 2 0000 to 9999 1201 46007 1 = 1

60.08 MASTER SIGNAL 3 0000 to 9999 1202 46008 1 = 1

70 DDCS CONTROL

70.01 CHANNEL 0 ADDR 1 … 125 1375 47001 (see Alternative Settings)

70.02 CHANNEL 3 ADDR 1 … 254 1376 47002 (see Alternative Settings)

70.03 CH1 BAUDRATE (0) 8Mbits; (1) 4 Mbits; (2) 2 Mbits; (3) 1 Mbits 1377 47003 (see Alternative Settings)

90 D SET REC ADDR

90.01 AUX DS REF3 0 … 8999 (Format: (X)XYY, where (X)X = Parameter Group,YY = Parameter Index)

1735 49001 (see Alternative Settings)

Parameter Alternative Settings( ) Fieldbus Equivalent

PR

OF

IBU

SP

ar. N

o.

(Ad

d 4

000

inF

MS

Mo

de)

Mo

dbu

s/M

od

bus

Plu

sP

ar. N

o.

Scaling for Fieldbus

A-12 Firmware Manual

Appendix A – Complete Parameter Settings

90.02 AUX DS REF4 0 … 8999 (Format: (X)XYY, where (X)X = Parameter Group,YY = Parameter Index)

1736 49002 (see Alternative Settings)

90.03 AUX DS REF5 0 … 8999 (Format: (X)XYY, where (X)X = Parameter Group,YY = Parameter Index)

1737 49003 (see Alternative Settings)

90.04 MAIN DS SOURCE 1 … 255 1738 49004 (see Alternative Settings)

90.05 AUX DS SOURCE 1 … 255 1739 49005 (see Alternative Settings)

92 D SET TR ADDR

92.01 MAIN DS STATUS WORD

Fixed to 302 (MAIN STATUS WORD), not visible 1771 49201 (see Alternative Settings)

92.02 MAIN DS ACT1 0 … 9999 (Format: (X)XYY, where (X)X = Parameter Group,YY = Parameter Index)

1772 49202 (see Alternative Settings)

92.03 MAIN DS ACT2 0 … 9999 (Format: (X)XYY, where (X)X = Parameter Group,YY = Parameter Index)

1773 49203 (see Alternative Settings)

92.04 AUX DS ACT3 0 … 9999 (Format: (X)XYY, where (X)X = Parameter Group,YY = Parameter Index)

1774 49204 (see Alternative Settings)

92.05 AUX DS ACT4 0 … 9999 (Format: (X)XYY, where (X)X = Parameter Group,YY = Parameter Index)

1775 49205 (see Alternative Settings)

92.06 AUX DS ACT5 0 … 9999 (Format: (X)XYY, where (X)X = Parameter Group,YY = Parameter Index)

1776 49206 (see Alternative Settings)

96 EXTERNAL AO (Visible with 98.06 AI/O EXT MODULE set to UNIPOLAR PRG or BIPOLAR PRG)

96.01 EXT AO1 (1) NOT USED; (2) P SPEED; (3) SPEED; (4) FREQUENCY;(5) CURRENT; (6) TORQUE; (7) POWER; (8) DC BUS VOLT;(9) OUTPUT VOLT; (10) APPL OUTPUT; (11) REFERENCE;(12) CONTROL DEV; (13) ACTUAL 1; (14) ACTUAL 2; (15) COMM. MODULE

1843 49601 (see Alternative Settings)

96.02 INVERT EXT AO1 (0) NO; (65535) YES 1844 49602 (see Alternative Settings)

96.03 MINIMUM EXT AO1 (1) 0 mA; (2) 4 mA; (3) 10mA 1845 49603 (see Alternative Settings)

96.04 FILTER EXT AO1 0.00 s … 10.00 s 1846 49604 0 = 0 s1000 = 10 s

96.05 SCALE EXT AO1 10 % … 1000 % 1847 49605 100 = 10 %10000 = 1000 %

96.06 EXT AO2 (1) NOT USED; (2) P SPEED; (3) SPEED; (4) FREQUENCY;(5) CURRENT; (6) TORQUE; (7) POWER; (8) DC BUS VOLT;(9) OUTPUT VOLT; (10) APPL OUTPUT; (11) REFERENCE;(12) CONTROL DEV; (13) ACTUAL 1; (14) ACTUAL 2; (15) COMM. MODULE

1848 49606 (see Alternative Settings)

96.07 INVERT EXT AO2 (0) NO; (65535) YES 1849 49607 (see Alternative Settings)

96.08 MINIMUM EXT AO2 (1) 0 mA; (2) 4 mA; (3) 10mA 1850 49608 (see Alternative Settings)

96.09 FILTER EXT AO2 0.00 s … 10.00 s 1851 49609 0 = 0 s1000 = 10 s

96.10 SCALE EXT AO2 10 % … 1000 % 1852 49610 100 = 10 %10000 = 1000 %

98 OPTION MODULES

98.01 ENCODER MODULE (0) NO; (65535) YES 1901 49801 (see Alternative Settings)

98.02 COMM. MODULE LINK (1) NO; (2) FIELDBUS; (3) ADVANT; (4) STD MODBUS; (5) CUSTOMISED

1902 49802 (see Alternative Settings)

98.03 DI/O EXT MODULE 1 (0) NO; (65535) YES 1903 49803 (see Alternative Settings)

98.04 DI/O EXT MODULE 2 (0) NO; (65535) YES 1904 49804 (see Alternative Settings)

98.05 DI/O EXT MODULE 3 (0) NO; (65535) YES 1905 49805 (see Alternative Settings)

Parameter Alternative Settings( ) Fieldbus Equivalent

PR

OF

IBU

SP

ar. N

o.

(Ad

d 4

000

inF

MS

Mo

de)

Mo

dbu

s/M

od

bus

Plu

sP

ar. N

o.

Scaling for Fieldbus

Firmware Manual A-13

Appendix A – Complete Parameter Settings

98.06 AI/O EXT MODULE (1) NO; (2) UNIPOLAR; (3) BIPOLAR; (4)UNIP AO PRG; (5) BIP AO PRG; (6)UNIP AIO PRG; (7) BIP AIO PRG

1906 49806 (see Alternative Settings)

98.07 COMM PROFILE (0) ABB DRIVES; (65535) CSA2.8/3.0 (visible only when Parameter 98.02 COMM. MODULE LINK is activated)

1907 49807 (see Alternative Settings)

98.08 NIOC-01 BOARD (1) NO; (2) YES 1908 49808 (see Alternative Settings)

98.09 NDIO1 DI FUNC (1) DI7,8; (2) REPL DI1,2 1909 49809 (see Alternative Settings)

98.10 NDIO2 DI FUNC (1) DI9.10; (2) REPL DI3,4 1910 49810 (see Alternative Settings)

98.11 NDIO3 DI FUNC (1) DI11,12; (2) REPL DI3,4 1911 49811 (see Alternative Settings)

98.12 AI/O MOTOR TEMP (1) NO; (2) UNIPOLAR 1912 49812 (see Alternative Settings)

Parameter Alternative Settings( ) Fieldbus Equivalent

PR

OF

IBU

SP

ar. N

o.

(Ad

d 4

000

inF

MS

Mo

de)

Mo

dbu

s/M

od

bus

Plu

sP

ar. N

o.

Scaling for Fieldbus

A-14 Firmware Manual

Appendix B – Default Settings of Application Macros

The table in this appendix lists all the default parameter settings of all the ACS 600 Application Macros. Use this table as reference when you are selecting and customizing macros for your ACS 600 application.

Table B-1 Default parameter settings of ACS 600 Application Macros.

Parameter Factory Hand/Auto PID Control Torque Control

Sequential Control

Custom Setting

ACTUAL SIGNALS (THREE DEFAULT SIGNALS IN THE ACTUAL SIGNAL DISPLAY MODE OF THE CONTROL PANEL)

FREQ FREQ SPEED SPEED FREQ

CURRENT CURRENT ACT VAL1 TORQUE CURRENT

POWER CTRL LOC CONT DEV CTRL LOC POWER

99 START-UP DATA

99.01 LANGUAGE ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH ENGLISH

99.02 APPLICATION MACRO FACTORY HAND/AUTO PID-CTRL T CTRL SEQ CTRL

99.03 APPLIC RESTORE NO NO NO NO NO

99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE DTC DTC DTC DTC DTC

99.05 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE 0 V 0 V 0 V 0 V 0 V

99.06 MOTOR NOM CURRENT 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A 0.0 A

99.07 MOTOR NOM FREQ 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz

99.08 MOTOR NOM SPEED 1 rpm 1 rpm 1 rpm 1 rpm 1 rpm

99.09 MOTOR NOM POWER 0.0 kW 0.0 kW 0.0 kW 0.0 kW 0.0 kW

99.10 MOTOR ID RUN NO NO NO NO NO

10 START/STOP/DIR

10.01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR DI1,2 DI1,2 DI1 DI1,2 DI1,2

10.02 EXT2 STRT/STP/DIR NOT SEL DI6,5 DI6 DI1,2 NOT SEL

10.03 DIRECTION FORWARD REQUEST FORWARD REQUEST REQUEST

11 REFERENCE SELECT

11.01 KEYPAD REF SEL REF1 (rpm) REF1 (rpm) REF1 (rpm) REF1 (rpm) REF1 (rpm)

11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT EXT1 DI3 DI3 DI3 EXT1

11.03 EXT REF1 SELECT AI1 AI1 AI1 AI1 AI1

11.04 EXT REF1 MINIMUM 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm

11.05 EXT REF1 MAXIMUM 1500 rpm 1500 rpm 1500 rpm 1500 rpm 1500 rpm

11.06 EXT REF2 SELECT KEYPAD AI2 AI1 AI2 AI1

11.07 EXT REF2 MINIMUM 0 % 0 % 0 % 0 % 0 %

11.08 EXT REF2 MAXIMUM 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 %

Firmware Manual B-1

Appendix B – Default Settings of Application Macros

12 CONSTANT SPEEDS

12.01 CONST SPEED SEL DI5,6 DI4(SPEED4) DI4(SPEED4) DI4(SPEED4) DI4,5,6

12.02 CONST SPEED 1 300 rpm 300 rpm 300 rpm 300 rpm 300 rpm

12.03 CONST SPEED 2 600 rpm 600 rpm 600 rpm 600 rpm 600 rpm

12.04 CONST SPEED 3 900 rpm 900 rpm 900 rpm 900 rpm 900 rpm

12.05 CONST SPEED 4 300 rpm 300 rpm 300 rpm 300 rpm 1200 rpm

12.06 CONST SPEED 5 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 1500 rpm

12.07 CONST SPEED 6 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 2400 rpm

12.08 CONST SPEED 7 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 3000 rpm

12.09 CONST SPEED 8 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm

12.10 CONST SPEED 9 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm

12.11 CONST SPEED 10 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm

12.12 CONST SPEED 11 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm

12.13 CONST SPEED 12 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm

12.14 CONST SPEED 13 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm

12.15 CONST SPEED 14 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm

12.16 CONST SPEED 15 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm

13 ANALOGUE INPUTS

13.01 MINIMUM AI1 0 V 0 V 0 V 0 V 0 V

13.02 MAXIMUM AI1 10 V 10 V 10 V 10 V 10 V

13.03 SCALE AI1 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 %

13.04 FILTER AI1 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s

13.05 INVERT AI1 NO NO NO NO NO

13.06 MINIMUM AI2 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA

13.07 MAXIMUM AI2 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA

13.08 SCALE AI2 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 %

13.09 FILTER AI2 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s

13.10 INVERT AI2 NO NO NO NO NO

13.11 MINIMUM AI3 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA

13.12 MAXIMUM AI3 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA

13.13 SCALE AI3 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 %

13.14 FILTER AI3 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s

13.15 INVERT AI3 NO NO NO NO NO

14 RELAY OUTPUTS

14.01 RELAY RO1 OUTPUT READY READY READY READY READY

14.02 RELAY RO2 OUTPUT RUNNING RUNNING RUNNING RUNNING RUNNING

14.03 RELAY RO3 OUTPUT FAULT(-1) FAULT(-1) FAULT(-1) FAULT(-1) FAULT(-1)

14.04 RO1 TON DELAY 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s

14.05 RO1 TOFF DELAY 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s

14.06 RO2 TON DELAY 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s

14.07 RO2 TOFF DELAY 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s

14.08 RO3 TON DELAY 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s

14.09 RO3 TOFF DELAY 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s

14.10 NDIO MOD1 RO1 READY READY READY READY READY

14.11 NDIO MOD1 RO2 RUNNING RUNNING RUNNING RUNNING RUNNING

14.12 NDIO MOD2 RO1 FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT

Parameter Factory Hand/Auto PID Control Torque Control

Sequential Control

Custom Setting

B-2 Firmware Manual

Appendix B – Default Settings of Application Macros

14.13 NDIO MOD2 RO2 WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING

14.14 NDIO MOD3 RO1 REF 2 SEL REF 2 SEL REF 2 SEL REF 2 SEL REF 2 SEL

14.15 NDIO MOD3 RO2 AT SPEED AT SPEED AT SPEED AT SPEED AT SPEED

15 ANALOGUE OUTPUTS

15.01 ANALOGUE OUTPUT 1 SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED

15.02 INVERT AO1 NO NO NO NO NO

15.03 MINIMUM AO1 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA

15.04 FILTER AO1 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s 0.10 s

15.05 SCALE AO1 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 %

15.06 ANALOGUE OUTPUT 2 CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT

15.07 INVERT AO2 NO NO NO NO NO

15.08 MINIMUM AO2 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA

15.09 FILTER ON AO2 2.00 s 2.00 s 2.00 s 2.00 s 2.00 s

15.10 SCALE AO2 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 %

16 SYSTEM CONTR INPUTS

16.01 RUN ENABLE YES YES DI5 DI6 YES

16.02 PARAMETER LOCK OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN

16.03 PASS CODE 0 0 0 0 0

16.04 FAULT RESET SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL

16.05 USER MACRO IO CHG NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL

16.06 LOCAL LOCK OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

16.07 PARAM SAVE DONE DONE DONE DONE DONE

20 LIMITS

20.01 MINIMUM SPEED (calculated) (calculated) (calculated) (calculated) (calculated)

20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED (calculated) (calculated) (calculated) (calculated) (calculated)

20.03 MAXIMUM CURRENT 200.0 % Ihd 200.0 % Ihd 200.0 % Ihd 200.0 % Ihd 200.0 % Ihd

20.04 MAXIMUM TORQUE 300.0 % 300.0 % 300.0 % 300.0 % 300.0 %

20.05 OVERVOLTAGE CTRL YES YES YES YES YES

20.06 UNDERVOLTAGE CTRL YES YES YES YES YES

20.07 MINIMUM FREQ — 50 Hz — 50 Hz — 50 Hz — 50 Hz — 50 Hz

20.08 MAXIMUM FREQ 50 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz

20.09 MIN TORQ SELECTOR -MAX TORQ -MAX TORQ -MAX TORQ -MAX TORQ -MAX TORQ

20.10 SET MIN TORQUE -300.0 % -300.0 % -300.0 % -300.0 % -300.0 %

20.11 P MOTORING LIMIT 300% 300% 300% 300% 300%

20.12 P GENERATING LIMIT -300% -300% -300% -300% -300%

21 START/STOP

21.01 START FUNCTION AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO

21.02 CONST MAGN TIME 500.0 ms 500.0 ms 500.0 ms 500.0 ms 500.0 ms

21.03 STOP FUNCTION COAST COAST COAST COAST RAMP

21.04 DC HOLD NO NO NO NO NO

21.05 DC HOLD SPEED 5 rpm 5 rpm 5 rpm 5 rpm 5 rpm

21.06 DC HOLD CURR 30. 0 % 30. 0 % 30. 0 % 30. 0 % 30. 0 %

21.07 RUN ENABLE FUNC RAMP STOP RAMP STOP RAMP STOP RAMP STOP RAMP STOP

21.08 SCALAR FLY START NO NO NO NO NO

Parameter Factory Hand/Auto PID Control Torque Control

Sequential Control

Custom Setting

Firmware Manual B-3

Appendix B – Default Settings of Application Macros

22 ACCEL/DECEL

22.01 ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL DI4 ACC/DEC 1 ACC/DEC 1 DI5 DI3

22.02 ACCELER TIME 1 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s

22.03 DECELER TIME 1 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s

22.04 ACCELER TIME 2 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s

22.05 DECELER TIME 2 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s

22.06 ACC/DEC RAMP SHPE 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s

22.07 EM STOP RAMP TIME 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s 3.00 s

23 SPEED CTRL

23.01 GAIN 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0

23.02 INTEGRATION TIME 2.50 s 2.50 s 2.50 s 2.50 s 2.50 s

23.03 DERIVATION TIME 0.0 ms 0.0 ms 0.0 ms 0.0 ms 0.0 ms

23.04 ACC COMPENSATION 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.12 s

23.05 SLIP GAIN 100.0 % 100.0 % 100.0 % 100.0 % 100.0 %

23.06 AUTOTUNE RUN NO NO NO NO NO

24 TORQUE CTRL

24.01 TORQ RAMP UP 0.00 s

24.02 TORQ RAMP DOWN 0.00 s

25 CRITICAL SPEEDS

25.01 CRIT SPEED SELECT OFF OFF — OFF OFF

25.02 CRIT SPEED 1 LOW 0 rpm 0 rpm — 0 rpm 0 rpm

25.03 CRIT SPEED 1 HIGH 0 rpm 0 rpm — 0 rpm 0 rpm

25.04 CRIT SPEED 2 LOW 0 rpm 0 rpm — 0 rpm 0 rpm

25.05 CRIT SPEED 2 HIGH 0 rpm 0 rpm — 0 rpm 0 rpm

25.06 CRIT SPEED 3 LOW 0 rpm 0 rpm — 0 rpm 0 rpm

25.07 CRIT SPEED 3 HIGH 0 rpm 0 rpm — 0 rpm 0 rpm

26 MOTOR CONTROL

26.01 FLUX OPTIMIZATION NO NO NO NO NO

26.02 FLUX BRAKING YES YES YES YES YES

26.03 IR COMPENSATION 0.0 % 0.0 % 0.0 % 0.0 % 0.0 %

26.05 HEX FIELD WEAKEN OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

30 FAULT FUNCTIONS

30.01 AI<MIN FUNCTION FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT

30.02 PANEL LOSS FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT

30.03 EXTERNAL FAULT NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL

30.04 MOT THERM PROT NO NO NO NO NO

30.05 MOTOR THERM P MODE DTC1) DTC1) DTC1) DTC1) DTC1)

30.06 MOTOR THERM TIME (calculated) (calculated) (calculated) (calculated) (calculated)

30.07 MOTOR LOAD CURVE 100.0 % 100.0 % 100.0 % 100.0 % 100.0 %

30.08 ZERO SPEED LOAD 74.0 % 74.0 % 74.0 % 74.0 % 74.0 %

Parameter Factory Hand/Auto PID Control Torque Control

Sequential Control

Custom Setting

B-4 Firmware Manual

Appendix B – Default Settings of Application Macros

30.09 BREAK POINT 45.0 Hz 45.0 Hz 45.0 Hz 45.0 Hz 45.0 Hz

30.10 STALL FUNCTION FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT

30.11 STALL FREQ HI 20.0 Hz 20.0 Hz 20.0 Hz 20.0 Hz 20.0 Hz

30.12 STALL TIME 20.00 s 20.00 s 20.00 s 20.00 s 20.00 s

30.13 UNDERLOAD FUNC NO NO NO NO NO

30.14 UNDERLOAD TIME 600.0 s 600.0 s 600.0 s 600.0 s 600.0 s

30.15 UNDERLOAD CURVE 1 1 1 1 1

30.16 MOTOR PHASE LOSS NO NO NO NO NO

30.17 EARTH FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT

30.18 COMM FAULT FUNC FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT

30.19 MAIN REF DS T-OUT 1.00 s 1.00 s 1.00 s 1.00 s 1.00 s

30.20 COMM FAULT RO/AO ZERO ZERO ZERO ZERO ZERO

30.21 AUX DS T-OUT 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s

30.22 IO CONF FUNC WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING

31 AUTOMATIC RESET

31.01 NUMBER OF TRIALS 0 0 0 0 0

31.02 TRIAL TIME 30.0 s 30.0 s 30.0 s 30.0 s 30.0 s

31.03 DELAY TIME 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s

31.04 OVERCURRENT NO NO NO NO NO

31.05 OVERVOLTAGE NO NO NO NO NO

31.06 UNDERVOLTAGE NO NO NO NO NO

31.07 AI SIGNAL<MIN NO NO NO NO NO

32 SUPERVISION

32.01 SPEED1 FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO

32.02 SPEED1 LIMIT 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm

32.03 SPEED2 FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO

32.04 SPEED2 LIMIT 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm

32.05 CURRENT FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO

32.06 CURRENT LIMIT 0 A 0 A 0 A 0 A 0 A

32.07 TORQUE 1 FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO

32.08 TORQUE 1 LIMIT 0 % 0 % 0 % 0 % 0 %

32.09 TORQUE 2 FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO

32.10 TORQUE 2 LIMIT 0 % 0 % 0 % 0 % 0 %

32.11 REF1 FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO

32.12 REF1 LIMIT 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm 0 rpm

32.13 REF2 FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO

32.14 REF2 LIMIT 0 % 0 % 0 % 0 % 0 %

32.15 ACT1 FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO

32.16 ACT1 LIMIT 0 % 0 % 0 % 0 % 0 %

32.17 ACT2 FUNCTION NO NO NO NO NO

32.18 ACT2 LIMIT 0 % 0 % 0 % 0 % 0 %

33 INFORMATION

33.01 SOFTWARE VERSION (Version) (Version) (Version) (Version) (Version)

33.02 APPL SW VERSION (Version) (Version) (Version) (Version) (Version)

33.03 TEST DATE (Date) (Date) (Date) (Date) (Date)

Parameter Factory Hand/Auto PID Control Torque Control

Sequential Control

Custom Setting

Firmware Manual B-5

Appendix B – Default Settings of Application Macros

34 PROCESS VARIABLE

34.01 SCALE 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00

34.02 P VAR UNIT % % % % %

34.03 SELECT P VAR 142 142 142 142 142

34.04 MOTOR SP FILT TIM 500 ms 500 ms 500 ms 500 ms 500 ms

34.05 TORQ ACT FILT TIM 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms 100 ms

34.06 RESET RUN TIME NO NO NO NO NO

35 MOT TEMP MEAS

35.01 MOT 1 TEMP AI1 SEL NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE

35.02 MOT 1 TEMP ALM L 110 110 110 110 110

35.03 MOT 1 TEMP FLT L 130 130 130 130 130

35.04 MOT 2 TEMP AI2 SEL NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE

35.05 MOT 2 TEMP ALM L 110 110 110 110 110

35.06 MOT 2 TEMP FLT L 130 130 130 130 130

35.07 MOT MOD COMPENSAT YES YES YES YES YES

40 PID CONTROL

40.01 PID GAIN 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0

40.02 PID INTEG TIME 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s 60.00 s

40.03 PID DERIV TIME 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s

40.04 PID DERIV FILTER 1.00 s 1.00 s 1.00 s 1.00 s 1.00 s

40.05 ERROR VALUE INV NO NO NO NO NO

40.06 ACTUAL VALUE SEL ACT1 ACT1 ACT1 ACT1 ACT1

40.07 ACTUAL1 INPUT SEL AI2 AI2 AI2 AI2 AI2

40.08 ACTUAL2 INPUT SEL AI2 AI2 AI2 AI2 AI2

40.09 ACT1 MINIMUM 0 % 0 % 0 % 0 % 0 %

40.10 ACT1 MAXIMUM 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 %

40.11 ACT2 MINIMUM 0 % 0 % 0 % 0 % 0 %

40.12 ACT2 MAXIMUM 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 %

40.13 PID INTEGRATION ON ON ON ON ON

40.14 TRIM MODE OFF OFF OFF OFF

40.15 TRIM REF SEL AI1 AI1 AI1 AI1

40.16 TRIM REFERENCE 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0%

40.17 TRIM RANGE ADJUST 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0%

40.18 TRIM SELECTION SPEED TRIM

40.19 ACTUAL FILT TIME 0.04 s 0.04 s 0.04 s 0.04 s 0.04 s

40.20 SLEEP SELECTION OFF

40.21 SLEEP LEVEL 0.0 rpm

40.22 SLEEP DELAY 0.0 s

40.23 WAKE UP LEVEL 0.0 %

40.24 WAKE UP DELAY 0.0 s

42 BRAKE CONTROL

42.01 BRAKE CTRL OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

42.02 BRAKE ACKNOWLEDGE OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

42.03 BRAKE OPEN DELAY 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s

Parameter Factory Hand/Auto PID Control Torque Control

Sequential Control

Custom Setting

B-6 Firmware Manual

Appendix B – Default Settings of Application Macros

42.04 BRAKE CLOSE DELAY 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s 0.0 s

42.05 ABS BRAKE CLS SPD 100 rpm 100 rpm 100 rpm 100 rpm 100 rpm

42.06 BRAKE FAULT FUNC FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT FAULT

42.07 START TORQ REF SEL NO NO NO NO NO

42.08 START TORQ REF 0% 0% 0% 0% 0%

50 ENCODER MODULE

50.01 PULSE NR 2048 2048 2048 2048 2048

50.02 SPEED MEAS MODE A — B —

— A —

— B —

— A —

— B —

— A —

— B —

— A —

— B —

—

50.03 ENCODER FAULT WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING

50.04 ENCODER DELAY 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000

50.05 ENCODER CHANNEL CHANNEL 2 CHANNEL 2 CHANNEL 2 CHANNEL 2 CHANNEL 2

50.06 SPEED FB SEL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL INTERNAL

51 COMMUNICATION MODULE

52 STANDARD MODBUS

52.01 STATION NUMBER 1 1 1 1 1

52.02 BAUDRATE 9600 9600 9600 9600 9600

52.03 PARITY ODD ODD ODD ODD ODD

60 MASTER/FOLLOWER

60.01 MASTER LINK MODE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE NOT IN USE

60.02 TORQUE SELECTOR not visible not visible not visible TORQUE not visible

60.03 WINDOW SEL ON not visible not visible not visible NO not visible

60.04 WINDOW WIDTH POS not visible not visible not visible 0 not visible

60.05 WINDOW WIDTH NEG not visible not visible not visible 0 not visible

60.06 DROOP RATE 0 to 100% 0% 0% 0% 0%

60.07 MASTER SIGNAL 2 0000 to 9999 202 202 202 202

60.08 MASTER SIGNAL 3 0000 to 9999 213 213 213 213

70 DDCS CONTROL

70.01 CHANNEL 0 ADDR 1 1 1 1 1

70.02 CHANNEL 3 ADDR 1 1 1 1 1

70.03 CH1 BAUDRATE 2 Mbits 2 Mbits 2 Mbits 2 Mbits 2 Mbits

90 D SET REC ADDR

90.01 AUX DS REF3 0 0 0 0 0

90.02 AUX DS REF4 0 0 0 0 0

90.03 AUX DS REF5 0 0 0 0 0

90.04 MAIN DS SOURCE 1 1 1 1 1

90.05 AUX DS SOURCE 3 3 3 3 3

92 D SET TR ADDR

92.01 MAIN STATUS WORD 302 302 302 302 302 FIXED

92.02 MAIN DS ACT1 102 102 102 102 102

92.03 MAIN DS ACT2 105 105 105 105 105

Parameter Factory Hand/Auto PID Control Torque Control

Sequential Control

Custom Setting

Firmware Manual B-7

Appendix B – Default Settings of Application Macros

1) Parameter 30.05 MOTOR THERM P MODE: For units ACx 607-0400-3, -0490-3 -0490-6 and above, the default setting is USER MODE.

92.04 AUX DS ACT3 305 305 305 305 305

92.05 AUX DS ACT4 308 308 308 308 308

92.06 AUX DS ACT5 306 306 306 306 306

96 EXTERNAL AO

96.01 EXT AO1 SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED

96.02 INVERT EXT AO1 NO NO NO NO NO

96.03 MINIMUM EXT AO1 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA

96.04 FILTER EXT AO1 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s 0.01 s

96.05 SCALE EXT AO1 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 %

96.06 EXT AO2 CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT

96.07 INVERT EXT AO2 NO NO NO NO NO

96.08 MINIMUM EXT AO2 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA

96.09 FILTER EXT AO2 2.00 s 2.00 s 2.00 s 2.00 s 2.00 s

96.10 SCALE EXT AO2 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 % 100 %

98 OPTION MODULES

98.01 ENCODER MODULE NO NO NO NO NO

98.02 COMM. MODULE LINK NO NO NO NO NO

98.03 DI/O EXT MODULE 1 NO NO NO NO NO

98.04 DI/O EXT MODULE 2 NO NO NO NO NO

98.05 DI/O EXT MODULE 3 NO NO NO NO NO

98.06 AI/O EXT MODULE NO NO NO NO NO

98.07 COMM PROFILE ABB DRIVES ABB DRIVES ABB DRIVES ABB DRIVES ABB DRIVES

98.08 NIOC-01 BOARD YES YES YES YES YES

98.09 NDIO1 DI FUNC DI7,8 DI7,8 DI7,8 DI7,8 DI7,8

98.10 NDIO2 DI FUNC DI9.10 DI9.10 DI9.10 DI9.10 DI9.10

98.11 NDIO3 DI FUNC DI11,12 DI11,12 DI11,12 DI11,12 DI11,12

98.12 AI/O MOTOR TEMP NO NO NO NO NO

Parameter Factory Hand/Auto PID Control Torque Control

Sequential Control

Custom Setting

B-8 Firmware Manual

Appendix C – Fieldbus Control

Overview The ACS 600 can be connected to an external control system – usually a fieldbus – via an adapter module (connected to fibre optic channel CH0 on the NDCO board) and/or a Modbus-protocol RS-485 connection (on the NIOC-01 board).

Figure C-1 Fieldbus control.

The drive can be set to receive all of its control information from one fieldbus channel, or the control can be distributed between the two fieldbus channels and other available sources, e.g. digital and analogue inputs.

Fieldbus Adapter

Fieldbus

Otherdevices

FieldbusController

CH0(DDCS)

NBCI

Standard Modbus Link(Modbus RTU)

RS-485

NPCU

RS-232

RS-485

Galvanically unisolated

e.g. PC Serial Port

Signal SourceSelection Name:

COMM.MODULE

Control Word (CW)

References (REF1…REF5)

Data Flow

Status Word (SW)

Actual Values (ACT1…ACT5)

Parameter R/W Requests/Responses

Fieldbus Control

or COMM. REF

Firmware Manual C-1

Appendix C – Fieldbus Control

Control via NDCO Board Channel CH0

The DDCS-protocol fibre optic channel CH0, located on the NDCO add-on communication board, is used for connecting the ACS 600 to a fieldbus adapter module. (The NDCO board may be ordered factory-installed or as an add-on kit. It is also installed at the factory if required by another option.)

Channel CH0 is also used for connecting the ACS 600 to an Advant control system. From the drive’s point of view, Advant connection is similar to a fieldbus adapter connection.

Fieldbus AdapterCommunication Set-up

Before configuring the ACS 600 for fieldbus control, the adapter module must be mechanically and electrically installed according to the instructions given in the Hardware Manual of the drive and the module manual.

The communication between the ACS 600 and the fieldbus adapter module is then activated by setting Parameter 98.02 COMM. MODULE LINK. After the communication is initialised, the configuration parameters of the module become available in the drive at Parameter Group 51. These parameters are specific to the module used; see its manual for information on the available settings.

Table C-1 Communication set-up parameters for channel CH0 (for Fieldbus Adapter connection).

After the parameters in Group 51 have been set, the drive control parameters (shown in Table C-4) must be checked and adjusted where necessary.

Parameter Alternative SettingsSetting for

Control through CH0Function/Information

COMMUNICATION INITIALISATION

98.02 COMM. MODULE LINK

NO; FIELDBUS; ADVANT; STD MODBUS; CUSTOMISED

FIELDBUS Initialises communication between drive (fibre optic channel CH0) and fieldbus adapter module. Activates module parameters (Group 51).

98.07 COMM PROFILE ABB DRIVES;CSA 2.8/3.0

ABB DRIVES Selects the communication profile used by the drive. Affects both fieldbus channels (fibre optic channel CH0 and Standard Modbus Link). See section Communication Profiles later in this Appendix.

ADAPTER MODULE CONFIGURATION (Module-specific; see module manual.)

51.01 (FIELDBUS PARAMETER 1)

–

• • • • • • • • • • • •

51.15 (FIELDBUS PARAMETER 15)

–

C-2 Firmware Manual

Appendix C – Fieldbus Control

AF 100 Connection The connection of an ACS 600 to an AF (Advant Fieldbus) 100 bus is similar to other fieldbusses, with the exception that one of the AF 100 interfaces listed below is substituted for the fieldbus adapter. As opposed to other fieldbusses, Parameter Group 51 contains no adjustable parameters. The drive (channel CH0) is connected to the AF 100 interface using fibre optic cables. The following is a list of suitable interfaces:

• CI810A Fieldbus Communication Interface (FCI)TB811 (5 MBd) or TB810 (10 MBd) Optical ModuleBus Port Interface required

• Advant Controller 70 (AC 70)TB811 (5 MBd) or TB810 (10 MBd) Optical ModuleBus Port Interface required

• Advant Controller 80 (AC 80)Optical ModuleBus connection: TB811 (5 MBd) or TB810 (10 MBd) Optical ModuleBus Port Interface requiredDriveBus connection: Connectible to NAMC-11 Board with NDCO-01 Communication Option.

One of the above interfaces may already be present on the AF 100 bus. If not, an Advant Fieldbus 100 Adapter kit (NAFA-01) is separately available, containing the CI810A Fieldbus Communication Interface, TB810 and TB811 Optical ModuleBus Port Interfaces, and a TC505 Trunk Tap. (More information on these components is available from the S800 I/O User’s Guide, 3BSE 008 878 [ABB Industrial Systems, Västerås, Sweden]).

Optical Component Types The TB811 Optical ModuleBus Port Interface is equipped with 5 MBd optical components, while the TB810 has 10 MBd components. All optical components on a fibre optic link must be of the same type since 5 MBd components do not communicate with 10 MBd components. The choice between TB810 and TB811 depends on the equipment it is connected to.

The TB811 (5 MBd) should be used when connecting to a drive with the following equipment:

• NAMC-03 Board (not used with Std. Application Program 5.2 or later versions)

• NAMC-11/51 Board with NDCO-02 Communication Option• NAMC-11/51 Board with NDCO-03 Communication Option• NAMC-22 Board.

The TB810 (10 MBd) should be used when connecting to the following equipment:

• NAMC-11/51 Board with NDCO-01 Communication Option• NAMC-21 Board• NDBU-85/95 DDCS Branching Units.

Firmware Manual C-3

Appendix C – Fieldbus Control

Communication Set-up The communication between the ACS 600 and the AF 100 interface is activated by setting Parameter 98.02 COMM. MODULE LINK to ADVANT.

Table C-2 Communication set-up parameters for channel CH0 (For AF 100 connection).

After the communication activation parameters have been set, the AF 100 interface must be programmed according to its documentation, and the drive control parameters (shown in Table C-4) checked and adjusted where necessary.

In an Optical ModuleBus connection, the value for drive Parameter 70.01 CH0 NODE ADDRESS is calculated from the value of the POSITION terminal in the appropriate database element (for the AC 80, DRISTD) as follows:

1. Multiply the hundreds of the value of POSITION by 16.

2. Add the tens and ones of the value of POSITION to the result.

For example, if the POSITION terminal of the DRISTD database element has the value of 110 (the tenth drive on the Optical ModuleBus ring), Parameter 70.01 must be set to 16 × 1 + 10 = 26.

In an AC 80 DriveBus connection, the drives are addressed 1 to 12. The drive address (set with Parameter 70.01) is related to the value of the DRNR terminal of the ACSRX PC element.

Parameter Alternative SettingsSetting for

Control through CH0Function/Information

COMMUNICATION INITIALISATION

98.02 COMM. MODULE LINK

NO; FIELDBUS; ADVANT; STD MODBUS, CUSTOMISED

ADVANT Initialises communication between drive (fibre optic channel CH0) and AF 100 interface. The transmission speed is 4 Mbit/s.

98.07 COMM PROFILE ABB DRIVES;CSA 2.8/3.0

ABB DRIVES Selects the communication profile used by the drive. Affects both fieldbus channels (fibre optic channel CH0 and Standard Modbus Link). See section Communication Profiles later in this Appendix.

C-4 Firmware Manual

Appendix C – Fieldbus Control

Control through the Standard Modbus Link

The modular jacks (X28 and X29) on the ACS 600 NIOC-01 board form the Standard Modbus Link. The Link can be used for external control by a Modbus RTU-protocol controller. The controller can be connected either directly or using an NBCI Panel Bus Connection Interface module to obtain galvanic isolation and parallel or long-distance connection of several drives.

An RS-232 port (e.g. a serial port of a PC) can be connected to the Standard Modbus Link through an NPCU-01 PC Connection Unit, which provides galvanic isolation and RS-232/RS-485 conversion. (However, the DriveWindow Light PC tool can only be connected to the Control Panel connector on the NAMC board.)

Communication Set-up The communication through the Standard Modbus Link is initialised by setting Parameter 98.02 COMM. MODULE LINK to STD MODBUS. Then, the communication parameters in Group 52 must be adjusted. See the following table.

Table C-3 Communication set-up parameters for the Standard Modbus Link.

After the parameters in Group 52 have been set, the drive control parameters (shown in Table C-4) should be checked and adjusted where necessary.

Parameter Alternative SettingsSetting for Control

through the Standard Modbus Link

Function/Information

COMMUNICATION INITIALISATION

98.02 COMM. MODULE LINK

NO; FIELDBUS; ADVANT; STD MODBUS; CUSTOMISED

STD MODBUS Initialises communication between drive (Standard Modbus Link) and Modbus-protocol controller. Activates communication parameters in Group 52.

98.07 COMM PROFILE ABB DRIVES;CSA 2.8/3.0

ABB DRIVES Selects the communication profile used by the drive. Affects both fieldbus channels (fibre optic channel CH0 and Standard Modbus Link). See section Communication Profiles later in this Appendix.

COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS

52.01 STATION NUMBER

1 to 247 – Specifies the station number of the drive on the Standard Modbus link.

52.02 BAUDRATE 600; 1200; 2400; 4800; 9600

– Communication speed for the Standard Modbus Link.

52.03 PARITY ODD; EVEN; NONE1STOPBIT;NONE2STOPBIT

– Parity setting for the Standard Modbus Link.

Firmware Manual C-5

Appendix C – Fieldbus Control

Drive Control Parameters

After the desired fieldbus channels have been set up, the drive control parameters listed below in Table C-4 below should be checked and adjusted where necessary.

The Setting for Fieldbus Control column gives the value to use when either fieldbus channel (CH0 or Standard Modbus Link) is the desired source or destination for that particular signal. The Function/Information column gives a description of the parameter.

The fieldbus signal routes and message composition are explained later in this Appendix under The Fieldbus Control Interface. Further information on the alternative parameter settings is also given in Chapter 6.

Table C-4 Drive control parameters to be checked and adjusted for fieldbus control.

ParameterSetting for

Fieldbus ControlFunction/Information

CONTROL COMMAND SOURCE SELECTION

10.01 EXT1STRT/STP/DIR

COMM.MODULE

Enables the fieldbus Control Word (except bit 11) when EXT1 is selected as control location.

10.02 EXT2STRT/STP/DIR

Enables the fieldbus Control Word (except bit 11) when EXT2 is selected as control location.

10.03 DIRECTION REQUEST Enables rotation direction control as defined by Parameters 10.01 and 10.02.

11.02 EXT1/EXT2 SELECT

COMM.MODULE Enables EXT1/EXT2 selection by fieldbus Control Word bit 11 EXT CTRL LOC.

11.03 EXT REF1 SELECT COMM.REF,

FAST COMM, COMM.REF+AI1,COMM.REF+AI5,COMM.REF*AI1 or COMM.REF*AI5

Fieldbus reference REF1 is used when EXT1 is selected as control location.See section References below for information on the alternative settings.

11.06 EXT REF2 SELECT

Fieldbus reference REF2 is used when EXT2 is selected as control location.See section References below for information on the alternative settings.

OUTPUT SIGNAL SOURCE SELECTION

14.01 RELAY RO1 OUTPUT

COMM.MODULE

Enables Relay output RO1 control by fieldbus reference REF3 bit 13.

14.02 RELAY RO2 OUTPUT

Enables Relay output RO2 control by fieldbus reference REF3 bit 14.

14.03 RELAY RO3 OUTPUT

Enables Relay output RO3 control by fieldbus reference REF3 bit 15.

15.01 ANALOGUE OUTPUT1

Directs the contents of fieldbus reference REF4 to Analogue output AO1.Scaling: 20000 = 20 mA

15.06 ANALOGUE OUTPUT2

Directs the contents of fieldbus reference REF5 to Analogue output AO2.Scaling: 20000 = 20 mA.

C-6 Firmware Manual

Appendix C – Fieldbus Control

SYSTEM CONTROL INPUTS

16.01 RUN ENABLE

COMM.MODULE

Enables the control of the Run Enable signal through fieldbus Control Word bit 3.

16.04 FAULT RESET SEL

Enables fault reset through fieldbus Control Word bit 7.

16.07 PARAM SAVE

Saves parameter value changes (incl. those made through fieldbus control) to permanent memory. See Chapter 6 – Parameters.

COMMUNICATION FAULT FUNCTIONS

30.18 COMMFAULT FUNC

–

Determines drive action in case fieldbus communication is lost.Note: The communication loss detection is based on monitoring of received Main and Auxiliary data sets (whose sources are selected with Parameters 90.04 and 90.05).

30.19 MAIN REF DS T-OUT

Defines the time between Main Reference data set loss detection and the action selected with Parameter 30.18.

30.20 COMM FLTRO/AO

Determines the position in which Relay outputs RO1 to RO3 and Analogue outputs AO1 and AO2 are left upon Auxiliary Reference data set loss.

30.21 AUX REF DS T-OUT

Defines the time between Auxiliary Reference data set loss detection and the action selected with Parameter 30.18.Note: This supervision function is disabled if Pars. 90.01, 90.02 and 90.03 are set to 0.

FIELDBUS REFERENCE TARGET SELECTION (Not visible when 98.02 is set to NO.)

90.01 AUX DS REF3

–

Defines the drive parameter into which the value of fieldbus reference REF3 is written.Format: xxyy, where xx = Parameter Group (10 to 89), yy = Parameter Index. E.g. 3001 = Parameter 30.01.

90.02 AUX DS REF4

Defines the drive parameter into which the value of fieldbus reference REF4 is written.Format: see Parameter 90.01.

90.03 AUX DS REF5

Defines the drive parameter into which the value of fieldbus reference REF5 is written.Format: see Parameter 90.01.

90.04 MAIN DS SOURCE

1 or 81 If 98.02 COMM. MODULE LINK is CUSTOMISED this parameter selects the fieldbus channel from which the drive reads the Main Reference data set (comprising the fieldbus Control Word, fieldbus reference REF1, and fieldbus reference REF2).

90.05 AUX DS SRCE

3 or 83 If 98.02 COMM. MODULE LINK is CUSTOMISED this parameter selects the fieldbus channel from which the drive reads the Auxiliary Reference data set (comprising fieldbus references REF3, REF4 and REF5).

ParameterSetting for

Fieldbus ControlFunction/Information

Firmware Manual C-7

Appendix C – Fieldbus Control

ACTUAL SIGNAL SELECTION FOR FIELDBUS (Not visible when 98.02 is set to NO.)

92.01 MAIN DS STATUS WORD

302 (Fixed) The Status Word is transmitted to as the first word of the Main Actual Signal data set.

92.02 MAIN DS ACT1

–

Selects the Actual signal or Parameter value to be transmitted as the second word (ACT1) of the Main Actual Signal data set.Format: (x)xyy, where (x)x = Actual Signal Group or Parameter Group, yy = Actual Signal or Parameter Index.E.g. 103 = Actual Signal 1.03 FREQUENCY; 2202 = Parameter 22.02 ACCEL TIME 1.

92.03 MAIN DS ACT2

Selects the Actual signal or Parameter value to be transmitted as the third word (ACT2) of the Main Actual Signal data set.Format: see Parameter 92.02.

92.04 AUX DS ACT3

Selects the Actual signal or Parameter value to be transmitted as the first word (ACT3) of the Auxiliary Actual Signal data set.Format: see Parameter 92.02.

92.05 AUX DS ACT4

Selects the Actual signal or Parameter value to be transmitted as the second word (ACT4) of the Auxiliary Actual Signal data set.Format: see Parameter 92.02.

92.06 AUX DS ACT5

Selects the Actual signal or Parameter value to be transmitted as the third word (ACT5) of the Auxiliary Actual Signal data set.Format: see Parameter 92.02.

ParameterSetting for

Fieldbus ControlFunction/Information

C-8 Firmware Manual

Appendix C – Fieldbus Control

The Fieldbus Control Interface

The communication between a fieldbus system and the ACS 600 employs data sets. One data set consists of three 16-bit words. The ACS 600 Standard Application Program supports the use of four data sets, two in each direction. The ACS 600 has a memory location for two control and two status data sets for each fieldbus channel (the fibre optic channel CH0 and the Standard Modbus Link), totalling 4 input and 4 output memory locations. Two out of the four input data sets are selected with Parameter 98.02 COMM. MODULE LINK, 90.04 MAIN REF DS SOURCE and 90.05 AUX REF DS SOURCE. The selected data sets form the Main Reference data set and the Auxiliary Reference data set which are used to control the drive.

The status information transmitted by the drive is selected with Parameters 92.01 to 92.03 (the Main Actual Signal data set), and the 92.04 to 92.06 (the Auxiliary Actual Signal data set).

The update time for the Main Reference and Main Actual Signal data sets is 12 milliseconds; for the Auxiliary Reference and Auxiliary Actual Signals, it is 100 milliseconds.

Figure C-2 and Figure C-3 demonstrate the routes of input and output signals for fieldbus control.

The Control Word andthe Status Word

The Control Word (CW) is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system. It is effective when the current control location (EXT1 or EXT2, see Parameters 10.01 and 10.02) is set to COMM. MODULE.

The Control Word (detailed in Table C-5) is sent by the fieldbus controller to the drive. The drive switches between its states (shown in Figure C-4) according to the bit-coded instructions of the Control Word.

The Status Word (SW) is a word containing status information, sent by the drive to the fieldbus controller. The composition of the Status Word is explained in Table C-6.

References References (REF) are 16-bit words comprising a sign bit and a 15-bit integer. A negative reference (indicating reversed direction of rotation) is formed by calculating the two’s complement from the corresponding positive reference value if the value of Parameter 10.01 EXT1 STRT/STP/DIR or 10.02 EXT2 STRT/STP/DIR is COMM. MODULE.

Fieldbus ReferenceSelection and Correction

Fieldbus reference (called COMMREF in signal selection contexts) is selected by setting a Reference selection parameter – 11.03 EXT REF1 SELECT or 11.06 EXT REF2 SELECT – to COMM.REF, FAST COMM, COMM.REF+AI1, COMM.REF*AI1, COMM.REF+AI5, or COMM.REF*AI5. The latter four selections enable correction of the fieldbus reference using analogue inputs as shown below. (An optional NAIO-03 Analogue I/O Extension Module is required for use of Analogue input AI5).

Firmware Manual C-9

Appendix C – Fieldbus Control

COMM.REFThe fieldbus reference is forwarded as such without correction.

FAST COMMThe fieldbus reference is forwarded as such without correction. The reference is read every 2 milliseconds if either of the following conditions is met:

• Control location is EXT1, Par. 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is DTC, and Par. 40.14 TRIM MODE is OFF

• Control location is EXT2, Par. 99.04 MOTOR CTRL MODE is DTC, Par. 40.14 TRIM MODE is OFF, and a torque reference is used.

In any other event, the fieldbus reference is read every 6 milliseconds.

Note: The FAST COMM selection disables the critical speed function.

COMM.REF+AI1; COMM.REF+AI5; COMM.REF*AI1; COMM.REF*AI5These selections enable the correction of the fieldbus reference as follows:

Parameter Setting Effect of AI1/AI5 Input Voltage on Fieldbus Reference

COMMREF+AI1COMMREF+AI5

COMMREF*AI1COMMREF*AI5

(100 + 0.5 × [Par. 13.03])%

100%

0 AI1/AI5 Input

Fieldbus ReferenceCorrection Coefficient

(100 – 0.5 × [Par. 13.03])%5 V 10 V

Voltage

100%

0 AI1/AI5 Input

Fieldbus ReferenceCorrection Coefficient

0%

50%

5 V 10 VVoltage

C-10 Firmware Manual

Appendix C – Fieldbus Control

Fieldbus ReferenceScaling

Corrected (if correction is applied; see above) fieldbus references REF1 and REF2 are scaled as shown in the table below.

Ref. No.Application Macro Used (Par. 99.02)

Reference Type

Range Scaling Notes

REF1 (any) Speed or Frequency

-32765 … 32765 -20000 = -[Par. 11.05]0 = 0

20000 = [Par. 11.05]

Not limited by Pars. 11.04/11.05.Final reference limited by 20.01/20.02 [speed] or 20.07/20.08 [frequency].

REF2 FACTORY, HAND/AUTO, or SEQ CTRL

Speed or Frequency

-32765 … 32765 -20000 = -[Par. 11.08]0 = 0

20000 = [Par. 11.08]

Not limited by Pars. 11.07/11.08.Final reference limited by 20.01/20.02 [speed] or 20.07/20.08 [frequency].

T CTRL orM/F (optional)

Torque -32765 … 32765 -10000 = -[Par. 11.08]0 = 0

10000 = [Par. 11.08]

Not limited by Pars. 11.07/11.08.Final reference limited by Par. 20.04.

PID CTRL PID Reference -32765 … 32765 -10000 = -[Par. 11.08]0 = 0

10000 = [Par. 11.08]

Not limited by Pars. 11.07/11.08.

Firmware Manual C-11

Appendix C – Fieldbus Control

How Direction ofRotation Is Determined

in Fieldbus Control

The control of rotation direction is configured for each control location (EXT1 and EXT2) using the parameters in Group 10. Fieldbus references are bipolar, ie. they can be negative or positive. The following diagrams illustrate how Group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact.

The diagrams below show the relation between the fieldbus reference and the resultant REF1/REF2 when

– Parameter 10.01/10.02 EXTx STRT/STP/DIR = COMM. MODULE,OR– Parameter 11.03/11.06 EXT REFx SELECT is set to FAST COMM.

Par. 10.03 DIRECTION =FORWARD

Par. 10.03 DIRECTION =REVERSE

Par. 10.03 DIRECTION =REQUEST

*10000 if Reference Type is Torque or PID

Fieldbus

-32767

[11.05/11.08]

–[11.05/11.08]

-20000* 20000*Ref. 1/2

ResultantREF1/2

32767

Fieldbus-32767

[11.05/11.08]

–[11.05/11.08]

-20000* 20000*Ref. 1/2

ResultantREF1/2

32767

Fieldbus-32767

[11.05/11.08]

–[11.05/11.08]

-20000*

20000*Ref. 1/2

ResultantREF1/2

32767

C-12 Firmware Manual

Appendix C – Fieldbus Control

The following diagrams show the relation between the fieldbus reference and the resultant REF1/REF2 when

– Par. 10.01/10.02 EXTx STRT/STP/DIR is not set to COMM.MODULEAND– Par. 11.03/11.06 EXT REFx SELECT is not set to FAST COMM.

Direction received from source defined by Par. 10.01/10.02 EXTx STRT/STP/DIR = FORWARD

Direction received from source defined by Par. 10.01/10.02 EXTx STRT/STP/DIR = REVERSE

Par. 10.03 DIRECTION =FORWARD

Par. 10.03 DIRECTION =REVERSE

Par. 10.03 DIRECTION =REQUEST

*10000 if Reference Type is Torque or PID

Fieldbus

-32767

[11.05/11.08]

–[11.05/11.08]

-20000* 20000*Ref. 1/2

ResultantREF1/2

32767

Fieldbus

-32767

[11.05/11.08]

–[11.05/11.08]

-20000* 20000*Ref. 1/2

ResultantREF1/2

32767

Fieldbus-32767

[11.05/11.08]

–[11.05/11.08]

-20000* 20000*Ref. 1/2

ResultantREF1/2

32767Fieldbus

-32767

[11.05/11.08]

–[11.05/11.08]

-20000* 20000*Ref. 1/2

ResultantREF1/2

32767

Fieldbus

-32767

[11.05/11.08]

–[11.05/11.08]

-20000* 20000*Ref. 1/2

ResultantREF1/2

32767

Fieldbus-32767

[11.05/11.08]

–[11.05/11.08]

-20000* 20000*Ref. 1/2

ResultantREF1/2

32767

Firmware Manual C-13

Appendix C – Fieldbus Control

Actual Values Actual Values (ACT) are 16-bit words containing information on selected operations of the drive. The functions to be monitored are selected with the parameters in Group 92. The scaling of the integers sent to the master as Actual Values depends on the selected function; please refer to the Scaling for Fieldbus column in the tables of Appendix A.

The contents of Group 3 Actual Signals are presented in this Appendix from Table C-7 onwards. (The Control and Status Words are also available as Actual Signals 3.01 and 3.02 respectively.)

Modbus Addressing In the Modbus controller memory, the Control Word, the Status Word, the references, and the actual values are mapped as follows:

More information on Modbus communication is available from the separate publication NMBA-01 Installation and Start-up Guide (3AFY 58919772 [English]; available from ABB Industry Oy, Helsinki, Finland) and the Modicon website http:\www.modicon.com.

Address Contents Address Contents

40001 Control Word 40004 Status Word

40002 REF1 40005 ACT1

40003 REF2 40006 ACT2

40007 REF3 40010 ACT3

40008 REF4 40011 ACT4

40009 REF5 40012 ACT5

C-14 Firmware Manual

Appendix

C–

Fieldbus C

ontrol

Firm

ware M

anual C

-15

FIELDBUS

PARAMETER

10.01

10.02

• • •

89.99

TABLE90.01

90.02

90.03

• • •

Bits13…15

CONTROL WORDREFERENCE REF1REFERENCE REF2

See Control SourceSelection Diagrams

in Chapter 4

Analogue OutputAO1 (see 15.01)

Analogue OutputAO2 (see 15.06)

Relay Outputs(see 14.01…14.03)

T FUNC T-OUT

Figure C

-2C

ontrol data input from fieldbus.

Standard

CH0

DATA

DS 1

DS 2

DS 3

DS 4

• • •

DS 81

DS 82

DS 83

DS 84

MAIN

DATA SETREFERENCE

AUXILIARYREFERENCE

(FieldbusAdapter)

ModbusLink

30.20 COMM FLT RO/AO30.21 AUX REF DS T-OUT

• • •

30.18 COMM FAULT FUNC

CWREF1REF2

REF3REF4REF5

CWREF1REF2

REF3REF4REF5

400014000240003

400074000840009

ModbusController

SETTABLE

NO

FIELD-

ADVANT

STD

CUSTOM-

BUS

MODBUS

ISED

98.02

NO

FIELD-

ADVANT

STD

CUSTOM-

BUS

MODBUS

ISED

98.02

CW

REF1

REF2

REF3

REF4

REF5

DATA SET

90.04

1•• •

255

30.18 COMM FAUL30.19 MAIN REF DS

90.05

1•• •

255

Appendix

C–

Fieldbus C

ontrol

C-16

ATA SET

DS 1

DS 2

DS 3

DS 4

• • •

DS 81

DS 82

DS 83

DS 84

TABLE

• • •

Standard

CH0(FieldbusAdapter)

ModbusLink

SWACT1ACT2

ACT3ACT4ACT5

SWACT1ACT2

ACT3ACT4ACT5

400044000540006

400104001140012

ModbusController

Firm

ware M

anual

Figure C

-3 A

ctual value selection for fieldbus.

ACTUAL SIGNAL/

1.01

1.02

• • •

3.99

• • •

PARAMETERTABLE

10.01

• • •

99.99

92.01*

92.02 STATUS WORD*ACT1ACT2

MAIN

DATA SETACTUAL SIGNAL

ACT3ACT4ACT5

AUXILIARY

DATA SETACTUAL SIGNAL

D

92.03

92.04

92.05

92.06

*Par. 92.01 is fixed to 3.02 MAIN STATUS WORD.

Appendix C – Fieldbus Control

Communication Profiles

Standard Application Program 5.0 (or later) supports the ABB Drives communication profile, which standardises the control interface (such as the Control and Status Words) among ABB drives. The ABB Drives profile derives from the PROFIBUS control interface and provides a variety of control and diagnostic functions (see Table C-5, Table C-6 and Figure C-4).

In order to retain backward compatibility with Standard Application Program versions 2.8 and 3.0, a communication profile suitable for these versions (CSA 2.8/3.0) can be selected with Parameter 98.07 COMM INTERFACE. This eliminates the need for reprogramming the PLC when ACS 600 drives with program versions 2.8 or 3.0 are replaced.

The Control and Status Words for the CSA 2.8/3.0 communication profile are detailed in Table C-19 and Table C-20 respectively.

Note: The communication profile selector parameter 98.07 COMM PROFILE affects both the optical CH0 and the Standard Modbus channels.

Firmware Manual C-17

Appendix C – Fieldbus Control

Table C-5 The Control Word (Actual Signal 3.01) for the ABB Drives Communication Profile. The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in Figure C-4.

Bit Name Value Enter STATE/Description

0 ON 1 Enter READY TO OPERATE.

OFF1 0 Emergency OFF, stop within time defined by Par. 22.07 EM STOP RAMP TIME. Enter OFF1 ACTIVE; proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks (OFF2, OFF3) are active.

1 OFF2 1 Continue operation (OFF2 inactive).

0 Emergency OFF, coast to stop.Enter OFF2 ACTIVE; proceed to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.

2 OFF3 1 Continue operation (OFF3 inactive).

0 Emergency stop, stop within time defined by Par. 22.07 EM STOP RAMP TIME. Enter OFF3 ACTIVE; proceed to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.Warning: Ensure motor and driven machine can be stopped using this stop mode.

3 START 1 Enter OPERATION ENABLED. (Note: The Run enable signal must be active; see Parameter 16.01. If Par. 16.01 is set to COMM. MODULE, this bit also activates the Run enable signal.)

0 Inhibit operation. Enter OPERATION INHIBITED.

4 RAMP_OUT_ZERO

1 Normal operation.Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR: OUTPUT ENABLED.

0 Force Ramp Function Generator output to zero.Drive ramps to stop (current and DC voltage limits in force).

5 RAMP_HOLD 1 Enable ramp function.Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR: ACCELERATOR ENABLED.

0 Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator output held).

6 RAMP_IN_ZERO

1 Normal operation. Enter OPERATING.

0 Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero.

7 RESET 0 � 1 Fault reset if an active fault exists. Enter SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.

0 Continue normal operation.

8 INCHING_1 1 Not in use.

1 � 0 Not in use.

9 INCHING_2 1 Not in use.

1 � 0 Not in use.

10 REMOTE_CMD 1 Fieldbus control enabled.

0 Control Word <> 0 or Reference <> 0: Retain last Control Word and Reference.Control Word = 0 and Reference = 0: Fieldbus control enabled.Reference and deceleration/acceleration ramp are locked.

11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 Select External Control Location 2 (EXT2). Effective if Par. 11.02 is set to COMM.MODULE.

0 Select External Control Location 1 (EXT1). Effective if Par. 11.02 is set to COMM.MODULE.

12 to 15 Reserved

C-18 Firmware Manual

Appendix C – Fieldbus Control

Table C-6 The Status Word (Actual Signal 3.02) for the ABB Drives Communication Profile. The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in Figure C-4.

Bit Name Value STATE/Description

0 RDY_ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON.

0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON.

1 RDY_RUN 1 READY TO OPERATE.

0 OFF1 ACTIVE.

2 RDY_REF 1 OPERATION ENABLED.

0 OPERATION INHIBITED.

3 TRIPPED 1 FAULT.

0 No fault.

4 OFF_2_STA 1 OFF2 inactive.

0 OFF2 ACTIVE.

5 OFF_3_STA 1 OFF3 inactive.

0 OFF3 ACTIVE.

6 SWC_ON_INHIB 1 SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.

0

7 ALARM 1 Warning/Alarm.

0 No Warning/Alarm.

8 AT_SETPOINT 1 OPERATING. Actual value equals reference value (= is within tolerance limits).

0 Actual value differs from reference value (= is outside tolerance limits).

9 REMOTE 1 Drive control location: REMOTE (EXT1 or EXT2).

0 Drive control location: LOCAL.

10 ABOVE_LIMIT 1 Actual frequency or speed value equals or is greater than supervision limit (Par. 32.02). Valid in both rotation directions regardless of value of Par. 32.02.

0 Actual frequency or speed value is within supervision limit.

11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 External Control Location 2 (EXT2) selected.

0 External Control Location 1 (EXT1) selected.

12 EXT RUN ENABLE 1 External Run Enable signal received.

0 No External Run Enable received.

13 to 14 Reserved

15 1 Communication error detected by fieldbus adapter module (on fibre optic channel CH0).

0 Fieldbus adapter (CH0) communication OK.

Firmware Manual C-19

Appendix C – Fieldbus Control

Figure C-4 The ACS 600 State Machine for the Standard Application Program (ABB Drives Communication Profile), effective under fieldbus control.

MAINS OFF

Power ON (CW Bit0=0)

SWITCH-ONINHIBITED (SW Bit6=1)

NOT READYTO SWITCH ON (SW Bit0=0)

READY TOSWITCH ON

from any state

(CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx x110)

ACS 600Std. ApplicationState Machine

READY TOOPERATE (SW Bit1=1)

n(f)=0 / I=0

OPERATIONINHIBITED (SW Bit2=0)

A B C D

(CW Bit3=0)

operationinhibited

OFF1 (CW Bit0=0)

OFF1ACTIVE (SW Bit1=0)

(SW Bit0=1)

(CW Bit3=1and

SW Bit12=1)

C D

(CW Bit5=0)

OPERATIONENABLED (SW Bit2=1)

(SW Bit5=0)

from any state from any state

Emergency StopOFF3 (CW Bit2=0)

n(f)=0 / I=0

OFF3ACTIVE

Emergency OFFOFF2 (CW Bit1=0)

(SW Bit4=0)

OFF2ACTIVE

RFG: OUTPUTENABLED

RFG: ACCELERATORENABLED

OPERATING

B

B C D

(CW Bit4=0)

(CW=xxxx x1xx xxx1 1111)

(CW=xxxx x1xx xx11 1111)

D

(CW Bit6=0)

A

C

(CW=xxxx x1xx x111 1111)

CW = Control WordSW = Status Wordn = SpeedI = Input Current

(SW Bit8=1)

RFG = Ramp Function Generatorf = Frequency

D

from any state

Fault

(SW Bit3=1)FAULT

(CW Bit7=1)

(CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx x111)

(CW=xxxx x1xx xxxx 1111and SW Bit12=1)

C-20 Firmware Manual

Appendix C – Fieldbus Control

Table C-7 The Auxiliary Status Word (Actual Signal 3.03).

Table C-8 Limit Word 1 (Actual Signal 3.04).

Bit Name Description

0 Reserved

1 OUT OF WINDOW Speed difference is out of the window (in speed control)*.

2 Reserved

3 MAGNETIZED Flux has been formed in the motor.

4 Reserved

5 SYNC RDY Position counter synchronised.

6 1 START NOT DONE Drive has not been started after changing the motor parameters in Group 99.

7 IDENTIF RUN DONE Motor ID Run successfully completed.

8 START INHIBITION Prevention of unexpected start-up active.

9 LIMITING Control at a limit. See Actual Signal 3.04 LIMIT WORD 1 below.

10 TORQ CONTROL Torque reference is followed*.

11 ZERO SPEED Absolute value of motor actual speed is below zero speed limit (4% of synchronous speed).

12 INTERNAL SPEED FB Internal speed feedback followed.

13 M/F COMM ERR Master/Follower link (on CH2) communication error*.

14 Reserved

15 Reserved

*See Master/Follower Application Guide (3AFY 58962180 [English]).

Bit Name Active Limit

0 TORQ MOTOR LIM Pull-out limit.

1 SPD_TOR_MIN_LIM Speed control torque min. limit.

2 SPD_TOR_MAX_LIM Speed control torque max. limit.

3 TORQ_USER_CUR_LIM User-defined current limit.

4 TORQ_INV_CUR_LIM Internal current limit.

5 TORQ_MIN_LIM Any torque min. limit.

6 TORQ_MAX_LIM Any torque max. limit.

7 TREF_TORQ_MIN_LIM Torque reference min. limit.

8 TREF_TORQ_MAX_LIM Torque reference max. limit.

9 FLUX_MIN_LIM Flux reference min. limit.

10 FREQ_MIN_LIMIT Speed/Frequency min. limit.

11 FREQ_MAX_LIMIT Speed/Frequency max. limit.

12 DC_UNDERVOLT DC undervoltage limit.

13 DC_OVERVOLT DC overvoltage limit.

14 TORQUE LIMIT Any torque limit.

15 FREQ_LIMIT Any speed/frequency limit.

Firmware Manual C-21

Appendix C – Fieldbus Control

Table C-9 Fault Word 1 (Actual Signal 3.05).

Table C-10 Fault Word 2 (Actual Signal 3.06).

Bit Name Description

0 SHORT CIRC

For the possible causes and remedies, seeChapter 7 – Fault Tracing.

1 OVERCURRENT

2 DC OVERVOLT

3 ACx 600 TEMP

4 EARTH FAULT

5 THERMISTOR

6 MOTOR TEMP

7 SYSTEM_FAULT A fault is indicated by the System Fault Word (Actual Signal 3.07).

8 UNDERLOAD For the possible causes and remedies, seeChapter 7 – Fault Tracing.9 OVERFREQ

10 Reserved

11 Reserved

12 Reserved

13 Reserved

14 Reserved

15 Reserved

Bit Name Description

0 SUPPLY PHASEFor the possible causes and remedies, seeChapter 7 – Fault Tracing.

1 NO MOT DATA

2 DC UNDERVOLT

3 Reserved

4 RUN DISABLED

For the possible causes and remedies, seeChapter 7 – Fault Tracing.

5 ENCODER FLT

6 I/O COMM

7 AMBIENT TEMP

8 EXTERNAL FLT

9 OVER SWFREQ Switching overfrequency fault.

10 AI < MIN FUNC

For the possible causes and remedies, seeChapter 7 – Fault Tracing.

11 PPCC LINK

12 COMM MODULE

13 PANEL LOSS

14 MOTOR STALL

15 MOTOR PHASE

C-22 Firmware Manual

Appendix C – Fieldbus Control

Table C-11 The System Fault Word (Actual Signal 3.07).

Table C-12 Alarm Word 1 (Actual Signal 3.08).

Bit Name Description

0 FLT (F1_7) Factory default parameter file error.

1 USER MACRO User Macro file error.

2 FLT (F1_4) FPROM operating error.

3 FLT (F1_5) FPROM data error.

4 FLT (F2_12) Internal time level 2 overflow.

5 FLT (F2_13) Internal time level 3 overflow.

6 FLT (F2_14) Internal time level 4 overflow.

7 FLT (F2_15) Internal time level 5 overflow.

8 FLT (F2_16) State machine overflow.

9 FLT (F2_17) Application program execution error.

10 FLT (F2_18) Application program execution error.

11 FLT (F2_19) Illegal instruction.

12 FLT (F2_3) Register stack overflow.

13 FLT (F2_1) System stack overflow.

14 FLT (F2_0) System stack underflow.

15 Reserved

Bit Name Description

0 START INHIBIT For the possible causes and remedies, seeChapter 7 – Fault Tracing.

1 Reserved

2 Reserved

3 MOTOR TEMP

For the possible causes and remedies, seeChapter 7 – Fault Tracing.

4 ACx 600 TEMP

5 ENCODER ERR

6 T MEAS ALM

7 Reserved

8 Reserved

9 Reserved

10 Reserved

11 Reserved

12 COMM MODULEFor the possible causes and remedies, seeChapter 7 – Fault Tracing.

13 THERMISTOR

14 EARTH FAULT

15 Reserved

Firmware Manual C-23

Appendix C – Fieldbus Control

Table C-13 Alarm Word 2 (Actual Signal 3.09).

Bit Name Description

0 Reserved

1 UNDERLOAD For the possible causes and remedies, seeChapter 7 – Fault Tracing.

2 Reserved

3 DC UNDERVOLT

For the possible causes and remedies, seeChapter 7 – Fault Tracing.

4 DC OVERVOLT

5 OVERCURRENT

6 OVERFREQ

7 ALM (A_16) Error in restoring POWERFAIL.DDF.

8 ALM (A_17) Error in restoring POWERDOWN.DDF.

9 MOTOR STALL For the possible causes and remedies, seeChapter 7 – Fault Tracing.10 AI < MIN FUNC

11 Reserved

12 Reserved

13 PANEL LOSS For the possible causes and remedies, seeChapter 7 – Fault Tracing.

14 Reserved

15 Reserved

C-24 Firmware Manual

Appendix C – Fieldbus Control

Table C-14 The NINT Fault Info Word (Actual Signal 3.12). The Word includes information on the location of faults PPCC LINK, OVERCURRENT, EARTH FAULT and SHORT CIRCUIT (see Table C-9 Fault Word 1, Table C-10 Fault Word 2, and Chapter 7 – Fault Tracing).

* In use only with parallel inverters. NINT 0 is connected to NPBU CH1, NINT 1 to CH2 etc.

Bit Name Description

0 NINT 1 FLT NINT 1 board fault*

1 NINT 2 FLT NINT 2 board fault *

2 NINT 3 FLT NINT 3 board fault *

3 NINT 4 FLT NINT 4 board fault *

4 NPBU FLT NPBU board fault *